Home

Roland RD-700SX User's Manual

1. Parameter Value Description 39 GTR AMP SIM GUITAR AMP Hi Feedback 98 98 Proportion of the high range flanger SI MULATOR gound that ito peretiued to thie apii This i ffect that simulates the sound of a guitar amplifier negative values invert the phase EES 8 P i HiStp Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is Assignable Parameters synchronized witi the temp MEX Control Pre Amp Master Pre Amp Volume Pre Amp Speaker HiStp Rt Hz 0 10 20 00 Rate at which the steps will cycle for the Hz high range flanger sound Hz Parameter Value Description b note 1 Rate at which the steps will cycle for the Pre Amp Sw OFF ON Turns the amp switch on off HiStp Rt high range flanger sound note Pre Amp JC 120 Type of guitar amp Balance D100 0W Volume balance of the original sound CLEAN D0 100W D and flanger sound W TWIN Level 0 127 Output volume MATCH DRIVE 35 OVERDRIVE or Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube MS19549II amplifiers MS19591 I SLDN LEAD Assignable Parameters METAL5150 MFX Control Level Amp Type Drive Pan METAL LEAD Parameter Value Description OD 1 Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion OD 2 TURBO Also changes the volume DISTORTION Amp Type SMALL Type of guitar amp FUZZ BUILT IN SMALL small amp Pre Amp 0 127
2. Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description A note 1 Wah effect rate note Vib Cho Type V 1 V 2 V 3 Vibrato and chorus effect types Rate 2 When Control Type is set to TOUCH C4 C2 C 3 V 1 V 2 V 3 Adds a wavering this adjusts the sensitivity to the volume vibrato that is created by changes in used in changing the tone the pitch Depth 0 127 Depth of the wah effect s sweep The effect deepens as the value is Phase 0 180 deg Ratio of the wah effect sound in the left increased and right sides when the spread is not C 1 C 2 C 3 Adds a fullness and distributed evenly breadth chorus to the sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Boost or cut in the low end The effect deepens as the value is High Gain 15 15 dB Boost or cut in the high end increased Level 0 127 Output volume Vib Cho 50 60 70 This reproduces the subtle differences Vintage in the vibrato and chorus effects in TR organs built in different years Settings when using a pedal wah with a pedal connected to Vib Cho Level 0 127 Vibrato chorus effect volume FC1 OD Switch OFF ON Switches the overdrive effect MEX Control Manual OD Drive 0 127 AAA of distortion OD Level 0 127 Overdrive effect volume Control Type PEDAL Rotary Switch OFF ON Switches the rotary effect EDIT 2 Control FC1 MEX Control Rota
3. Parameter Value Description 15 RING MODLTR RING MODULATOR Step Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is This is an effect that applies amplitude modulation AM to the input synchronized with Wie temp e signal producing bell like sounds You can also change the StepRate Hz 0 10 20 00 Rate of the step wise change in the Hz phaser effect Hz modulation frequency in response to changes in the volume of the Step Rate note 1 Rate of the step wise change in the sound sent into the effect phaser effect note P Assignable Parameters Mix 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound MEX Control Frequency Sens Balance Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range ES High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Parameter Value Description Level 0 127 Output Level Frequency 0 127 Adjusts the frequency at which modulation is applied Sens 0 127 Adjusts the amount of frequency 1 3 MULT PHAS ER modulation applied MULTI STAGE PHASE R Polarity UP DOWN Determines whether the frequency modulation moves towards higher Extremely high settings of the phase difference produce a deep phaser frequencies UP or lower opens effect DOWN s Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range Assignable Parameters High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range MEX Control
4. Press EXTERNAL INTERNAL getting the indicator to light The EXTERNAL screen appears If OUT doesn t appear on screen press CURSOR 4 several times to display the NOTE following screen When Rec Mode is set to ON in the Utility Rec Setting in Edit mode the EXTERNAL screen as shown to the left is not displayed Set Rec Mode to OFF when setting the MIDI Transmit channel p 101 PEE pase TERNAL ZOME 2 Press CURSOR 4 VI A VI b JL Y to move the cursor then press INC DEC to set the connector from which the MIDI messages of each zone are to be output Part Parameter Settings Description UP1 UPPER1 OUT ALL The RD 700SX s per UP2 UPPER2 MIDI OUT Port 1 MIDI OUT 1 formance data is LW1 LOWER1 2 MIDI OUT 2 transmitted from the LW1 LOWER2 USB selected connector Using the RD 700SX As a Master Keyboard MIDI Send Channel Settings When you have finished connecting the external MIDI device match the keyboard s Transmit channel and the Receive channel for each of the external MIDI sound generator s Parts Sounds is produced when the MIDI channels for the sending device the RD 700SX and the receiving device the external MIDI sound generator are set to the same MIDI channel EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL ONE TOUCH ZONE SELECT n SOMIT La Ep
5. MEX Control StepRate Depth Feedback Balance Parameter Value Description Filter Type OFF Type of filter LPF OFF No filter is used HPF LPF Cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff Freq HPF Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz Hz Rate D note 1 Frequency of modulation note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Step Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo StepRate Hz 0 10 20 00 Rate period of pitch change Hz Hz Step Rate note 1 Rate period of pitch change note D Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct D0 100W sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 26 HEXA CHORUS Uses a six phase chorus six layers of chorused sound to give richness and spatial spread to the sound
6. Parameter Value Description 49 MULTTAP DLY MULTI TAP DELAY Right Level 0 127 Volume of each delay This effect provides four delays Each of the Delay Time parameters Center Level 0 127 Volume of each delay can be set to a note length based on the selected tempo You can also Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the high frequency range uiu Qul E Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct Assignable Parameters gem EE IE ine delay sound W MFX Control Balance Delay1 Delay2 Delay3 Delay4 Parameter Value Description Delay1 Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is 48 ATP PAN DLY ATAP PAN DELAY synchronized with the tempo This effect has four delays Delay1 ms 1 2600 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is Stereo location of each delay heard Hz D note 1 Adjusts the time until the delay sound is Delay1 heard note 2 2 Delay2 Mode ms note Settings of the Delay 2 1 4 Delay2 ms 1 2600 ms The parameters are the same as for the Delay2 b note 1 Delay 1 Delay3 Mode ms note Settings of the Delay 3 Assignable Parameters Delay3 ms 1 2600 ms The parameters are the same as for the MFX Control Balance Delay1 Delay2 Delay3 Delay4 note 1 Delay 1 Delay3 Parameter Value Description Delay4 Mode ms note Settings of the Delay 4 Delay1 Mode ms note When this is set to note the ef
7. Press RHYTHM SONG to make the button indicator light The song data begins playing Press RHYTHM SONG once more the indicator goes out and the song stops playing You can also start and stop playback of the song by pressing F2 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Selecting the Song Press CURSOR b to go to the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen J4 l1z8 SONG ARP 4 En mea Enjoy Yourself ARP i Phrase 1 RHYTHM If you re in the RHY ARP screen press F1 to access the SONG ARP screen Press CURSOR w to move the cursor to SONG Press INC DEC to select the song Press RHYTHM SONG to make the button indicator light The selected song begins playing Song number 000 is programmed with a Preset song Enjoy performing on the keyboard along with this song as it is played back No Song Name 000 Enjoy Yourself Composer Copyright Scott Tibbs 2004 Roland Corporation Changing Song Tempos 1 In the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen press CURSOR 44 to move the cursor to in the screen Press INC DEC to change the tempo The song are played at the selected tempo NEM When the Tone screen is displayed the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen appears when CURSOR gt is pressed Pressing CURSOR 4 when the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen is showing then displays the Tone screen MEM
8. Parameter Value Description Pan Deviation 0 20 Adjusts the difference in stereo location between each chorus sound 0 All chorus sounds will be in the center 20 Each chorus sound will be spaced at 60 degree intervals relative to the center Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct D0 100W sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 27 TREMOLO CHO TREMOLO CHORUS This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo cyclic modulation of volume Assignable Parameters MEX Control Chorus Depth Cho Rate Trm Rate Balance Parameter Value Description Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Cho Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Modulation frequency of the chorus Hz effect Hz Cho Rate note 1 Modulation frequency of the chorus b effect note Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation depth of the chorus effect Treml Rate Hz note When this is set to note the effect is Mode synchronized with the tempo Trm Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Modulation frequency of the tremolo Hz effect Hz Treml Rate note 1 Modulation frequency of the tremolo b effect note Treml 0 127 Spread of the tremolo effect Separation Treml Phase 0 180 deg Spread of the tremolo effect Balance D100 0W Volu
9. Parameter Value V Link OUT Port ALL OUT1 OUT2 USB Key Range Selecting the Range of Keys to Use as the V Link Controller Parameter Value Key Range A0 C8 Lowest No This sets the number that is output when the lowest key in the range set with Key Range is pressed Parameter Value Description Lowest No 1 128 When V Link Mode is set to BANK PC 0 127 When V Link Mode is set to NOTE Local ON OFF This setting determines whether or not the RD 700SX s sounds are played when a key within the range set with Key Range is pressed 1 The function is alternately turned on or off each time press F2 in the EDIT V Link screen Parameter Value Description LocalON LOCAL Nosounds are played even when keys OFF OFF in the range set in Key Range are pressed LOCAL Sounds are played when keys in the ON range set in Key Range are pressed Other Functions Utility Utility includes functions for sending data to external MIDI sequencers and other devices and for restoring the settings to their original factory state For more on Rec Setting in Utility menu refer to Settings for Recording Rec Setting p 101 Transferring the RD 700SX s Settings to an External MIDI Device Bulk Dump You can transfer the contents of Setups and the RD 700SX s system settings to an external MIDI device This operation is called bulk dump Us
10. Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Dly3 Time 200 1000 ms Adjust the time delay from the direct High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency note sound until when delay 3 sound is range heard Positive settings will emphasize Dly4 Time 200 1000 ms Adjust the time delay from the direct boost the high frequency range note sound until when delay 4 sound is Balance D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the heard D0 100W direct sound and the delay sound With Level1 0 127 Adjust the volume of delay 1 sound a setting of D100 0W only the direct Level 2 0 127 Adjust the volume of delay 2 sound sound will be output and with a setting Level 3 0 127 Adjust the volume of delay 3 sound of D0 100W only the delay sound will be Level 4 0 127 Adjust the volume of delay 4 sound output Feedback 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the delay Level 0 127 Adjust the output level sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the 1 07 2V PCH SFT 2 VOICE PITCH phase HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjust the frequency above which SHIFTE R BYPASS sound fed back to the effect will be cut A Pitch Shifter shifts the pitch of the direct sound This 2 voice pitch If you do not want to cut the high shifter has two pitch shifters and can add two pitch shifted sounds to frequencies of the feedback set this the direct sound parameter to BYPASS Balance
11. 1 MEMD Press ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO If multiple tones are playing This selects a single tone to be played over the entire keyboard do not press the ONE TOUCH PIANO button but instead 2 select the zone containing the Press any of the TONE SELECT buttons to select the tone category tone to be changed using the ZONE SELECT buttons Refer The TONE SELECT button for the selected category lights to Changing the Tone for a 3 Zone p 40 Press INC DEC to select the tone nore Play the keyboard and you will hear the selected tone X NUM LOCK is turned on The next time you choose this TONE SELECT button the tone you re selected here the Tone Category cannot be is played selected with TONE SELECT button For details refer to p 34 NOTE Tones selected with RHY GM2 are registered in the following order Rhythm Sets GM2 Rhythm Sets and GM2 Tones Refer to the Tone List p 146 Performing with the Keyboard Specifying the Tone Number to Select a Tone NUM LOCK DATA lt S E 3 m Each individual tone has a different tone number You can select tones with the TONE SELECT buttons by inputting numerals with these buttons to specify tone numbers Turn NUM LOCK on when inputting numerals with the TONE SELECT buttons EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL EXTERN
12. CE Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears MEMO You can directly display the EDIT MENU System Edit screen by pressing TONE SELECT 0 instead of selecting with CURSOR 4 Sound Control ka Press CURSOR 44 to select 0 System MEMD For faster value increases keep Press ENTER to display the Edit screen GEES INC pressed down and press SH DEC For decreasing value Master Tune faster keep DEC pressed Master Uo urnme 128 EG Mode SETUP down and press INC Pedal Modes SETUP Tone Remain H WRITE MEMO If you want to save this setting Press CURSOR 44 to move the cursor to the Master Tune parameter press F1 WRITE Settings saved in the RD 700SX are not deleted even when the power Press INC DEC to select the value 415 3 440 0 466 2 is turned off Press EDIT to make the indicator go dark You are returned to the Tone screen Overview of the RD 700SX Basic Organization of the RD 700SX The RD 700SX can be divided into two sections a keyboard controller section and a sound generator section The two sections are connected internally by means of MIDI Sound Generator Section B mmm Keyboard Controller Section controllers such as keyboard pitch bend lever e
13. 1 Select 2 Micro Tune Edit in Step 3 of the piano edit settings procedure p 73 then press ENTER The Micro Tune Edit screen appears Micro Tune Edit WRITE RETURN Pressing EXIT returns you to the immediately preceding screen 2 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the TYPE 3 Press INC DEC to select the type 4 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the numerical value Offset 5 Press the key to specify it as the one you want to tune 6 Press INC DEC to adjust the value 7 If you want to save the setting press F1 WRITE The setting is saved to USER Adjusting Resonance when the Damper Pedal is Depressed Sympathetic Resonance You can adjust this resonance when the damper pedal is depressed On an acoustic piano holding down the damper pedal will allow the remaining strings to resonate in sympathy with the sounds that you played from the keyboard adding a rich resonance This feature reproduces that resonance sound Parameter Value Description Resonance 0 10 The volume of the resonance Depth increases as the value is raised Resonance Adjusts the amount of the Pitch wavering effect The wavering effect increases as the value is raised Resonance The volume of the wavering effect Level increases as the value is raised 75 Making Detailed Settings for the ONE TOUCH Tones Changing Sound Characteri
14. Type Refer to Effect Parameter List p 112 ET When MEX Source is set to UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWERI or LOWER2 the Tone Info MFX Type settings p 71 also change MFX Control You can make changes to the multi effect parameters in real time with the MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL knob Here select the parameter to be changed The parameters that can be changed vary with the different multi effects selected in Type The available choices depend on the Type setting Parameter Value C1 2 MEX Control Refer to Effect Parameter List p 112 Other Multi effects Settings You can make even more detailed settings to the multi effects When you select the multi effects Type a number of parameters particular to that type are displayed Refer to the Effect Parameter List p 112 for the values that can be set NOTE Multi effects are not applied to parts in which the Part Parameter MFX Switch is set to OFF With some types of multi effects lowering the volume of the Part to which the multi effects are added may end up changing the amount of the effect applied In such cases adjust the Level in MFX parameters NOTE Use caution before setting the Feedback parameter to its maximum or minimum values since such settings may cause the sound to play continuously Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Making Reverb Settings Reverb adds the reverberation characte
15. 46 Playing Arpeggios ARPEGGIO 5 ettet tetendit ENEE 46 Charging the Arpegeglo Style oet rere cadetes 47 Changing Arpegeio Tempos eerte enitn tree petet d ope nte E 47 Playing Rhythm RHYTHM SONGT een 48 Changing the Rhythm Pattern eter tre tercer terree terrent rota ag sa re itn 49 Changing Rhythm Tempo eter rre tenerte ree eer petet ti he ree eee ince 49 Playing the Songs RHYTHM SONGJ eee 50 Selecting the Song eee enceinte aid 51 Changing Song TemipOs tret reete rennes E aE 51 Applying Effects to the Sound Multi Effects ss 52 Simulating the Creation of Organ Tones Tone Wheel Mode 53 Changing the Undulation of the Organ Tone Rotary Effect 54 Changing the ZONE LEVEL Slider Feet Assignments Harmonic Bar cconocncicananncnnnnnnnnrnrnncnroso 54 Disabling the Button Panel Lock veian iaa tentent hinten ct ipa Ii deter iege dad 55 Selecting Stored S ttngs SETUP inae in att een tea edere tee t to ebe 56 Registering the Setups You Like Favorite Setups ss 57 Storing Settings to Setups WREFE iiie ette terere ti tee tet recibe nine 58 Using the RD 700SX As a Master Keyboard 60 EE 60 About HEES 60 Connecting to External MIDI Sound Generator seen eee 60 Selecting the MIDI Connector to Use for Output MIDI OUT Port 61 MIDI Send Channel Settings ss dll ditti dieci eo dos dca d deti ru ne a e
16. Is ZONE SWITCH set to OFF p 41 p 64 Is a Part s volume turned off with the ZONE LEVEL slider p 41 p 64 No Sound If the sound for a pressed key does is not being played is the Local Switch set to OFF In the Utility Rec Setting in Edit mode set the Local Switch to ON p 101 Are the effect settings correct Check following settings ON OFF settings for MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF p 52 Other Multi Effect settings in Edit mode p 87 p 112 No Sound in a Specific Range Has the range in which sounds are to be played the key range been set Check following settings Settings for the LWR and UPR Parts in the External screen p 66 Key Range settings in Zone Info p 69 With certain Tones for example Rhythm Sets bass Tones Timpani and other Tones will not sound if a portion of the Tone falls outside the recommended range Is V Link switched on p 97 Set the Local ON OFF to ON in the V Link Setting in Edit mode Sounds are played with keyboard even when V Link is switched on Are the Wave Expansion Boards correctly installed When selecting settings while using the EXPANSION A or B Tones or Rhythm Sets confirm that the specified Wave Expansion Boards are properly installed in the specified slots p 15 Has the volume been lowered by pedal operations or by MIDI messages volume messages or expression messages received from a
17. Setting the Volume and Pan Volume Pan Sets the volume and the panning localizes sound image for each of the Tones The Volume setting is mainly used when multiple tones are playing to obtain the desired balance in volume between each part The Pan setting localizes the sound image of each part when the output is in stereo With an increase in the value for L more of the sound will be heard as coming from the left side Similarly more of the sound will originate at the right if the value of R is increased When set to 0 the sound is heard as coming from the center Parameter Value Volume 0 127 Pan L64 0 63R Setting the Required Polyphony Voice Reserve The RD 700SX has a maximum polyphony the number of sounds or voices that can be produced simultaneously by the sound generator of 128 voices This setting specifies the number of voices that will be reserved for each Part when more than 128 voices are played simultaneously For example if Voice Reserve is set to 6 for Part 1 Part 1 will always have 6 notes of sound producing capacity available to it even if a total of more than 128 notes total for all Parts are being requested You can make separate Voice Reserve settings for each individual Part 92 Parts to total an amount greater than 64 Preventing Parts from Being Played Part Switch Sets the part on or off Parameter Value Part Switch ON OFF
18. LE 1 Jeseug S O S O S6 1ls Gx O Gx O v6 see esodind e1eue sn10y9 O O 6 OJOuJ91 S O S O 6 see esodind e1euec qie eu O O L6 JO1JUOD ojueuieuodg S O S O v8 9 1e Jonu09 esodind eJauar G O G O 8 Z 49j 03u00 esodind jejeuec q O G O c8 9 Ja o1juo9 esodind eJauar G O G O 18 G 1901U09 esodind reouen G O G O 08 Aejep oyesqiA O Gx O 82 yidap oje1qIA v O G O 22 eyed OJeIqIA Vx O S O 92 aun Aeoaq Yx O Gx O SZ HONO O O vZ owl YOeNV O O au eseajey O O CZ 171 Main Specifications RD 700SX Digital Piano Conforms to General MIDI 2 System Keyboard 88 keys Progressive Hammer Action Keyboard Part 16 Parts Maximum Polyphony 128 voices Wave Memory 128 M bytes 16 bit linear equivalent O Expansion Slots Wave Expansion Board SRX Series 2 slots Tones Normal Tones 208 Tonewheel Organ 10 General MIDI 2 Tones 256 Rhythm Sets 5 General MIDI 2 Rhythm Sets 9 O Setups 100 O Flash Memory Approx 1 M Bytes 1000 K bytes O Effects Multi Effects 2 systems 125 types Reverb 6 types Chorus 3 types Sound Control 3 band Compressor 3 band Digital Equalizer Arpeggiator 128 styles O Rhythm Pattern 185 patterns O Controllers Zone Level slider x 4 Assignable Equalizer knobs Reverb knob Chorus knob Multi Effects Control knob Pitch Bend Modulation lever O Display 1
19. Making the Effect ON OFF Settings MFX Switch This setting determines whether the multi effects are applied ON or not OFF For example with the MFX Dest setting p 87 set to ALL multi effects are applied to all parts multi effects are not applied to the parts for which this is set to OFF Parameter Value MFX Switch OFF ON Setting Reception and Blocking of MIDI Messages from External MIDI Controllers You can change the RD 700SX s tones by reception of MIDI messages generated through the actions of modulation levers pedals knobs and other such external MIDI devices controls You can set whether to have the following MIDI messages received ON or not OFF individually in each part Parameter Description Value BS Rx Bank Select ON OFF PC Rx Program Change Md Rx Modulation PB Rx Pitch Bend VI Rx Volume HI Rx Hold 1 Pn Rx Pan Ex Rx Expression Making the Rhythm and A io Settings Rhythm Der How to Make Settings 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU S File Utility USB 6 Part Parameter 7 Rhsthm Arressio amp V Link 3 Utiltits 2 Press CURSOR 44 W to select 7 Rhythm Arpeggio 3 Press ENTER to display the Edit screen EDIT Rhythm 4 Press CURSOR 4 VI b to switch screens 5 Press CURSOR 44 J Ww to move the
20. Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory in another MIDI device e g a sequencer Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored in another MIDI device e g a sequencer once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packagin
21. Is Coarse Tune Fine Tune or Stretch Tune set for any specific Part Check the following settings Tone Info Course Tune Fine Tune p 71 Stretch Tune settings in Edit mode p 82 C T and F T setting in External screen p 67 Pedal function is not affected Is the System Pedal Mode setting in Edit mode set to SYSTEM Set this to SETUP p 80 Has the RD 700SX gone out of tune Check the following settings e System Master Tune settings in Edit mode p 27 e System Temperament settingsin Edit mode p 82 Micro Tune settings in Piano Edit p 75 Has the pitch been changed by pedal operations or by Pitch Bend messages received from an external MIDI device Sound is Cut Off When you try playing more than the maximum 128 voices simultaneously sounds currently being played may be cut out Increase the Voice Reserve settings for the Parts you do not want to have cut off p 92 Sound Keeps Playing When Key is Pressed Is the pedal polarity reversed Check the System Pedal Polarity settings in Edit mode p 81 Exclusive Messages Cannot Be Received Is the Device ID number of the transmitting device matched to the RD 700SX s Device ID number Check the System Device ID settings in Edit mode p 81 110 Error Messages Other Messages Error Messages Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Ac
22. 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 04H Sub ID 2 Master Coarse Tuning 1H Master Coarse Tuning LSB mmH Master Coarse Tuning MSB F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Il ignored processed as 00H mm 28H 40H 58H 24 0 24 semitones e Global Parameter ControlReverb Parameters Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 05H 01H 01H F7H 01H 01H 01H ppH vvH Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 05H Sub ID 2 Global Parameter Control 01H Slot path length 01H Parameter ID width 01H Value width 01H Slot path MSB 01H Slot path LSB Effect 0101 Reverb ppH Parameter to be controlled vvH Value for the parameter pp 0 Reverb Type vv 00H Small Room vv 01H Medium Room vv 02H Large Room vv 03H Medium Hall vv 04H Large Hall vv 08H Plate pp 1 Reverb Time vv 00H 7FH 0 127 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive OChorus Parameters Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 05H 01H 01H F7H 01H 01H 02H ppH vvH Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 05H Sub ID 2 Global Parameter Control 01H Slot path length 01H Parameter width 01H Value width 01H Slot path MSB 02H Slot path LSB Effect 0102 Chorus ppH Parameter to be controlled vvH Value for the parameter
23. N OFF T EXPANSION PPER 1 O LOWER E Tone List p 146 Press ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO This selects a single tone to be played over the entire keyboard Press NUM LOCK to make the indicator light This enables input of numerals with the TONE SELECT buttons The numerical value that can be entered with each button is indicated beneath the buttons Enter the tone number with the TONE SELECT buttons Press ENTER The tone is set Play the keyboard and you will hear the selected tone The TONE SELECT buttons included in the selected Tone numbers lit Playing a Rhythm Set Among the tones that can be selected with the TONE SELECT buttons are Rhythm Sets which are collections of a variety of percussion instrument sounds and special sound effects Here s how to select a Rhythm Set and play percussion sounds Press ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO Press TONE SELECT RHY GM2 If NUM LOCK is turned on at this time the Rhythm Set Category cannot be selected Turn NUM LOCK off Press different keys to play different percussion instruments To select a different Rhythm Set press INCV DEC The combination of sounds assigned to the keyboard varies according to the Rhythm set Refer t
24. O Q NN O O O1 Q N O 152 Arpeggio Style Phrase 1 Key Backing 1 Pop Piano 1 Pop Piano 2 Phrase 2 Phrase 3 Single Note 1 Single Note 2 Rock Keys Rock Shuffle Blues Shuffle Blues Salsa 1 Salsa 2 Fast Bossa Ballad Keys Triplet Keys Bossa Gtr Synth Brass 1 Synth Brass 2 Jazz Strum Pop Strum Strum 1 Strum 2 Guitar Arp 1 Guitar Arp 2 Guitar Arp 3 Gtr Backing 1 Gtr Backing 2 Gtr Backing 3 Gtr Backing 4 Gtr Backing 5 Rock Mute 1 Rock Mute 2 Rock Mute 3 Phrase 4 Phrase 5 Phrase 6 Phrase 7 Phrase 8 Phrase 9 Phrase 10 No 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 Arpeggio Style Phrase 11 Phrase 12 Phrase 13 Phrase 14 Phrase 15 Phrase 16 Phrase 17 Phrase 18 Phrase 19 Phrase 20 Key Backing 2 Key Backing 3 Key Backing 4 Key Backing 5 Key Backing 6 Key Backing 7 Key Backing 8 Key Backing 9 Key Backing 10 Key Backing 11 Key Backing 12 Key Backing 13 Key Backing 14 Key Backing 15 Key Backing 16 Key Backing 17 Key Backing 18 5th Bass 8th Rock Boogie Bass Shuffle D Stop Swing Bass Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 Synth Bass 3 Bassline 1 Bassline 2 Bassline 3 Bassline 4 Bassline 5 Bassline 6 Bassline 7 No 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
25. TEL 323 890 3700 As of December 10 2005 ROLAND 03788712 06 4 6N
26. fo MIDI Out Port Rhythm ss 94 Modulation 7 n sa qu u un n Ee 44 Modulation Depth External Zone a sana e tome bete 67 Mono Poly External Zone ss 66 Tone lt iii n ua naa aun enu 71 Motif inmi Gud hayanta kanal has 95 MSB rite then dde ended uid 63 MULTI EFECTS CONTROL knob 85 MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL 52 MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF 52 Mult Effects ciatti 52 68 86 92 MULTT EFFECTS CONTROL knob 12 MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF 12 N Nuances tete reet ete Ee 73 NUM LOCK eren 13 30 34 O ION ORE diste Aetna 12 ONE TOUCH E PIANQ 32 76 ONE TOUCH PIANO 32 73 OUT mam T rM de re de 61 OUTPUT ET 14 Output SELECT u ana aaah ei itm hates 88 P IAS UD ua ctis tope At Ta hu ct md 69 BAS min ne AI 67 PAIN E PR ech 65 68 Pan External Zone ss 65 MIDI WEE EE 92 Part Parameter sy sa uu ani sets 92 Zone Info a PT Re 68 artgerecht 55 Patti idee te etti de 28 92 Tone IO aiu ole e nn S conte or E OM aas 71 Part Assign Zone e SE 69 Part Mode iscritte q 82 Part Parameter to e el ba e etes 91 Part Switch e We eet e EA ie 92 E WEE 93 PB Pitch Bend Switch External Zone ss 67 MID WEE 92 ZonejWnfO EE 70 PE ts E Eet See 63 92 Pedal Connection en e
27. with INC DEC ET You cannot set the key range s lower limit higher than the upper limit nor can you set the upper limit below the lower limit NOTE When the split point p 39 is changed the Key Range value also changes Setting the Change in Volume According to the Force Used to Play the Keyboard Velocity Range Sens Max This setting determines how the volume changes in response to the force used to play the keyboard velocity and the maximum value of the change Kaa This setting is disregarded with certain tones Parameter Value VRL Velocity 1 127 Range Lower VRU Velocity 1 127 Range Upper Description This specifies the lower limit VLW and upper limit VUP of the range in which the tone is played according to the velocity Make this setting when you want the tone to change depending on the key velocity Sns 63 63 This setting determines how the Velocity volume changes in response to the Sensitivity velocity The volume is increased as the keyboard is played with greater force when a positive Value is used when a negative value is selected the volume decreases as the keys are played with greater force If this is set to 0 the volume will not be affected by the strength of your playing on the keyboard Max 1 127 Velocity Max Maximum velocity value for the corresponding key Lowering this value will produce softer notes even if you play the k
28. 10 00 17 00 SETUP External Zone LOWER2 01 00 03 06 Oaaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 6 Bank A 0 100 10 00 20 00 SETUP Part Part 01 01 00 03 07 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 7 Bank A 0 100 10 00 21 00 SETUP Part Part 02 01 00 03 08 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 8 Bank A 0 100 01 00 03 09 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 9 Bank A 0 100 10 00 2F 00 SETUP Part Part 16 DEMEURE EE CE 01 00 03 OA Oaaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 0 Bank B 0 100 10 00 30 00 SETUP TW Organ 1 Backup 01 00 03 OB 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 1 Bank B 0 100 10 00 31 00 SETUP TW Organ 2 Backup 01 00 03 OC 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 2 Bank B 0 100 01 00 03 OD 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 3 Bank B 0 100 10 00 39 00 SETUP TW Organ 10 Backup 01 00 03 OE 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 4 Bank B 0 100 01 00 03 OF 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 5 Bank B 0 100 01 00 03 10 Oaaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 6 Bank B 0 100 01 00 03 11 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 7 Bank B 0 100 01 00 03 12 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 8 Bank B 0 100 01 00 03 13 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 9 Bank B 0 100 01 00 00 00 0000 aaaa 01 00 03 14 Oaaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 0 Bank C 0 100 0000 bbbb 01 00 03 15 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 1 Bank C 0 100 0000 cccc 01 00 03 16 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 2 Bank C 0 100 0000 dddd Master Tune 24 2024 01 00 03 17 Oaaa aaaa Favorite S
29. 24 31 1FH 63 3FH 95 5FH 127 7FH 10 00 2p OB 0000 000a Portamento Switch 0 1 me OFF ON D decimal 10 00 2p 0C 0000 aaaa h imal 0000 bbbb Portamento Time 0 127 H hexadecima 10 00 2p OE 0aaa aaaa Cutoff 0 127 63 63 19 99 29 0 Den sede Resonance e z GN Decimal values such as MIDI channel and program change are listed as one greater than 10 00 2p 10 0aaa aaaa Attack Time 0 127 the values given in the above table 63 63 B t 10 00 2p 11 Oaaa aaaa Decay Time 0 127 A 7 bit byte can express data in the range of 128 steps For data where greater precision 63 63 E S 10 00 2p 12 Oaaa aaaa Release Time 0 127 is required we must use two or more bytes For example two hexadecimal numbers aa SE bbH expressing two 7 bit bytes would indicate a value of aa x 128 bb 10 00 2p 13 0aaa aaaa Chorus Amount 0 127 In the case of values which have a sign 00H 64 40H 0 and 7FH 63 so that the 10 00 2p 14 0aaa aaaa Reverb Amount 0 127 gn ex e b 10 00 2p 15 0aaa aaaa MFX Type 0 125 decimal expression would be 64 less than the value given in the above chart In the case 10 00 2p 16 0000 000a Part MFX Switch 0 1 of two types 00 00H 8192 40 00H 0 and 7F 7FH 8191 For example if aa bbH 10 00 2p 17 0000 000a Receive Bank Select Switch 0 1 were expressed as decimal this would be aa bbH 40 00H aa x 128 bb 64 x
30. 50 50 one cent 50 cents 1 cent 1 100 semitone Setting the Range for the Change in Pitch with the Bender Bend Range This sets the amount of pitch change that will occur when you move the Pitch Bend lever 4 octaves Parameter RPN Value B R Bend Range 00H 00H OFF 0 48 semitone Setting the Amount of Modulation Applied Modulation Depth This sets the depth of the effect when the Modulation lever is tilted Parameter RPN Value M D Modulation Depth 00H 05H OFF 0 127st Turning Each Controller On and Off These settings determine whether the external MIDI device is controlled ON or not OFF by the pedals connected to each PEDAL jack the slider the Modulation lever and the Bender Parameter Description Value Dp Damper pedal ON OFF F1 Pedal connected to the FC1 jack F2 Pedal connected to the FC2 jack PB Pitch Bender Md Modulation Lever UP1 Control Slider UP1 UP2 Control Slider UP2 LW1 Control Slider LW1 LW2 Control Slider LW2 Transmitting the Control Change USER CC USER CC Value You can make two types of settings here the Control Change message to be transmitted and the value for the Control Change Parameter Value CC1 User CC1 OFF 0 127 Value User CC1 Value CC2 User CC2 Value User CC2 Value 67 Ma
31. 7 RHY Contemp2 40 RHY Elec 1 73 RHY Contemp4 8 RHY Disco 1 41 Touch Orch 74 RHY Elec 3 9 GtrArp amp Bass 42 RHY Contemp3 75 RHY Rock 4 10 RHY RckBalad 43 RHY Latin 1 76 RHY Samba 11 Bell Pad 44 RHY R amp B Grv7 77 Mysterious 12 RHY PianoPop 45 RHY Synth Gt 78 RHY Jz Trio5 13 RHY Dramatic 46 RHY Lead Brs 79 RHY Blues 2 14 RHY R amp B Grv2 47 Large Choir 80 E Piano amp Pad2 15 RHY Bossa 1 48 RHY Elec 2 81 RHY Trance 4 16 RHY Trance 1 49 RHY GrvFlute 82 RHY Latin 4 17 RHY Bigband 50 Melancholy 83 Jumpin 18 RHY R amp B Grv5 51 RHY Hps amp Harp 84 RHY Elec 4 19 PadpAdpaDp d 52 RHY Grv Scat 85 RHY R amp B Grv3 20 RHY Fairy EP 53 RHY Disco 2 86 RHY Rock 5 21 RHY Jz Trio1 54 RHY Jz Trio3 87 RHY SynSitar 22 RHY GrvPiano 55 Bright Stack 88 RHY ONDO 23 4 Split 56 RHY Trance 3 89 Piano amp EPiano 24 RHY R amp B Bld1 57 RHY ShuflPop 90 Piano amp Str 25 RHY Rock 2 58 A Cappella 91 RD SETUP 26 RHY Trance 2 59 RHY Grv E P 92 RD SETUP 27 OD Organ 60 E Piano amp Pad1 93 RD SETUP 28 RHY PnoBalad 61 RHY Rock 3 94 RD SETUP 29 RHY Bossa 2 62 RHY Latin 2 95 RD SETUP 30 RHY SwingPop 63 RHY Blues 1 96 RD SETUP 31 RHY Clav Org 64 RHY Latin 3 97 RD SETUP 32 RHY Jz Funk1 65 RHY SpacePop 98 RD SETUP 33 RHY SwingVib 66 Piano amp Pad 3 99 RD SETUP Setup No 091 100 RD SETUP include the Basic Setup Use this when creating Setups from scratch 154 Shortcut List You can easily change settings for the following functions using a number of relate
32. 7FH 64 0 63 1 change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4CH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Vibrato Rate value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 OVibrato Depth Controller number 77 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4DH vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Vibrato Depth Value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 OVibrato Delay Controller number 78 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4EH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Vibrato Delay value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 OPortamento Control Controller number 84 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 54H kkH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 kk source note number 00H 7FH 0 127 A Note on received immediately after a Portamento Control message will change continuously in pitch starting from the pitch of the Source Note Number fa voice is already sounding for a note number identical to the Source Note Number this voice will continue sounding Oe legato and will when the next Note on is received smoothly change to the pitch of that Note on The rate of the pitch change caused by Portamento Time value Portamento Control is determined by the OEffect 1 Reverb Send Level Controller number 91 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5BH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Reverb Send Level 00H 7FH 0 127 TheReverb Amou
33. EXTERNAL RHYTHM SoNG mum CI 2 For instructions on setting each of the external MIDI sound generator s Part s Receive Press EXTERNAL INTERNAL getting the indicator to light The EXTERNAL screen appears channel refer to the owner s If Ch doesn t appear on screen press CURSOR 4 several times to display the manual for each device won When Rec Mode is set to ON in the Utility Rec Setting in Edit mode the EXTERNAL screen as shown to the left is not displayed Set Rec Mode to OFF when setting the MIDI Transmit channel p 101 following screen J 120 CAGE DILI T 55 LSB PC ST B64 uni urz ALI lui ALI luz OFF CHIDI OST Port Press CURSOR 4 H el b JL Y to move the cursor then press INC DEC to set the Transmit channel Ch for each part MEMD Part Parameter Settings Description Part names for Parts in which UP1 UPPER1 Ch 1 16 RD 700SX perfor ZONE SWITCH is set to OFF UP2 UPPER2 MIDI OUT mance data is sent appear in the display in LW1 LOWER1 Channel over a selected chan lowercase letters such as LW1 LOWER2 nel up1 up2 1w1 and rw2 MIDI messages for Parts with the ZONE SWITCH set to OFF are not transmitted
34. L amp H The notes are played one by one in sequence from the highest of the pressed keys The notes for both the lowest and highest pressed keys are sounded each time DOWN _ The notes are played one by one in sequence from the highest of the pressed keys No one note is played every time UP amp DOWN L The notes are played one by one in sequence from the lowest of the pressed keys to the highest and then back again in the reverse order The note for the lowest pressed key is sounded each time UP amp DOWN L amp H The notes are played one by one in sequence from the lowest of the pressed keys to the highest and then back again in the reverse order The notes for the lowest and highest pressed keys are sounded each time UP amp DOWN O The notes are played one by one in sequence from the lowest of the pressed keys to the highest and then back again in the reverse order No one note is played every time RANDOM D The notes are played one by one in random order The note for the lowest pressed key is sounded each time RANDOM O The notes are played one by one in random order No one note is played every time PHRASE A phrase based on the pitch of the lowest pressed key is played If more than one key is pressed the pitch of the key that is pressed last is used NOTE Depending on the Arpeggio Style selected it is not so effective as it
35. Part Part 1 UPPER1 Tone 001 Surerior Grd Coarse Tune Fine Tune a Portamento Switch OFF Portamento Time 20 Press INC DEC to set the value When you finish making settings press F1 extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen NOTE The following parameters cannot be changed when the selected tone is used as the Virtual Tonewheel tone Mono Poly Coarse Tune Fine Tune Portamento Switch Portamento Time Attack Time Release Time Cutoff Resonance Decay Time Making Detailed Settings for Tones Selecting the Part and the Tone to Be Set Part Tone Choose the Part and the Tone for which you want to make settings Parameter Value lt Part gt 1 16 Parts assigned to the INTERNAL Zone are indicated by a marker UPPER1 appearing after the part name Tone When the part to be set is selected the name of the assigned tone appears You can select tone using the TONE SELECT buttons Setting the Reverb Chorus Depth Reverb Chorus Amount This sets the depth of the reverb and chorus effects NOTE When this value is set to 0 no reverb or chorus effect is applied when the REVERB DEPTH or CHORUS DEPTH knob is turned Parameter Value Reverb Amount 0 127 Chorus Amount NOTE The manner in which the effect is applied will differ depending on the settings for MFX Source p 86 and MFX1 Dest p 87 When MEX Dest i
36. Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 44H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON OResonance Controller number 71 MIDI Implementation Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 47H vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Resonance value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 The Resonanse parameter Tone Info Resonance will change ORelease Time Controller number 72 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 48H vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Release Time value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 The Release Time parameter Tone Info Release Time will change OAttack time Controller number 73 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 49H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Attack time value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 The Attack Time parameter Tone Info Attack Time will change OCutoff Controller number 74 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4AH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Cutoff value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 The Cutoff parameter Tone Info Cutoff wil ODecay Time Controller number 75 1 change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4BH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Decay Time value relative change 00H The Decay parameter Tone Info Decay wil OVibrato Rate Controller number 76
37. Using the RD 700SX As a Master Keyboard Selecting Sounds on an External MIDI Device To switch the tones of an external MIDI device the program number and the MSB LSB of the Bank Select message are entered as numerical values on the RD 7005X EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL ONE TOUCH ZONE SELEC EXPANSION FUNCTION geg E T O LOWER T UPPER O Zeen i a Num wy ote PA E FF V INTER SONG PL OLOWER2 UPPER2 O A 8 EDIT WRITE LOCK O OQ 7 Pfleeg Zeen T gt gt Lesen T open lt S 9 5 3 m REVERB CHORUS DELAY MULTI EFFECTS o ROOM N OFF CON E mundum When Rec Mode is set to ON in the Utility Rec Setting in Edit mode the EXTERNAL screen as shown to the left is not displayed Set Rec Mode to OFF when setting the MIDI Transmit channel p 101 Press EXTERNAL INTERNAL getting the indicator to light The EXTERNAL screen appears If MSB doesn t appear on screen press CURSOR 4 several times to display the following screen Parameter Tx Settings OUT MIDI OUT Port ALL 1 2 USB Ch MIDI Channel 1 16 MSB Bank Select MSB CC 00 0 127 OFF NOTE LSB Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127
38. ee SSeS SE i Puey cc lt c RD 700SX 1 Before starting the connection procedure make sure that the power to all devices has been turned off 2 After reading Connecting the RD 700SX to External Equipment p 21 connect an audio device system or headphones 3 Connectthe external MIDI sound device with the MIDI cable as shown in the figure above 4 As described in Turning On the Power p 23 turn on the power of each device Settings for Recording Rec Setting Rec Mode is a convenient feature to use when recording to an external sequencer When using the REC Mode function you can get the most suitable settings for recording the RD 700SX s data to an external sequencer without having to make all the Part and channel settings 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears 2 Press CURSOR W to select 9 Utility 3 Press ENTER to display the Edit screen EDIT CUtility 1 Bulk Dume Temporary Z Bulk Dume SETUP 3 Factory Reset Curnt 4 Factory Reset All 4 Press CURSOR W to select 0 Rec Setting 5 Press ENTER and the following screen will appear Rec Settings Rec Mode Local Switch Parameter Value Description Rec Mode ON OFF Ordinarily this will be set to OFF When this is set to ON settings appropriate for recording are used with respect to
39. 02H Sub ID 2 Identity Reply 41H ID number Roland 03H 02H Device family code RD 700SX 00H 00H Device family number code RD 700SX 00H 01H 00H 00H Software revision level F7H EOX End of Exclusive Data Transmission OData set 1DT1 12H Status Data byte Status FOH 41H dev 00H 00H 03H 12H aaH bbH F7H ccH ddH eeH ffH sum Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev Device ID dev 00H 1FH Initial value is 10H 00H Model ID 1 RD 700SX 00H Model ID 2 RD 700SX 03H Model ID 3 RD 700SX 12H Command ID DT1 aaH Address MSB upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent bbH Address upper middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ccH Address lower middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ddH Address LSB lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent eeH Data the actual data to be sent Multiple bytes of data are transmitted in order starting from the address ffH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Theamount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data and data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size Refer to the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 164 Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less and each packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms 163 MIDI Impl
40. 43 808 Tom 2 Real Tom 6 Brash Tom 2 Timpani Sticks E 808 chh EXC1 Pedal HiHat2 EXC1 Pedal HiHat3 EXC1 Timpani SquareClick 45 808 Tom 2 Real Tom 4 Brash Tom 2 Timpani Mtrnm Click EJ TR 808 OHH EXC1 Open HiHat2 EXC1 Open HiHat3 EXC1 Timpani Mtrnm Bell S 808 Tom 2 Real Tom 4 Brash Tom 2 Timpani Gt FretNoiz c3l48 808 Tom 2 Real Tom 1 Brash Tom 2 Timpani Gt CutNoise EJ 808 Crash Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 3 Timpani Gt CutNoise 50 808 Tom 2 Real Tom 1 Brash Tom 2 Timpani String Slap HEM Pide Cymbal Ride Cymbal Ride Cymbal2 Timpani FI KeyClick 52 ChinaCymbal ChinaCymbal ChinaCymbal Timpani Laughing 53 Ride Bell Ride Bell 3 Ride Bell 2 Timpani Screaming C EZ Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Punch 55 Splash Cym Splash Cym Splash Cym Splash Cym Heart Beat EJ 808cowbe Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Footsteps 57 Crash Cym 2 Crash Cym 2 Crash Cym 2 Con Cymbal2 Footsteps EN Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Applause pa Ride Cymbal4 Ride Cymbal4 Ride Cymbal4 Concert Cym Creaking C460 Bongo High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo High Door HH Bongo Lo Bongo Lo Bongo Lo Bongo Lo Scratch 62 808 Conga Mute H Conga Mute H Conga Mute H Conga Wind Chimes ee 808 Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Hi Opn Conga Hi Opn Car Engine 64 808 Conga Conga Lo Opn Conga Lo Opn Conga Lo Opn Car Stop 65 High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale Car Pass E Lov Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Car Crash 67 Agogo Agogo Agogo Agogo Siren EJ Agogo A
41. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 dB 01 00 02 08 0000 aaaa Mid band Ratio 0 13 4 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 6 Start 1 1 8 1 2 0 1 2 5 1 3 2 1 4 0 Address Description 1 5 6 1 8 0 1 16 1 INF C EE EE 01 00 02 09 000a aaaa Mid band Level 0 24 01 00 00 00 System Oy 25 3 90 55 67 74 85 9 ESF t RE eee et en soe SLE BS LR Sr ce EE ET 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 00 00 00 SETUP Temporary 20 21 22 23 24 dB Wawan O ne PR E O ili 222 0 4 2 er tite 1e 01 00 02 OA Oaaa aaaa High band Attack time 0 100 01 00 02 OB 0aaa aaaa High band Release time 0 100 System 01 00 02 0C 00aa aaaa High band Threshold 0 36 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 Start 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 Address Description 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 dd Ee e CR CORRE Seas a 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 dB 01 00 00 00 System Common 01 00 02 OD 0000 aaaa High band Ratio 0 13 01 00 02 00 System Sound Control 1 170 TELL 1 152 1 1 4 1 1 6 01 00 03 00 System Favorite SETUP 1 1 8 1 2 0 1 2 5 1 3 2 1 4 0 01 00 04 00 System V Link 1 5 6 1 8 0 1 16 1 INF 01 00 05 00 System One Touch Piano TYPE A 01 00 02 OE 000a aaaa High band Level
42. About th Function Buttons erret idilio 29 About the CURSOR Buttons eerte rrr tener er eese inner eg eere eere petente 30 Charging th Settings ValUES onere titt tee nter treten pend be Ree reete 30 Listening to the Demo DEMO PLAY 1 Performing with the Keyboard 32 Piano Performances ONE TOUCH Jirritorna iieiaei ete entend eter agree test Leere dere 32 Performing with a Variety Of Tones usines 33 Specifying the Tone Number to Select a Tone NUM LOCKI 1 nn 34 Selecting Wave Expansion Board Tones ss 35 Playing Multiple Tones with the Keyboard ss 37 Performing with Layered Tones sn 37 Playing Different Tones in Two Different Sections of the Keyboard SPLIT 38 Chariging sthe Tone fora Zone ua aan a du eiie i EM sta 40 Adjust the Volume Level for Individual Zones ZONE SWITCH ZONE LEVEL Slider 41 Transposing the Key of the Keyboard TRANSPOSE seen nne eene 42 Adding Reverberation to the Sound REVERB seen 43 Adding Breadth to the Sound CHORUS DELAYT in 43 Changing the Sound s Pitch in Real Time Bender Modulation Lever 44 Adding Liveliness to the Sound SOUND CONTROL 44 Adjusting the Level of the Sound s Low Mid and High Frequency Ranges EDOUALIZER 45 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances
43. Control ra 44 88 Sound Control Type ss 89 A ated aimes 12 39 Split eeneg 38 SE 39 Standard MIDI Files E 105 Stereo Width oit ss obi e Gees 73 Storage Mode 5rd 105 Stretch Tune ord oe eren the eg 82 String Resonance sss 74 Sylen hera ete 95 Sympathetic Resonance eee 75 SVSLeT orm eee osi et edi erp tese reser cer eet 79 System Parameter mser aiiken inei i iE eE 90 T Temperament REENEN 82 Temperament Key eee 82 Tempo ATtpeggiO 95 ArpegPOD argiei irinen e eka e Eh 47 Rhythm nn bi nepos 49 93 SODB ente toe ees e A A 51 TONER a un Ie E RR S Su iS rare 28 Part Parameter uc aite cete res 92 Piano Edita aaa dalla anita 73 Tone Info ii EC Eee 71 Zone EO G din te sien 68 TONE LIST vestir 146 Tone Modify E Pi no Edit 5 us Aann eme EE er 77 Piano Edit seu dedu 76 Tone Infos rimini ae ive p RO 72 Tone Realiza n ee orm eei deis 81 TONE SELECT buttons 13 Tone Wheel aan a ether trennen 29 Tone Wheel Mode 53 RE 66 69 TRANSPOSE atras der AEN ee E ant 13 42 Transpose ss 42 External Ze ssh au aan aywayaa has 66 Zone NfO eoe ia attain i aus 69 Type Chorus esca hapa S nee EE 88 MEX zusenden aeo uwa Seba 87 MEX Tone Info ss 71 Micro Tune Piano Edit au aaa sess 75 Reverb ii tnt tios 87 Sound Control a cine Pet
44. External ZOMG cnica ic 65 Piano bel sse eo edere eere 73 Tone Info u as a diee ias 71 R verb Amount mina 71 REVERB DEPTH knob 12 43 Reverb Level cet een ets 73 Reverb Type oet teniente 87 A ei et aeara Seana ne e AEAEE 94 Rhy Set E 94 Rhy Get Changes ns eene epe 94 Rhy Arp Duration ss 94 Rhy Arp Grid oen isotopes 94 Rhythm Accent ss 94 Rhythm MIDI Out Channel e 94 fo Rhythm MIDI Out Port ss 94 Rhythm Pattern ioeo araa 49 93 Rhythm Pattern List E 153 Rhythm Set eadein tied er adiret 94 Rhythm Set Change ss 94 Rhythm Set List ss 149 Rhythm Arpeggio ss 93 Rhythm Arpeggio Duration e 94 Rhythm Arpeggio Grid en 94 RHYTHM SON G eene 12 48 50 Rotary Effect renas celia teen nn 54 Rx GM GM2 System ON ss 82 RES Reset ere 82 RxcBank Select epe e ree 92 Rx Expression e sese 92 Ios Hlold l eic oti det ER oth dh edes 92 EE E 92 RX Pa e e eee eR dete 92 A e RE 92 Rx Program Change sees 92 RXV OMIM ies ennt enun deti aite seite 92 S Save SETUP Pile ae eter e bene 89 SETUP sana lada 13 56 SETUP Bulk Dump 2e ees 99 SOUP Soga as doradas 29 56 103 WWTIL ee eiie edt nette dia arise tine 58 SETUP Files ct edere em tet 105 SHIFT EXIT S Sipas Sun Q 13 Shortc t IESU seien eet er eee 155 Slider Assignee egere nidis netta 85 SMEs nete ee m eet dde iet eds 50 105 SNS nn PR RI ete I RISUS huu sa 67 OS taaan adas 69 SOUND CONTROL ss 12 44 Sound
45. Frequency of the high range 04 LOW BOOST 8000 FE Boosts the volume of the lower range creating powerful lows High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level Assignable Parameters MEX Control Boost Gain Boost Freq 02 SPECTRUM Parameter Value Description This is a stereo spectrum Spectrum is a type of filter which modifies Boost Freq 50 125 Hz Center frequency at which the lower the timbre by boosting or cutting the level at specific frequencies range will be boosted Boost Gain 0 12 dB Amount by which the lower range will Assignable Parameters be boosted MEX Control Level Boost Width WIDE MID Width of the lower range that will be NARROW boosted Parameter Value Description Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range Band1 250Hz 15 15 dB Gain of each frequency band High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range pe Level 0 127 Output level Band3 1000Hz Band4 1250Hz Band5 2000Hz 05 SUPER FILTR SUPER FILTER Bande 3150Hz This is a filter with an extremely sharp slope The cutoff frequency can Band 4000Hz be varied cyclically Band8 8000Hz Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 Simultaneously adjusts the width of the Assignable Parameters 4 0 8 0 adjusted ranges for all the frequency MEX Control Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance Rate Depth Level 0 127 Zen Tevel Parameter Value Description Filter Type LPF BPF Filter type HPF Frequency range that will pass through 03 ISOLATOR NOTCH ea
46. LTD FREDDY FOR MUSIC P O Box 922846 Amman 11192 JORDAN TEL 06 5692696 KUWAIT EASA HUSAIN AL YOUSIFI amp SONS CO Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 OMAN TALENTZ CENTRE L L C Malatan House No 1 Al Noor Street Ruwi SULTANATE OF OMAN TEL 2478 3443 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg Ist Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Rawda Abdul Qader Jazairi St Bldg No 21 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY ZUHAL DIS TICARET A S Galip Dede Cad No 37 Beyoglu Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 249 85 10 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A
47. Nov 1 2004 Version 1 00 1 Receive data Channel Voice Messages e Note off Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 8nH kkH vvH 9nH kkH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 00H 7FH 0 127 kk note number vv note off velocity Some instruments are not received in Rhythm set The velocity values of Note Off messages are ignored e Note on Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 9nH kkH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 01H 7FH 1 127 kk note number vv note on velocity G Control Change OBank Select Controller number 0 32 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 00H mmH BnH 20H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll Bank number 00 00H 7F 7FH bank 1 bank 16384 Not received when the Rx Bank Select EDIT Part Parameter Rx Bank Select is OFF The SETUP Rhythms and Tones corresponding to each Bank Select are as follows The SRX series corresponding to each Bank Select are to see the SRX series owner s manual BANK SELECT PROGRAM GROUP NUMBER MSB LSB NUMBER dc DEE RES 000 001 128 GM Tone 032 001 128 GM Tone 085 000 001 100 SETUP 001 100 086 064 001 005 Rhythm Set 219 223 087 064 001 020 Tone PIANO 001 020 065 001 021 Tone E PIANO 021 041 066 001 021 Tone CALV MALLET 042 062 067 001 020 Tone ORGAN 073 092 068 001 022 Tone STRINGS 093 114 069 001 020 Tone
48. Piano Sound sooo tiit leen dar as 77 Selecting the Amp Type AMP Type siete ii nina nine intense 77 Applying Effects to the Sound Effect Type Depth Rate u 77 Making the Midrange Equalizer Settings EQ 5W EQ Gain EQ Frequency EQ Q 77 Changing Sound Characteristics Tone Modify ss 77 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT 78 Parameters That CanB Sets us u unu e ta gh a Annie Ar lia a s Tessa Qasa deeds 78 Set re ParAMeteTrs uu cesses saan a a qo e EH Hed e ARI he Pe GER RE IH EH HT adeo fard 79 Making Systemi Settings System ed dec ette dro ite qunqananpaq fangen 79 Flow to Make Settings na ua enr nie quin eite eene fe ledio 79 Adjusting the Volume Master Volume 80 Preventing Equalizer Settings from Being Switched EQ Mode 80 Preventing Pedal Settings from Being Switched Pedal Mode 80 Retaining the Current Tone Even When Tones Are Switched Tone Remain 81 Changing the Clock Timing Source Clock Source ss 81 Transmitting Synchronization Messages Clock Out 81 Using Program Change Messages to Switch Setups SETUP Control Channel 81 Setting the Device ID Number Device ID 81 Switching the Pedal s Polarity Pedal FC1 FC2 Polarity ss 81 Selecting the Display Appearance Display Mode 82 Selecting the Number of Parts Part Mode 82 Setting the Tuning Method Temperament Key ss 82
49. Rate Resonance Manual Mix switch note Depth 0 127 Effect depth Parameter Value Description Input Sync Sw OFF ON Determines whether the LFO for Mode 4 STAGE Number of stages in the phaser switching the vowels is reset by the 8 STAGE input signal ON or not OFF 12 STAGE Input Sync 0 127 Volume level at which reset is applied Manual 0 127 Adjusts the basic frequency from which Thres the sound will be modulated Manual 0 100 Point at which Vowel 1 2 switch Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is 49 or less Vowel 1 will havea longer synchronized with the tempo duration Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz 50 Vowel 1 and 2 will be of equal Hz duration Rate D note 1 Frequency of modulation note 51 or more Vowel 2 will have a Jonger duration Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Si Tow Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range Polarity INVERSE Selects whether the left and right phase z SYNCHRO ofthe modulation will be the same or High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range the opposite Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the output INVERSE The left and right phase Level pole Qutput level willbe opposite When using a mono source this spreads the sound 10 SP SIMULATR SYNCHRO The left and right phase SPEAKER SIMU LATOR will be the same Select this when inputting a stereo source Simulates the speaker type and mic settings used to record the speaker
50. Step Rate note 1 Rate of stepped changes in phaser effect MFX Control Level note Parameter Value Description Low Gain 15 15 dB Boost or cut in the low end Low Freq 200 400 Hz Select the frequency of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Boost or cut in the high end 200 Hz 400 Hz Level 0 127 Output volume Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range 85 ORGAN MULTI High Freq 2000 4000 Select the Se of the high range This is an effect combining the VK series internal effect with an organ 8000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8000 Hz effect with the same features High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency It comprises vibrato chorus overdrive and rotary effects Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Assignable Parameters P1 Freq 200 8000Hz Adjust the frequency of Middle 1 mid MEX Control Rotary Speed OD Drive range P1Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 This parameter adjusts the width of the Parameter Value Description 4 0 8 0 area around the Middle 1 Frequency Vib Cho OFF ON Switches the vibrato and chorus effects that will be affected by the Gain setting Switch Higher values of Middle 1 Q will result in a narrower area being affected P1 Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain for the area specified by the Middle 1 Frequency and Q settings Positive settings will emphasize boost the Middle 1 range P2 Freq 200 8000
51. When you press the ZONE SELECT button corresponding to a zone for which the ZONE SWITCH is OFF unlit the three buttons for that zone ZONE SWITCH ZONE SELECT and ENTER start flashing Pressing any of these flashing buttons then sets that zone s ZONE SWITCH to ON lit Performing with the Keyboard Adjust the Volume Level for Individual Zones ZONE SWITCH ZONE LEVEL Slider EQUALIZER EFFECTS ONE SWI ONE TOUCH ZONE SELECT Wem FUNCTION co Lower MD GH exter o UPPER O D I Sone Piao cpiano scrur com mes s sms ER Eye ux cursos ZONE LEVEL ARPEGOI REVERB CHORUS DELAY MULTIEFFECTS SZ TONE SELECT a Room eg 7 LAN GUITAR BRASS BASS WINDS CLav ia PIANO EPIANO MALLET ORGAN STRINGS PAD ver OH peer CONTR ete OCATHEDRAL ete d PIS T m NSPOSE e Inc T T T J 1 ZONE LEVEL Slider ZONE SWITCH With the RD 700SX each of the parts that is performed using the internal sound generator is referred to as an INTERNAL Zone You can use the ZONE SWITCH buttons and ZONE LEVEL sliders UPPER 1 UPPER 2 LOWER 1 LOWER 2 to turn sounds on and off and set their volume level ZONE SWITCH This determines whether or not the sounds in the particular zone are played Whe
52. directly affects the rate of pitch change LPF cuts the frequency range above Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay that s the Cutoff fed back into the effect Negative HPF cuts the frequency range below settings invert the phase the Cutoff HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which Post F Cutoff 200 8000 Hz Center frequency of the filter BYPASS sound fed back to the effect is filtered Noise Type WHITE Switch between white noise and pink out If you do not want to filter out any PINK noise high frequencies set this parameter to Noise LPF 200 8000 Hz Center frequency of the low pass filter BYPASS BYPASS applied to the white pink noise Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the delay BYPASS no cut Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range Noise Level 0 127 Volume of the white pink noise High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Disc Noise LP EP SP Type of record noise Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct Type RND The frequency at which the noise is D0 100W sound D and the delay sound W heard depends on the selected type Level 0 127 Output level DiscNoise LPF 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter applied to the record noise If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Desc
53. nn 5BH Reverb Send vv 00H 7FH 0 127 Absolute nn 5D Chorus Send vv 00H 7FH 0 127 Absolute F7 EOX End Of Exclusive This parameter affects drum instruments only Data Transmission This instrument can use exclusive messages to exchange many varieties of internal settings with other devices The model ID of the exclusive messages used by this instrument is 00H 00H 03H OData Request 1 RQ1 11H This message requests the other device to transmit data The address and size indicate the type and amount of data that is requested When a Data Request message is received if the device is in a state in which it is able to transmit data and if the address and size are appropriate the requested data is transmitted as a Data Set 1 DT1 message If the conditions are not met nothing is transmitted Status data byte status FOH 41H dev 00H 00H 03H 11H aaH bbH ccH F7H ddH ssH ttH uuH vvH sum Byte Remarks FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev Devdevice ID dev 10H 1FH 7FH 00H Model ID 1 RD 700SX 00H Model ID 2 RD 700SX 03H model ID 43 RD 700SX 11H Command ID RO1 aaH Address MSB bbH Address ccH Address ddH Address LSB ssH Size MSB ttH Size uuH Size vvH Size LSB sum Checksum F7H EOX End Of Exclusive The size of data that can be transmitted at one time is fixed for each type of data And data requests must be made with a fixed starting address and size Refer to
54. press the ORGAN Press the INC DEC to select one of the TW Organ 1 10 Tone Press the CURSOR 4 button The following Tone Wheel screen appears This Tone Wheel screen appears only when a Tone Wheel Tone is selected for one of the Zone in the Tone screen Ak 41126 Ber TH rsan S dom CH 3104 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances When the ZONE LEVEL sliders are moved the harmonic bars move in the display and the tone changes By pressing the ZONE SWITCH buttons on and off you can adjust the sounds for other Feet If the cursor is moved to the value at the bottom of the screen you can adjust the sounds for Feet with DEC and INC Press CURSOR 44 w to move the cursor to lt Perc gt and press DECT INC to change the value Perc Percussion adds an attack type sound to the beginning of the note to give the sound more crispness The attack sound changes according to the value Settings Description OFF No percussion is added 2nd Percussion sounds at a pitch one octave above that of the key pressed 3rd Percussion sounds at a pitch an octave and a fifth above that of the key pressed Slow The percussion s attenuation time is lengthened This softens the sense of attack Fast The percussive sound will decay more quickly This gives more of a sense of attack for a sharp sound Changing the Undulation of the Organ Tone Rotary Eff
55. the output from MIDI OUT regardless of the INTERNAL zone settings Local This switches the Local Switch on and Switch off Although normally set to ON it should be set to OFF when recording For details refer to the following sec tion About the Local Switch p 102 6 Press CURSOR I W and press INCY DEC to set the values 7 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen The settings for recording to the external sequencer are now selected Kaa With Rec Mode set to ON you cannot change the EXTERNAL Zone settings p 61 Pressing EXTERNAL INTERNAL does not call up the External screen when Rec Mode is set to ON 101 Connecting External MIDI Devices Recording the Performance Use the following procedure when recording to an external sequencer 1 Turn on the external sequencer s Thru function For details refer to the following section About Local Switch Refer to your sequencer owner s manual for instructions on how to carry out this procedure 2 Select the Setup for the performance to be recorded For instructions on selecting the Setup refer to p 56 3 Setthe Rec Setting Use the procedure described in the previous section Settings for Recording to make the following settings Rec Mode ON Local Switch OFF 4 Begin recording with the external sequencer 5 Bulk Dump the Set
56. 0 24 01 00 06 00 System One Touch Piano TYPE B 0j Ey 24 3 00 ER 01 00 07 00 System One Touch EPiano TYPE A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 01 00 08 00 System One Touch EPiano TYPE B 20 21 22 23 24 dB MM ME NUES IM AMI AMORE UM 01 00 02 OF 0000 Oaaa Split Freq Low 0 6 200 250 315 400 500 SETUP Temporary 630 800 Hz CR ER EE EEE CESSE SEE PRESS SEE 01 00 02 10 0000 Oaaa Split Freq High 0 6 Start 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 Address Description 6300 8000 Hz RIA QUII ee EE E E EE 10 00 00 00 SETUP Common 00 00 00 11 Total Size 10 00 02 00 SETUP Rhythm Arpeggio KE 10 00 03 00 SETUP MFX MFX1 10 00 05 00 SETUP MFX MFX2 System Favorite SETUP 10 00 07 00 SETUP Chorus 10 00 08 00 SETUP Reverb Address Description 10 00 10 00 SETUP Internal Zone UPPER gt e a 10 00 11 00 SETUP Internal Zone UPPER2 01 00 03 00 Oaaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 0 Bank A 0 100 10 00 12 00 SETUP Internal Zone LOWER1 01 00 03 01 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 1 Bank A 0 100 10 00 13 00 SETUP Internal Zone LOWER2 01 00 03 02 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 2 Bank A 0 100 10 00 14 00 SETUP External Zone UPPER1 01 00 03 03 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 3 Bank A 0 100 10 00 15 00 SETUP External Zone UPPER2 01 00 03 04 Oaaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 4 Bank A 0 100 10 00 16 00 SETUP External Zone LOWER1 01 00 03 05 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 5 Bank A 0 100
57. 00 00 02 0aaa aaaa SETUP Name 3 32 127 12 0 12 0 dB 1step 0 2dB 10 00 00 03 0aaa aaaa SETUP Name 4 32 127 10 00 00 67 0000 Gaas EQ High Q 0 4 10 00 00 04 0aaa aaaa SETUP Name 5 32 127 10 00 00 05 0aaa aaaa SETUP Name 6 32 127 10 00 00 06 0aaa aaaa SETUP Name 7 32 127 10 00 00 68 Gaas aaaa Key Touch Velocity 0 127 10 00 00 07 0aaa aaaa SETUP Name 8 32 127 REAL 1 127 10 00 00 08 0aaa aaaa SETUP Name 9 32 127 10 00 00 69 0000 Gaas Key Touch Curve Type 1 5 10 00 00 09 Qaaa aaaa SETUP Name 10 32 127 SUPER LIGHT LIGHT 10 00 00 0A Qaaa aaaa SETUP Name 11 32 127 MEDIUM HEAVY SUPER HEAVY 10 00 00 0B 0aaa aaaa SETUP Name 12 32 127 10 00 00 6A 000a aaaa Key Touch Curve offset 54 73 10 9 10 00 00 OC 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 1 0 64 10 00 00 6B 0aaa aaaa Key Touch Velocity Delay Sens 1 127 0 63 FULL 63 63 10 00 00 OD 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 2 0 64 10 00 00 6C 0aaa aaaa Key Touch Velocity Key Follow 1 127 10 00 00 OE 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 3 0 64 63 63 10 00 00 OF 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 4 0 64 EE 10 00 00 10 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 5 0 64 10 00 00 6D 0000 000a Slider Select 0 1 10 00 00 11 Qaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 6 0 64 ZONE LEVEL CONTROL 10 00 00 12 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 7 0 64 10 00 00 6E 0aaa aaaa Slider Assign UPPER 0 97 10 00 0
58. 000a 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc Lower CLAV MALLET Tone Number 0 511 01 00 Ot 00 000a aaaa Tone Number 0 19 10 00 00 45 0000 000a 01 00 Ot 01 00aa aaaa Stereo Width 0 63 0000 bbbb 01 00 Ot 02 0000 00aa Nuance 0 2 0000 cccc Lower ORGAN Tone Number 0 511 TYPE1 TYPE2 TYPE3 10 00 00 48 0000 000a 01 00 Ot 03 0000 0aaa Ambience 0 5 0000 bbbb OFF 1 5 0000 cccc Lower STRINGS Tone Number 0 511 01 00 Ot 04 0aaa aaaa Reverb Level 0 127 10 00 00 4B 0000 000a 01 00 Ot 05 0000 Oaaa Lid 0 5 0000 bbbb 1 2 3 4 5 6 0000 cccc Lower PAD Tone Number 0 511 01 00 Ot 06 0000 00aa Mic Simulator 0 2 10 00 00 4E 0000 000a OFF CONDENSER DYNAMIC 0000 bbbb 01 00 Ot 07 0000 aaaa Mic Distance 0 10 0000 cccc Lower GTR BASS Tone Number 0 511 01 00 Ot 08 0000 Oaaa String Resonance Level 0 5 10 00 00 51 0000 000a OFF 1 5 0000 bbbb 01 00 Ot 09 0000 000a EQ Switch 0 1 0000 ccce Lower BRASS WINDS Tone Number 0 511 OFF ON 10 00 00 54 0000 000a 01 00 Ot 0A 000a aaaa EQ Frequency 0 16 0000 bbbb 100 125 160 200 250 315 0000 cccc Lower VOICE SYNTH Tone Number 0 511 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 10 00 00 57 0000 000a 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 Hz 0000 bbbb 01 00 Ot OB 0aaa aaaa EQ Gain 4 124 0000 ccce Lower RHY GM2 Tone Number 0 511 12 12 dB 0 2dB step 01 00 Ot OC 0000 0aaa EQ O 0 4 10 00 00 5A Oaaa aaa
59. 1300 ms The parameters are the same as for the note 1 Delay 1 Assignable Parameters Delay2 D MFX Control Balance Delay C Delay L Delay R Delay3 Mode ms note Settings of the Delay 3 ye Y y Delay3 ms 1 1300 ms The parameters are the same as for the Parameter Value Description H note GI Delay 1 Delay L Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is Delay3 synchronized with the tempo Delay3 98 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to Delay L ms 1 2600 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct Feedback be returned to the input of the tap delay sound until the delay sound is heard negative values invert the phase Hz Delay HF 200 8000 Hz Frequency at which the low frequency n note 1 Adjusts the delay time from the direct Damp BYPASS content of the tap delay sound will be Delay L sound until the delay sound is heard cut BYPASS no cut note Delay1 Pan L64 63R Panning of the tap delay sounds Delay R Mode ms note Settings of the Delay R Delay2 Pan Delay R ms 1 2600 ms The parameters are the same as for the Delay1 Level 0 127 Volume of the tap delay sounds note 1 Delay 1 Delay2 Level Delay R A Low Gain 15 15 dB Amount of boost cut for the low Delay C Mode ms note Settings of the Delay C frequency range Delay C ms 1 2600 ms The parameters are the same as for the High Gain 15 15 dB Amount of boost cut for the high note 1 Delay 1 de De res duae Delay C D 1 i E
60. 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 Rhythm Pattern Fast Bossa Pop Bossa Salsa 1 Salsa 2 Samba 1 Samba 2 Rhumba Mambo 1 Mambo 2 Merengue Power Fusion 1 Power Fusion 2 Rock 3 Rock 4 Rock 5 Rock 6 Rock 7 Rock 8 Rock 9 Rock 10 Rock 11 Rock 12 Rock 13 Rock 14 Rock 15 Rock 16 Rock 17 Rock 18 Rock 19 Rock 20 Progressive Elec Dance 3 Elec Dance 4 Elec Dance 5 Elec Dance 6 Elec Dance 7 Elec Dance 8 Elec Dance 9 Elec Dance 10 Acid Jazz Techno Hip Hop House Jungle Dance Pop Waltz 1 Pop Waltz 2 Pop Waltz 3 Pop Waltz 4 Simple Waltz 1 Simple Waltz 2 3 4 Brush 5 4 Fusion 5 4 Swing 5 8 Progress 6 4 Fusion 6 8 Progress 6 8 Swing 7 4 Fusion 7 4 Swing 7 8 Progress 153 Setup List gt Selecting Stored Settings SETUP p 56 No 001 020 RHY Setup These Setups let you enjoy performing with a session like feel while playing a Rhythm Be sure to check it out For more on Rhythms refer to the Playing Rhythm RHYTHM SONG p 48 No Setup Name No Setup Name No Setup Name 1 Piano amp Pad 1 34 RHY R amp B Grv4 67 RHY Jz Funk2 2 RHY Contemp1 35 SX Orchestra 68 RHY Jz Trio4 3 RHY Rock 1 36 RHY Phaser 69 Try Slider 4 RHY R amp B Grv1 37 Chamber Orch 70 RHY R amp B Grv6 5 Piano amp Pad 2 38 Paris Street 71 RHY SaxBeats 6 RHY LatinPop 39 RHY Jz Trio2 72 RHY Salsa
61. 2 25 sum 25 sum 128 0 quotient 25 remainder checksum 128 25 remainder 103 67H This means that FO 41 10 00 43 12 10 00 04 00 02 6A F7 is the message should be sent Example2 Getting Temporary Performance data RQ1 cf This operation is the same as Bulk Dump Temporary function in Utility According to the Parameter Address Map p 164 the start address of Temporary Setup is assigned as following 10 00 00 00H Setup Common 10 00 39 00H Setup Tone Wheel 10 Backup As the data size of Setup Tone Wheel Back up is 00 00 00 OBH summation of the size and the start address of Setup Tone Wheel 10 Back up at Temporary Setup will be 10 00 39 00H 00 00 00 OBH 10 00 39 OBH And the size that have to be got should be 10 00 39 OBH 10 00 00 00H 00 00 39 OBH Therefore the system exclusive message should be sent is FO 41 10 000003 11 10000000 0000 39 0B F7 0 2 9 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 3 Device ID 17 4 Model ID RD 700SX 5 Command ID RO1 6 End of Exclusive Calculating the checksum as shown in Example 2 we get a message of F0 41 10 00 00 03 11 10 00 00 00 00 00 39 OB 2C F7 to be transmitted MIDI Implementation HASCII Code Table Setup Name of MIDI data are described the ASCII code in the table below D H Char D H Char D H Char 32
62. 31 Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks E 32 SquareClick SquareClick SquareClick SquareClick 33 Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click EM Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell Jazz Kick 1 Mix Kick Standard KK1 Power Kick1 cel36 Mix Kick Standard KK1 Power Kick1 Elec Kick 1 Era Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick 38 Standard SN1 Standard SN2 Dance Snare1 Elec Snare ER 909 HandClap 909 HandClap 909 HandClap 909 HandClap 40 Elec Snare 3 Elec Snare 7 Elec Snare 4 Elec Snare 2 41 Real Tom 6 Room Tom 5 Room Tom 5 Synth Drum 2 EE Close HiHat2 EXC1 Close HiHat2 EXC1 Close HiHat2 EXC1 Close HiHat2 EXC1 43 Real Tom 6 Room Tom 6 Room Tom 6 Synth Drum 2 EN Pedal HiHat2 EXC1 Pedal HiHat2 EXC1 Pedal HiHat2 EXC1 Pedal HiHat2 EXC1 45 Real Tom 4 Room Tom 2 Room Tom 2 Synth Drum 2 ECM Open HiHat2 EXC1 Open HiHat2 EXC1 Open HiHat2 EXC1 Open HiHat2 EXC1 Real Tom 4 Room Tom 2 Room Tom 2 Synth Drum 2 C348 Real Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 Synth Drum 2 ER Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 1 50 Real Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 Synth Drum 2 HEM Ride Cymbal Ride Cymbal Ride Cymbal Ride Cymbal 52 ChinaCymbal ChinaCymbal ChinaCymbal ReverseCymbl 53 Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell El Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine 55 Splash Cym Splash Cym Splash Cym Splash Cym E Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell 57 Crash Cym 2 Crash Cym 2 Crash Cym 2 Crash Cym 2 EH Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap pe
63. 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 Tone Name Jump Brass Synth Brass2 SynBrass sfz Velo Brass 1 Soprano Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax Baritone Sax Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo Flute Recorder Pan Flute Bottle Blow Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Square Wave MG Square 2600 Sine Saw Wave OB2 Saw Doctor Solo Natural Lead SequencedSaw Syn Calliope Chiffer Lead Charang Wire Lead Solo Vox 5th Saw Wave Bass amp Lead Delayed Lead Fantasia Warm Pad Sine Pad Polysynth Space Voice Itopia Bowed Glass Metal Pad Halo Pad Sweep Pad Ice Rain Soundtrack Crystal Syn Mallet Atmosphere Brightness Goblin Echo Drops Echo Bell Echo Pan Star Theme Sitar Sitar 2 Banjo Shamisen Koto MSB LSB PC 121 3 63 121 0 64 1231 1 64 121 2 64 121 0 65 121 0 66 121 0 67 121 0 68 121 0 69 121 0 70 121 0 71 121 0 72 121 0 73 121 0 74 121 0 75 121 0 76 121 0 77 121 0 78 121 0 79 121 0 80 121 0 81 121 1 81 121 2 81 121 0 82 1231 1 82 121 2 82 121 3 82 121 4 82 121 0 83 121 0 84 121 0 85 121 1 85 121 0 86 121 0 87 121 0 88 121 1 88 121 0 89 121 0 90 121 1 90 121 0 91 121 0 92 1231 1 92 121 0 93 121 0 94 121 0 95 121 0 96 121 0 97 121 0 98 121 0 99 121 1 99 121 0 100 121 0 101 121 0 102 121 0 103 1231 1 103 121 2 103 121 0 104 121 0 105 1231 1 105 121 0 106 121 0 107 121 0 10
64. 8 68 4 5 X Pure Grand 87 6 5 46 Phase Clav 87 66 5 97 SX Strings 2 87 68 5 6 Mellow Piano 87 64 6 47 WahWah Clav 87 66 6 98 Warm Strings 87 68 6 7 Bright Grand 87 64 7 48 Cutter Clavi 87 66 7 99 XStrSection 87 68 7 8 X PureMellow 87 64 8 49 D6Clavi 87 66 8 100 2 way Sect 87 68 8 9 Superior Str 87 64 9 50 Natural Hps 87 66 9 101 Stringz 101 87 68 9 10 Superior Pd1 87 64 10 51 Harpsi Str 87 66 10 102 Biggie Bows 87 68 10 11 Superior Pd2 87 64 11 52 NaturalC Hps 87 66 11 103 OrchestraPad 87 68 11 12 Hybrid Grd 1 87 64 12 53 St Harpsichd 87 66 12 104 Orch amp Horns 87 68 12 13 Hybrid Grd 2 87 64 13 54 Celesta 87 66 13 105 Soft Orch 87 68 13 14 600 Grand 87 64 14 55 Vibrations 87 66 14 106 ChmbrsStrings 87 68 14 15 Dynamic Grd 87 64 15 56 Vibraphone 87 66 15 107 Ending Scene 87 68 15 16 Rock Piano 1 87 64 16 57 Marimba 87 66 16 108 Str Quartet 87 68 16 17 Rock Piano 2 87 64 17 58 Morning Lite 87 66 17 109 Pizzicato 87 68 17 18 Honky tonk 87 64 18 59 Ballad Bells 87 66 18 110 Machine Str 87 68 18 19 SuperiorMono 87 64 19 60 Chime Bells 87 66 19 111 JP Strings 1 87 68 19 20 GrandRD Mono 87 64 20 61 MusicBox Pad 87 66 20 112 JP Strings 2 87 68 20 62 Islands Mit 87 66 21 113 SynthStrings 87 68 21 E PIANO 114 OB Slow Str 87 68 22 No Tone Name MSB LSB PC ORGAN PAD 21 SX E Piano 1 87 65 1 No Tone Name MSB LSB PC v dee E t us 6 TWOmgal 12 0 1 No Tone Name MSB LSB PC 23 Hit EP 87 65 3 64 TW Organ 2 112 0 2 115 Soft Pad 87 69 1 24 60 sE Pia
65. 87 67 18 91 Theater Org 87 67 19 92 ParisRomance 87 67 20 146 GTR BASS No Tone Name MSB LSB PC No Tone Name MSB LSB PC 191 Jump For KY 87 71 19 244 FM SA EP 121 2 5 N MSB LSB P NO Tone Name SB ESE PE 192 X Saw Brass 87 71 2 245 60 s E Piano 121 3 5 135 NaturalNylon 8 70 1 193 JP8000 Brass 87 71 21 246 E Piano 2 121 0 6 136 Dyna Nylon 87 70 2 194 Silky JP 87 71 2 247 Detuned EP 2 121 1 6 137 Nylon Guitar 87 70 3 195 Afro Horns 87 71 23 248 StFM EP 121 2 6 138 Steel Gtr 87 70 4 196 Triumph Brs 87 71 2 249 EP Legend 121 3 6 psichor 141 Jz Gtr Hall 87 70 7 VOICE SYNTH 252 Coupled Hps 1231 1 7 142 Clear Guitar 8 20 8 No Tone Name MSB LSB PC 253 Harpsi w 121 2 7 trat 7 7 143 JC Stra 8 0 9 197 Jazz Scat 87 72 1 254 Harpsi o 121 3 y 144 DistGt Mt 87 70 10 255 Clav 121 0 8 198 Morning Star 87 72 2 145 Blusey OD 87 70 N i i 256 Pulse Clav 121 1 8 199 Aerial Choir 87 72 3 146 Touch Drive 87 70 12 257 Celesta 121 0 9 200 Angelique 87 72 4 147 Punker 87 70 13 201 Aah Vox 87 72 5 258 Glockenspiel 121 0 10 148 SX Ac Bass 87 70 14 202 Beauty Vox 87 72 6 259 Music Box 121 0 11 e a 208 Choir Aahs 8 72 7 260 Vibraphone 121 0 2 150 Finger Master 87 70 16 261 Vibraphone w 121 1 12 204 Jazz Doos 87 72 8 151 Chorus Bass 87 70 17 262 Marimba 121 0 13 205 Female Aahs 87 72 9 152 Pick Bass 87 70 18 263 Marimba w 121 1 13 206 Gospel Oohs 87 72 10 1527 Slap Bass AM E 207 Galactic SX ge 72 1 264 Xylophone 121 0 14 154 SX Fr tnot B CU 2
66. 9 O EEE awaqa esas nO ES E HO gg ez 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 FULL 10 00 1z 08 0000 000a Damper Switch 0 1 curiis DOM SEA VER ESAE dE Lia A edit asini EE OFF ON 00 00 00 12 Total Size 10 00 1z 09 0000 000a FC1 Switch 0 1 A A Gr A Sr em So rl tete ir pc SE ci oig er ES Ga tr a OFF ON 10 00 1z 0A 0000 000a FC2 Switch 0 1 OFF ON 10 00 1z OB 0000 000a Modulation Switch 0 1 OFF ON 10 00 1z OC 0000 000a Bender Switch 0 72 1 OFF ON 10 00 0m 00 0aaa aaaa MFX Type 0 125 10 00 1z OD 0000 000a Control Switch MFX 0 1 10 00 Om 01 0aaa aaaa MFX Dry Send Level 0 127 OFF ON 10 00 0m 02 0aaa aaaa MFX Chorus Send Level 0 127 10 00 1z OE 0000 000a Control Slider Switch UPPER1 0 1 10 00 Om 03 0aaa aaaa MFX Reverb Send Level 0 127 OFF ON 10 00 0m 04 0000 00aa 10 00 1z OF 0000 000a Control Slider Switch UPPER2 0 1 reserved OFF ON 000a aaaa 10 00 1z 10 0000 000a Control Slider Switch LOWER1 0 1 OFF ON 10 00 Om 09 0000 aaaa 10 00 1z 11 0000 000a Control Slider Switch LOWER2 0 1 s MFX Parameter 1 32 12768 52768 OFF ON 10 00 On 05 0000 aaaa 20000 20000 j Hesse EE ES eege 10 00 1z 12 0000 00aa Transmit Port 0 3 00 00 01 09 Total Size ALL OUT1 OUT2 USB ee 10 00 1z 13 0000 aaaa Transmit Channel 0 15 1 16 SETUP Chorus 10 00 1z 14 0000 000a Transmit Bank Select MSB Switch 0 1 d erac el Go Aus tae ul id A etel el wr or M Ex en A E
67. Adjust the amount of the wah effect that will occur in the area of the frequency Parameter Value Description Lower settings will cause the effect to be Sustain 0 127 Adjust the time over which low level applied in a broad area around the sounds are boosted until they reach the frequency Higher settings will cause specified volume the effect to be applied in a more narrow Attack 0 127 Adjust the attack time of an input range sound Level 0 127 Adjust the output level Pan L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right 93 ROTARY Post Gain 0 6 12 Adjust the output gain The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often 18 dB used with the electric organs of the past Since the movement of the Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the low frequency gain high range and low range rotors can be set independently the unique Positive settings will emphasize E jas e boost the low frequency range type of modulation characteristic of these speakers can be simulated High Gain 15 415 dB Adjust the high frequency gain quite closely This effect is most suitable for electric organ Patches Positive settings will emphasize E boost the high frequency range Asslgnable Parameters Level 0 127 Adjust the output level MEX Control Speed Hi Fast Rate Lo Fast Rate Separation Parameter Value Description Hi Slow Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust
68. Amp Type Pan Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the frequency period of Hz modulation Parameter Value Description Depth 0 127 Adjust the depth of modulation Drive 0 127 Adjust the degree of distortion The Resonance 0 127 Adjust the amount of feedback for the volume will change together with the phaser degree of distortion The effect becomes more prominent as Pan L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the output the value is increased sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R Mix 0 127 Adjust the ratio with which the phase is far right shifted sound is combined with the Amp Type SMALL Select the type of guitar amp direct sound BUILT IN SMALL small amp Pan L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the output 2 STACK BUILT IN single unit type amp sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R 3 STACK 2 STACK large double stack amp is far right 3 STACK large triple stack amp Level 0 127 Adjust the output level Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize 90 SPECTRUM boost the low frequency range Spectrum is a type of filter which modifies the timbre by boosting or High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency cutting the level at specific frequencies It is similar to an equalizer but IDE has 8 frequency points fixed at locations most suitable for adding Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range character to the sound Level 0 1
69. Bs Fingered Bs Finger Slap Picked Bass Fretless Bs Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 2 Synth Bass 1 SynthBass101 Acid Bass Clavi Bass Hammer Synth Bass 2 Beef FM Bass RubberBass 2 Attack Pulse Violin Slow Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Tremolo Str PizzicatoStr Harp Yang Qin Timpani Orche str Orchestra 60s Strings Slow Strings Syn Strings1 Syn Strings3 Syn Strings2 Choir Aahs Chorus Aahs Voice Oohs Humming SynVox Analog Voice OrchestraHit Bass Hit 6th Hit Euro Hit Trumpet Dark Trumpet Trombone Trombone 2 Bright Tb Tuba MutedTrumpet MuteTrumpet2 French Horns Fr Horn 2 Brass 1 Brass 2 Synth Brass1 Pro Brass Oct SynBrass MSB LSB PC 121 1 31 121 2 31 121 0 32 121 1 32 121 0 33 121 0 34 1231 1 34 121 0 35 121 0 36 121 0 37 121 0 38 121 0 39 121 1 39 121 2 39 121 3 39 121 4 39 121 0 40 1231 1 40 1231 2 40 121 3 40 121 0 41 1231 1 41 121 0 42 121 0 43 121 0 44 121 0 45 121 0 46 121 0 47 1231 1 47 121 0 48 121 0 49 1231 1 49 1231 2 49 121 0 50 121 0 51 1231 1 51 121 0 52 121 0 53 121 1 53 121 0 54 1231 1 54 121 0 55 121 1 55 121 0 56 121 1 56 121 2 56 121 3 56 121 0 57 1231 1 57 121 0 58 121 1 58 121 2 58 121 0 59 121 0 60 121 1 60 121 0 61 1231 1 61 121 0 62 1231 1 62 121 0 63 121 1 63 121 2 63 No 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400
70. Control MFX Parameters Reverb Type Reverb Parameters Chorus Type Output Select Chorus Parameters 1 Key Touch 2 Control 3 Effects PIPE PO PO PO PO PO PO O PO PO PO PO PO ER PO PO PS O PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO 9 PO PO PO S PO Poo 9 4 Sound Control 5 File Utility USB 6 Part Parameter 7 Rhythm Arpeggio 8 V Link 9 Utility Type Split Frequency L Split Frequency H Level Attack Time Release Time Threshold Ratio Save SETUP File Load SETUP File File Delete USB Setting USB Storage Part Tone Receive Channel Volume Pan Voice Reserve Part Switch MFX Switch Rx Bank Select Rx Program Change Rx Modulation Rx Pitch Bend Rx Volume Rx Hold 1 Rx Pan Rx Expression Rhythm PO PO o ISIS ESS PO PO PO PO Foo a a Moo Po Po 3 O EEE Rhythm Tempo Rhythm Volume Rhythm Pattern Rhythm Set Rhythm Set Change Rhythm Accent Rhythm Arpeggio Grid Rhythm Arpeggio Duration MIDI Out Port MIDI Out Channel E s s s Arpeggio Arpeggio Tempo Arpeggio Style Arpeggio Motif Arpeggio Zone Arpeggio Key Range Arpeggio Velocity
71. Dist 1 Ho Chi Minh City VIETNAM TEL 08 848 4068 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA For Australia Tel 02 9982 8266 For New Zealand Tel 09 3098 715 CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BARBADOS A amp B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Industrial Park Wildey St Michael Barbados TEL 246 430 1100 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 COLOMBIA Centro Musical Ltda Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin Colombia TEL 574 3812529 at your local waste recycling centre Do not dispose of in household waste bin COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CURACAO Zeelandia Music Center Inc Orionweg 30 Curacao Netherland Antilles TEL 305 5926866 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Calle Proyecto Central No 3 Ens La Esperilla Santo Domingo Dominican Republic TEL 809 683 0305 ECUADOR Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil Ecuador TEL 593 4 230
72. Frequency of modulation note D0 100W sound D and the flanger sound W Rate Ai Level 0 127 Output Level Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase 119 Effect Parameter List 32 2BND CHORUS 2 BAND CHORUS Parameter Value Description A chorus effect that lets you apply an effect independently to the low High Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Delay time Gen E the SE sound is heard to when the high range frequency and high frequency ranges larger sound is heard Assignable Parameters High Rate Hz note When this is set to note the effect is MFX Control Low Depth High Depth Low Rate HighRate Balance Mode synchronized with the tempo HighRate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate at which the high range flanger Parameter Value Description Hz sound is modulated Hz Split Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency at which the low and high High Rate note 1 Rate at which the high range flanger ranges will be divided D sound is modulated note Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the low r
73. Hold 1 in the Part performing with piano tones using a Parameter settings are ON or OFF p mono connection 92 When UPPER gee UPPER Part and Hie LOWER Fart Effects Not Is MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF set to OFF Tone is set to the same value in the Part Assign Applied Effects p 52 Selected settings in Zone Info p 69 Sound Wron i id LOWER g Isthe MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL Changes to knob set to TEMPO Same Tone In Edit mode set the Control Knob Tone Doesn t Change Keyboard Not Switching to Split Is EXTERNAL INTERNAL set to ON When EXTERNAL INTERNAL is set to ON the external sound generator is controlled To change the RD 700SX s Tones and make settings in Keyboard mode set EXTERNAL INTERNAL to OFF p 64 Is the ZONE SELECT button for the Zone containing the Tone you want to change set to ON p 41 Is NUM LOCK set to on Tone categories cannot be selected with the TONE SELECT buttons when NUM LOCK is set to on Assign setting in Effects as a value other than TEMPO p 85 Even when MFX Dest p 87 is set to ALL no effects are applied to parts in which the Edit mode Part Parameter MFX Switch p 92 is set to OFF In some cases where the delay timing selected in the DELAY settings in Effects issettoa note value the delay sound may not be heard Either adjust the tempo or change the numerical value of the delay timing p 122 p 144 Rhythm Not Sounding Has
74. Hz Adjust the frequency of Middle 2 mid range 133 Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description P2 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 This parameter adjusts the width of the Level 0 127 Adjust the output level 4 0 8 0 area around the Middle 2 Frequency It s a good idea to use this parameter to that will be affected by the Gain setting adjust the difference in volume between Higher values of Middle 2 O will result when Distortion is applied and when it in a narrower area being affected is not applied P2 Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain for the area specified by the Middle 2 Frequency and Q settings Positive settings will emphasize 89 PHASER boost the Middle 2 range A phaser adds a phase shifted sound to the direct sound producing a Level 0 127 Adjust the output level twisting modulation that creates spaciousness and depth Assignable Parameters 87 OVE RDRIVE MFX Control Rate Depth Manual This effect creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube amplifiers Parameter Value Description Manual 100 8000 Hz Adjust the basic frequency from which Assignable Parameters the sound will be modulated MEX Control Drive
75. Key Range Lower A0 C8 UPR Key Range Upper ET This is effective only when SPLIT is on p 38 in the key range settings FUL is displayed when SPLIT is set to OFF In this case SPLIT is automatically switched on when the value is changed to something other than FUL with INC DEC NOTE You cannot set the key range s lower limit higher than the upper limit nor can you set the upper limit below the lower limit You can use ZONE SWITCH for each individual zone to select whether or not MIDI Note messages for that zone are to be transmitted p 64 Changing the Range That Plays in Response to the Weck Velocity Range Lower Upper This specifies the lower limit LWR and upper limit UPR of the range in which the tone is played according to how strongly the keys are played velocity Make this setting when you want the tone to change depending on the key velocity Parameter Value VRL Velocity Range Lower 1 127 VRU Velocity Range Upper NOTE If you set the minimum velocity to a value above the upper limit or set the maximum velocity to a value that is below the lower limit the setting for the other limit is changed to the same value Changing Tone Elements ATK DCY REL COF RES You can make changes in tones by adjusting the settings of the following four elements ATK Attack Time Offset The time it takes after the key is pressed for a so
76. Level Adjusts the depth of the Reverb effect This functions the same way as the REVERB knob but the setting made here can be called up simply by pressing ONE TOUCH PIANO Parameter Value Reverb Level 0 127 Description The reverb effect becomes stronger as the value is increased 73 Making Detailed Settings for the ONE TOUCH Tones Opening Closing the Piano Lid Lid Reproduces the way the brightness of a grand piano s sound is affected by how much the piano s lid is opened Parameter Value Description Lid 1 6 The lid is opened more as the value is increased creating a brighter sound Changing the Characteristics of the Mic Mic Type Distance This changes the sound of the instrument in a manner similar to that accomplished in recordings of miked acoustic instruments like pianos where the sound is changed by using mics with different characteristics and changing the mic placement This function is a virtual reproduction of these phenomena Parameter Value Description EQ Gain 12 0 12 0 dB Change the amount of equalization gain EQ 100 125 160 Set Frequency Point Changes the Frequency 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 level of the selected frequency range with frequency selected here at the center 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000Hz EQ Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 Adjusts the Q bandwidth of 8 0 equaliza
77. OFF PC Program Change Program Change 0 127 OFF If the external MIDI sound generator transmits a Program number or a Bank number for which no Tone has been Press CURSOR 4 H el b JL Y to move the cursor then press INC DEC to set the MSB LSB and PC for each part Pressing INC and DEC simultaneously switches the settings value to OFF assigned an alternate Tone may be selected or in some cases there may be no sound When this setting is OFF bank select messages will not be transmitted played If you do not want to transmit the Program number or Bank Select use the procedure described left to set the PC MSB LSB to OFF Using the RD 700SX As a Master Keyboard Adjusting the Volume of Each Zone EXTERNAL Zone EQUALIZER EFFECTS ONE TOUCH ZONE SELECT EXPansion UNE c Hig EXTERNAL w n A O LOWER1 UPPER 1 0 rh MO CG O 0 aaa ee EE OO vo B 8 t REVERB CHORUS DELAY D MULTLEFFECTS ROOM H GM T V ZONE LEVEL Slider ZONE SWITCH EXTERNAL INTERNAL ON lit When the EXTERNAL INTERNAL indicator is on you can use the ZONE SWITCH and ZONE LEVEL sliders to control the EXTERNAL Zone in the same way as with the INTERNAL Zone p 28 ZONE SWITCH Thi
78. PAD 115 134 070 001 038 Tone GTR BASS 135 172 071 001 024 Tone BRASS WINDS 173 196 072 001 022 Tone VOICE SYNTH 197 218 092 000 001 SRX Rhythm 001 093 000 001 SRX Patch 001 112 000 001 010 TW Organ 063 072 120 001 057 GM2 Rhythm 224 232 121 000 001 128 GM2 Tone 233 488 OModulation Controller number 1 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 01H vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Modulation depth 00H 7FH 0 127 Not received when the Rx Modulation EDIT Part Parameter Rx Modulation is OFF OPortamento Time Controller number 5 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 05H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Portamento Time 00H 7FH 0 127 ThePortament Time parameter Tone Info Portament Time will change 156 OData Entry Controller number 6 38 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 06H mmH BnH 26H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll the value of the parameter specified by RPN NRPN mm MSB ll LSB OVolume Controller number 7 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 07H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Volume 00H 7FH 0 127 Not received when the Rx Volume EDIT Part Parameter Rx Volume is OFF The Part Level parameter will change OPanpot Controller number 10 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 0AH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv
79. Poly MONO Only the last played note will sound POLY Two or more notes can be played simultaneously MONO LEGATO Legato is applied to monophonic performances Changing the Pitch Coarse Tune Fine Tune This sets the pitch of the tone Parameter Value Description Coarse Tune 48 48 Sets the sound s pitch in 4 octaves semitone units Fine Tune 50 50 Sets the sound s pitch in 50 cents units of one cent 1 cent 1 100 semitone NOTE With some Tones there may be ranges in which the pitch does not change as intended Creating Smooth Pitch Changes Portamento Switch Time Portamento is a function that causes the pitch to change smoothly from one note to the next note played With the Mono Poly parameter set to MONO portamento is especially effective when simulating playing techniques such as a violin glissandos The Portamento Time setting determines the time for the change in pitch when the portamento effect is applied to the sound Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time Parameter Value Portamento Sw ON OFF Portamento Time 0 127 71 Making Detailed Settings for Tones Changing Tone Elements Attack Time Release Time Cutoff Resonance Decay Time You can make changes in tones by adjusting the settings of the following four elements Attack Time Offset The time it takes after the key is
80. Precise Modification of Chord Sonorities Stretch Tune ss 82 Switching Between Reception of GM GM2 System On and GS Reset 82 Setting the Keyboard Touch Key Touch 83 How to Make Settings eee eet m debite leet i Mn 83 Changing the Key Touch Key Touch 83 Making Fine Adjustments to the Keyboard Touch Key Touch Offset 83 Setting a Constant Volume Level in Response to the Playing Force Velocity 84 Changing the Timing of Sounds in Response to the Velocity Velocity Delay Sens 84 Changing the Touch Sensitivity According to the Key Range Velocity Keyfollow Sens 84 Pedal and MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL Knob Settings Control 84 How to Make Settings ibt tl 84 Assigning Functions to Pedals FC1 FC2 Pedal Assign see 85 Changing the MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL Knob Settings Control Knob Assign 85 Changing the Slider Settings Slider Assign ss 85 Setting the Multi Effects Reverb and Chorus Effects Effects 86 FLOW tO Make Settings a rdiet eret reete ned qan riesen eese de eee rege cent reete 86 Making Multi Effects Settings ses 86 Making Reverb Settings etnei deiere dine ei ren terre tired bete reet itte 87 Setting Choris and Delay sas teeth re ener ee tenen eege 88 Making the Sound Control Settings Sound Control 88 Howto Make Settings lilas 88 Selecting t
81. Rate Depth Resonance Manual Mix Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct Parameter Value Description D0 100W sound D and the effect sound W Mode 4 STAGE Number of phaser stages Level 0 127 Output level 8 STAGE eae 16 STEP R MOD STEP RING 20 STAGE MODULATOR 24 STAGE This is a ring modulator that uses a 16 step sequence to vary the Manual 0 127 Adjusts the basic frequency from which frequency at which modulation is applied the sound will be modulated Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is Assignable Parameters synchronized with the tempo MEX Control Rate Attack Balance Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz Hz Parameter Value Description note 1 Frequency of modulation note Step 01 16 0 127 Frequency of ring modulation at each Rate A step Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback synchronized with the tempo Mix 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate at which the 16 step sequence will Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the output sound Hz cycle Hz Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range b note 1 Rate at which the 16 step sequence will High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Rate cycle note Level 0 127 Output Level Attack 0 127 Speed at which the modulation frequency changes between steps A phaser that continues raising lowering the frequency at which
82. Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback sound Cross Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the phaser sound that is fed back into the effect Assignable Parameters Negative settings will invert the MEX Control Direct Level Mic Level Speaker phase P mir Mix 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound arameter Value Description Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Speaker See the table Type of speaker Mic Settin 12 3 Adjusts the location of the mic that is High Gain 2152415 dB Gain of the high range 8 t J recording the sound of the speaker Level Z Output Level This can be adjusted in three steps with the micbecoming more distant in 12 STEP PHASER the order of 1 2 and 3 The phaser effect will be varied gradually Mic Level 0 127 Volume of the microphone Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the direct sound Assignable Parameters Level 07127 Output Level MFX Control StepRate Depth Resonance Manual Mix Specifications of each Speaker Type Parameter Value Description The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit in Mode 4 STAGE Number of stages in the phaser inches and the number of units ur o Type Cabinet Speaker Microphone Manual 0 127 Adjusts the basic frequency from which SMALL 1 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic the sound Will be modulated SMALL 2 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is MIDDLE open back enclosure
83. Ride Cymbal4 Ride Cymbal4 Ride Cymbal4 Ride Cymbal4 caleo Bongo High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo High DRM Bongo Lo Bongo Lo Bongo Lo Bongo Lo 62 Mute H Conga Mute H Conga Mute H Conga Mute H Conga ec Conga Hi Opn Conga Hi Opn Conga Hi Opn Conga Hi Opn 64 Conga Lo Opn Conga Lo Opn Conga Lo Opn Conga Lo Opn 65 High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale EU Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale 67 Agogo Agogo Agogo Agogo EN Agogo Agogo Agogo Agogo 69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa ai Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas ShrtWhistle EXC2 ShrtWhistle EXC2 ShrtWhistle EXC2 ShrtWhistle EXC2 C572 LongWhistle EXC2 LongWhistle EXC2 LongWhistle EXC2 LongWhistle EXC2 i Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 74 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 EM Claves Claves Claves Claves 76 Woodblock Woodblock Woodblock Woodblock 77 Woodblock Woodblock Woodblock Woodblock HEN Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 79 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 E MuteTriang EXC5 MuteTriangl EXC5 MuteTriangl EXC5 MuteTriangl EXC5 81 OpenTriangl EXC5 OpenTriangl EXC5 OpenTriangl EXC5 OpenTriangl EXC5 uH Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell C684 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree ER Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets 86 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute
84. Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 mU Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 150 W No sound Rhythm Set List EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number GM2 ANALOG GM2 JAZZ GM2 BRUSH GM2 ORCHSTRA GM2 SFX Bh dum A A C dz RA QEE E x E we o LISSE 26 jo ARB High Q High Q High Q Close HiHat2 EXC1 28 Slap Slap Slap Pedal HiHat2 EXC1 29 ScratchPush EXC7 ScratchPush EXC7 ScratchPush EXC7 Open HiHat2 EXC1 CEJ ScratchPull EXC7 ScratchPull EXC7 ScratchPull EXC7 RideCymba3 31 Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks wee EXA SquareClick SquareClick SquareClick SquareClick 33 Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click m Mumm Bell Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell Mumm Dell E TR 808 Kick Jazz Kick 2 Jazz Kick 2 ConcetBD sd C2 36 TR 808 Kick Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 1 Mix Kick EA 808 Rimshot Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick 38 808 Snare 1 Standard SN3 Brush Swirl Concert Snr ER 909 HandClap 909 HandClap Brush Slap1 Castanets High Q 40 Elec Snare 6 Elec Snare 5 Brush Swirl Concert Snr Slap 41 808 Tom 2 Real Tom 6 Brash Tom 2 Timpani ScratchPush EXC7 ES TR 808 CHH EXC1 Close HiHat2 EXC1 Close HiHat3 EXC1 Timpani ScratchPull EXC7
85. a rhythm s pattern in the Song Rhythm Arpeggio screen p 49 93 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Changing the Drum Set Rhythm Set You can change a rhythm s drum set set of drum and percussion tones Parameter Value Rhy Set Refer to Rhythm Set List p 149 You can select Tones other than Rhythm Sets When this setting is changed the Part 10 Tone also changes In addition Rhythm Set Change is set to OFF i Depending on the Rhythm Set that is selected the Rhythm Set may not play back properly Changing the Pattern Without Changing the Drum Set Rhythm Set Change Each Rhythm in a rhythm pattern has the most suitable drum set assigned to it When rhythm patterns are changed the drum sets also switch so the tone is changed but here the drum set stays constant and does not change Parameter Value Description RhySetChange ON When the Rhythm is changed the drum set also changes OFF When the Rhythm is changed the drum set does not change Changing the Accent Strength Rhythm Accent Modifies the strength of accents and the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the arpeggio A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel Parameter Value Rhy Accent 0 100 Changing the Beat Syncopation Rhythm Arpeggio Grid This sets the minimum value of the n
86. and just intonations that permits greater freedom in transposition to other keys Performances are possible in all keys III MEAN TONE This scale makes some compromises in just intonation enabling transposition to other keys WERCKMEI This is a combination of the Parameter Value Part Mode 16PART 16PART PERF Performance Setting the Tuning Method Temperament Key This sets the tuning and keynote tonic Most modern songs are composed and played with the assumption that equal temperament will be used but when classical music was composed there were a wide variety of other tuning systems in existence Playing a composition with its original tuning lets you enjoy the sonorities of the chords that the composer originally intended When playing with tuning other than equal temperament you need to specify the keynote for tuning the song to be performed that is the note that corresponds to C for a major key or to A for a minor key If you choose an equal temperament there s no need to select a keynote Parameter Value Description Temperament EQUAL Equal Temperament This tuning divides an octave into 12 equal parts Every interval produces about the same amount of slight dissonance JUST MAJ Just Major This scale eliminates dissonance in fifths and thirds It is unsuited to playing melodies and cannot be transposed but is capable of beautiful sonorit
87. and passes data from the RD 700SX to the application Application N USB connector USB Driver Computer USB cable USB connector F puso RD 700SX Switching USB Drivers The USB driver to be used when a computer is connected to the USB connector is determined as follows 1 Press EDIT 2 Press CURSOR I W to select 1 SYSTEM and then press ENTER 3 Press CURSOR 4 VI b to switch screens and press CURSOR amp I W to move the cursor to USB Driver 4 Press INC DEC to set the value 5 After making the setting turn off the power to the RD 700SX then turn it on again Parameter Value USB Driver Original Description Select this when using the sup plied driver with a USB connec tion Generic Select this when using a generic USB driver included with the OS with a USB connection 106 MEMO 107 Troubleshooting If the RD 700SX does not function in the way you expect first check the following points If this does not resolve the problem consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station If certain messages appear in the display during operation please refer to Error Messages Other Messages p 111 Problem Check Solution Problem Check Solution Is the RD 700SX s power cord properly plugged into a powe
88. balance between the D0 100W direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjust the output level 99 STEREO CHO STEREO CHORUS This is a stereo chorus A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the chorus sound Assignable Parameters MFX Control Chorus Rate Treml Rate Balance Parameter Value Description Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the modulation speed of the Hz chorus effect Chorus Depth 0 127 Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect Treml Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the modulation speed of the Hz tremolo effect MFX Control Rate Balance Parameter Value Description Filter Type OFF Select the type of filter LPF OFF a filter will not be used HPF LPF cut the frequency range above the cutoff frequency HPF cut the frequency range below the cutoff frequency Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Adjust the basic frequency of the filter Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the rate of modulation Hz Depth 0 127 Adjust the depth of modulation Phase 0 180 degree Adjust the sp
89. check the screen using the following procedure 1 Press CURSOR b in the Tone screen to select the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen Song Arpeggio screen Rhythm Arpeggio screen playback songs playback rhythms 4 120 SONG ARP 4 4 120 RHY ARP EE 900 Enjoy Yourself ARP 981 Phrase 1 2 If you re at the SONG ARP screen press F1 to access the RHY ARP screen You ll then be able to play back rhythms ZONE SWITCH CONTROL ONE TOUCH ZONE SELECT Wem FUNCTION dEEXTERNAL LOWER 1 UPPER 1 PPER2 CE i Press RHYTHM SONG to make the button indicator light When the Arpeggio s Arpeggio Hold is set to ON in The Rhythm begins playing Edit mode p 96 if an arpeggio is played while a rhythm plays the arpeggio Press RHYTHM SONG once more the indicator goes out and the Rhythm stops playing will stop at the moment that the rhythm stops You can also start and stop playback of the rhythm by pressing F2 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Changing the Rhythm Pattern You can select the way a Rhythm is played the pattern to match a variety of different musical genres Press CURSOR gt to go to the Rhythm Song Arp
90. corresponding to the value set here MEMD You can also transpose by holding down the TRANSPOSE and pressing the INC or DEC MEMO Even when the Transpose function is turned on the Split Point remains unchanged p 39 MED You can set the degree of transposition for each of the Zone individually For details refer to Setting the Transposition for Each Individual Zone Transpose p 69 Performing with the Keyboard The RD 700SX can apply a reverb effect to the notes you play on the keyboard Applying reverb adds pleasing reverberation to what you play so it sounds almost as if you were playing in a concert hall REVERB O ROOM O HALL DEPTH O CATHEDRAL Press the REVERB The reverb type switches each time you press the REVERB TYPE explanation OFF unlit No reverb is used ROOM Simulates the reverberation of a room HALL Simulates the reverb of a large concert hall CATHEDRAL Simulates the reverberation of a cathedral Adjust the REVERB DEPTH knob to select the amount of reverb effect to be applied Rotating the knob clockwise applies a deeper reverb and rotating it counterclockwise applies less reverb You can apply a chorus and delay effect to the notes you play on the keyboard By adding the chorus and delay effect you can give the sound greater dimension with more fatness and breadth CHORUS DELAY CHORUS O DELA
91. from tip over amplifiers that produce heat 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or ian 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or unused for long periods of time grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the Way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does replacement of the obsolete outlet not operate normally or has been dropped For the U K WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected t
92. is sent through the flanger will be output Level 0 127 Adjust the output level 114 DIST CHO DISTORTION CHORUS This effect connects distortion and chorus in series The parameters are essentially the same as 111 OD CHORUS with the exception of the following two OD Drive gt Det Drive Specify the amount of distortion OD Pan gt Dist Pan Specify the stereo location of the distortion sound 115 DIST gt FLNGR DISTORTION FLANGER This effect connects distortion and flanger in series The parameters are essentially the same as in 112 OD gt FLANGER with the exception of the following two OD Drive gt Det Drive Specify the amount of distortion OD Pan gt Dist Pan Specify the stereo location of the distortion sound 116 DIST gt DELAY DISTORTION DELAY This effect connects distortion and delay in series The parameters are essentially the same as in 113 ODODELAY with the exception of the following two OD Drive OD Pan distortion sound Dst Drive Specify the amount of distortion Dist Pan Specify the stereo location of the 141 Effect Parameter List 117 ENH gt CHORUS ENHANCER gt Parameter Value Description C HORUS Enhancer Sens 0 127 Adjust the sensitivity of the enhancer This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in series Enhancer Mix 0 127 Adjust t
93. moved from one location to another where the temper ature and or humidity is very different water droplets conden sation may form inside the unit Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand for several hours until the condensation has completely evaporated Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and Data Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up in another MIDI device e g a sequencer or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Additional Precautions
94. ms Delay time from when the original LoStp Rt Hz 0 10 20 00 Rate at which the steps will cycle for the sound is heard to when the low range Hz low range flanger sound Hz ge ger so Hanger sound i Beard 5 D note 1 Rate at which the steps will cycle for the Low Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is LoStp Rt low range flanger sound note synchronized with the tempo Hi Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Delay time from when the original Low Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate at which the low range flanger sound is heard to when the high range Hz sound is modulated Hz flanger sound is heard Low Rate note 1 Rate at which the low range flanger Hi Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is sound is modulated note synchronized with the tempo Low Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the low range Hi Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate at which the high range flanger flanger sound Hz sound is modulated Hz Low Pha 180 di aciousness of the low range flanger i note 1 Rate at which the high range flanger S SE Ee 5 F Rate t gt sound is modulated note Low Feedback 98 98 Proportion of the low range flanger Hi Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the high range sound that is to be returned to the input flanger sound negative values invert the phase Hi Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the high range flanger 120 sound Effect Parameter List
95. occur when you move the Pitch Bend lever 2 octaves Parameter Value Bend Range 0 24 semitone Makin TOUC Making Detailed Settings for the Piano Tones Piano Edit You can make more detailed settings to fashion just the Tones you want using the piano Tone selected by pressing ONE TOUCH PIANO p 32 This function is called Piano Edit Furthermore you can save up to two of the changed settings The Piano Edit settings and ONE TOUCH PIANO Type A or B is stored in memory NOTE When ONE TOUCH PIANO is pressed all settings other than the Piano Edit settings are switched to their status at the time the RD 700SX s power was turned on Store any arrangements of settings that you want to keep in Setup p 58 Making the settings 1 Press F1 in the ONE TOUCH PIANO screen to select the type you want to set Pressing F1 toggles you between Types A and B 2 Press F2 EDIT A Piano Edit screen will appear PIRNO EDIT 1 291 Surerior Grd Stereo Width MES Nuance TYPE1 Ambience OFF Reverb Level ZA WRITE RETURN 3 Press CURSOR vr P 1 to switch screens and press CURSOR 44 W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set Move the cursor to one of the following menus and press ENTER then select the parameter you want to set in the screen that follows 1 Key Touch Edit 2 Micro Tune Edit 3 Sym Resonance 4 Tone Modify 5 Initiali
96. of 0CH 12 sets the maximum pitch bend range to 12 semitones 1 octave On GS sound generators the LSB of Pitch Bend Sensitivity is ignored but the LSB should be transmitted anyway with a value of 0 so that operation will be correct on any device Once the parameter number has been specified for RPN or NRPN all Data Entry messages transmitted on that same channel will be valid so after the desired value has been transmitted it is a good idea to set the parameter number to 7F 7FH to prevent accidents This is the reason for the B3 64 7F B3 65 7F at the end It is not desirable for Performance data such as Standard MIDI File data to contain many events with running status as given in Example 4 This is because if playback is halted during the song and then rewound or fast forwarded the sequencer may not be able to transmit the correct status and the sound generator will then misinterpret the data Take care to give each event its own status It is also necessary that the RPN or NRPN parameter number setting and the value setting be done in the proper order On some sequencers events occurring in the same or consecutive clock may be transmitted in an order different than the order in which they were received For this reason it is a good idea to slightly skew the time of each event about 1 tick for TPON 96 and about 5 ticks for TPON 480 TPON Ticks Per Quarter Note 168 MExample of an Exclusive Message and Calcu
97. of the low frequency range Delay1 note 1 Delay time fr om when sound is input to High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range delay 1 until the delay sound is heard Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct note D0 100W sound D and the delay sound W Delay1 98 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to Level 0 127 Output level Feedback be returned to the input of delay 1 negative values invert the phase Dly1 HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Frequency at which the high frequency 47 3TP PAN DLY 3TAP PAN DELAY BYPASS content of the delayed sound of delay 1 Produces three delay sounds center left and right will be cut BYPASS no cut Delay2 Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is Assignable Parameters synchronized with the tempo MEX Control Balance Delay C Delay L Delay R Delay2 ms 1 1300 ms Delay time from when sound is input to I delay 2 until the delay sound is heard Parameter Value Description Hz Delay L Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is b note 1 Delay time from when sound is input to synchronized with the tempo Delay2 delay 2 until the delay sound is heard Delay L ms 1 2600 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is note heard Hz Delay2 98 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to Delay L note 1 Adjusts th Ie Eee y so
98. or WRITE The operation is cancelled and you are returned to the Tone screen When ENTER is pressed saving of the Setup begins When you have finished saving the Setup the WRITE indicator goes out and you are returned to the Tone screen Settings Not Saved in a Setup The following settings cannot be saved to a Setup Song Number ONE TOUCH PIANO and E PIANO Settings p 73 System Settings p 79 Sound Control Settings p 88 V Link Settings p 97 Rec Setting p 101 Pressing F1 WRITE in the Edit screen saves the System Sound Control and V Link settings Setup lt 000 gt PIANO SETUP When you press the ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO and then press CURSOR 4q to bring up the Setup screen SETUP lt 000 gt is displayed 21268 SETUP k RD SETUP BANE A ASSIGH Gene This SETUP lt 000 gt is the Setup containing the stored settings for ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO the contents cannot be overwritten by pressing the WRITE as with other Setups When saving content changed from the ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO settings write the settings to SETUP lt 001 gt or later 59 Using the RD 700SX As a Master Keyboard By connecting an external MIDI device to the MIDI OUT connector on the RD 700SX s rear panel you can then control the external MIDI device with the RD 700SX Normally the RD 700SX transmits Note messages from the MIDI OUT connector but when EXTERNAL INTERNAL is on you c
99. pp 0 Chorus Type vv 0 Chorus vv 1 Chorus vv 2 Chorus3 vv 3 Chorus4 vv 4 FB Chorus vv 5 Flanger pp 1 Mod Rate vv 00H 7FH 0 127 pp 2 Mod Depth vv 00H 7FH 0 127 pp 3 Feedback vv 00H 7FH 0 127 159 MIDI Implementation pp 4 Send To Reverb vv 00H 7FH 0 127 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive OChannel Pressure Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 09H 01H OnH ppH rrH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 Controller Destination Setting 01H Sub ID 2 Channel Pressure OnH MIDI Channel 00 OF ppH Controlled parameter rrH Controlled range pp 0 Pitch Control rr 28H 58H 24 24 semitones pp 1 Filter Cutoff Control rr 00H 7FH 9600 9450 cents pp 2 Amplitude Control rr 00H 7FH 0 200 pp 3 LFO Pitch Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 600 cents pp 4 LFO Filter Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 2400 cents pp 5 LFO Amplitude Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 100 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive OController Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 09H 03H 0nH ccH ppH rrH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 Controller Destination Setting 03H Sub ID 2 Control Change OnH MIDI Channel 00 OF ccH Controller number 01 1F 40 5F ppH Controlled parameter rrH Controlled range pp 0 Pitch
100. pressed for a sound to reach full volume Release Time Offset The time it takes after the key is released for a sound to become inaudible Cutoff Offset Adjusts how much the filter is opened Resonance Offset Emphasizes the overtones in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound Excessively high settings can produce oscillation causing the sound to distort Decay Time Offset The time it is to take following the attack for the volume to decrease NOTE Making abrupt changes in the settings values may cause the sound to become distorted or overly loud Carefully monitor volume levels while making the settings Parameter Value Description Attack Time 64 63 Higher values produce a milder Offset attack lower values produce a sharper attack Release Time Higher values produce longer Offset decay set lower values for a clear cut sound Cutoff Higher values brighten the sound Offset lower values make the sound seem darker Resonance Higher value makes the special Offset quality of the sound stronger lower value reduce these characteristics Decay Time The time it takes for the volume to Offset fall increases as the value is raised lowering the value decreases the decay time NOTE With some Tones the effect does not work as intended Changing the Bend Range Bend Range This sets the amount of pitch change that will
101. prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch is switched off this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet For this reason the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cord s plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of interference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit When
102. set in the grid type Full Even if the linked grid is not connected with a tie the same note continues to sound until the point at which the next new sound is specified Selecting the MIDI Output Connector Rhythm MIDI Out Port This sets the MIDI connector port from which the rhythm part is to be output Kaa Changing this setting also changes the song s MIDI output settings Parameter Value MIDI Out Port ALL INT INTERNAL 1 MIDI OUT 1 2 MIDI OUT 2 USB Selecting the MIDI Output Channel Rhythm MIDI Out Channel This sets the channel used for outputting rhythm parts as MIDI output Parameter Value MIDI Out Channel OFF 1 16 Making Arpeggio Settings The function that allows you to perform arpeggios chords whose notes are played sequentially rather than together from a chord s constituent notes just by playing the chord is called Arpeggiator You can make more detailed arpeggio settings including tempo and range EDIT L RrrFessiol Tempo Style Motif Are Zone Key Range Are Velocity REAL A 0 5 3 For more on switching the Arpeggiator on and off refer to Playing Arpeggios ARPEGGIO p 46 Adjusting the Tempo Arpeggio Tempo This sets the speed of the arpeggio NOTE The RD 700SX has one tempo setting You can change this setting in the tempo display in the Tone screen or alternatively
103. setting of D0 100W only the pitch shift parameter to BYPASS sound will be output Pan L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the delay Level 0 127 Adjust the output level sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range 139 Effect Parameter List 108 FBK P SFT FEEDBACK PITCH SHIFTER This pitch shifter allows the pitch shifted sound to be fed back into the effect Parameter Value Description Assignable Parameters MFX Control Balance Coarse Feedback Parameter Value Description Mode 1 2 3 4 5 Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Coarse 24 412 semitone Adjust the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Fine 100 100 cent Make fine adjustments to the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in 2 cent steps one cent is 1 100th of a semi tone Pre Delay 0 0 500 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the pitch shifted sound is heard Feedback 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the processed sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjust the fr
104. sound that is sent through the Level 0 127 Adjust the output level delay and the chorus sound that is not sent through the delay With a setting of D100 0W only the chorus sound will 119 ENH DELAY E NHANCER be output Witha setting of D0 100W DE LAY only the chorus sound that is sent This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in series through the delay will be output Level 0 127 Adjust the output level Assignable Parameters MFX Control Delay Bal Enhancer Sens 142 Effect Parameter List 121 FLANGR DLY FLANGE R DE LAY Parameter Value Description This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series Fingr Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the modulation speed of the Hz flanger effect Assignable Parameters Fingr Depth 0 127 Adjust the modulation depth of the MEX Control Flngr Bal Delay Bal flanger effect mE Flngr Fbk 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the flanger Parameter Value Description sound that is fed back into the effect Flngr PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the Negative settings will invert the direct sound begins until the flanger phase sound is heard Fingr Bal D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the Flngr Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the modulation speed of the D0 100W chorus sound and the chorus sound that Hz flanger effect is pa
105. sure that the RD 700SX drive icon is not on your desktop Exchanging MIDI Messages With Your Computer MIDI Mode Driver Installation and Settings In order to use the RD 700SX as a USB MIDI device from your computer you must first install the USB MIDI driver The USB MIDI driver is on the included RD 700SX Driver CD ROM In order to use USB in MIDI mode you must install the driver from the included CD ROM into your computer The correct driver and the installation procedure will depend on your system and on the other programs you are using Be sure to read the Readme file on the CD ROM before installation Windows XP 2000 W2kXP Readme_E htm Windows Me 98 98SE W98Me Readme_E htm Mac OS 9 9 04 or later Driver E Mac OS 9 Readme_e htm Mac OS X gt Driver Mac OS X Readme_e htm NOTE When you install the USB MIDI Driver set the RD 700SX to MIDI Mode p 104 NOTE Use a USB Cable no longer than 3 meters Caution when disconnecting the OTE USB cable You must shut down your computer before disconnecting the USB cable Disconnecting the cable while your computer s power is on may destabilize its operation What is the USB MIDI Driver The USB MIDI Driver is a software which passes data between the RD 700SX and the application sequencer software etc that is running on the USB connected computer The USB MIDI Driver sends data from the application to the RD 700SX
106. switching Setups You can store up to 100 different Setups The RD 700SX is shipped from the factory with recommended Setups already prepared You can also register the Setups you like and use frequently to the TONE SELECT buttons These registered Setups are called the Favorite Setups This function allows you to select Setups more quickly Now try actually calling up a Setup CAT ZONE SWITCH CONTROL lt S 8 c s m i ee The current settings are erased when a Setup is called up Be sure to save any Setup you would like to keep first before calling up another Setup p 58 ONE TOUCH ZONE SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION o OLOWER1 UPPER ju eor write Lock T T a SYNTH SME a Press SETUP getting the indicator to light At this time turn NUM LOCK off The Setup screen shown below appears in the display 2128 SETUP k RD SETUP CHANGE Press F2 BANK CHANGE to select a bank When you press F1 a list of the Setups registered to the buttons for the selected bank is displayed Hold down F1 and press CURSOR 4h W to switch the screens 2126 SETUP k RD SETUP CHANGE Press one of the TONE SELECT buttons to select a Setup Try playing the key
107. that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flngr Bal D100 0W Adjusts the volume balance between the D0 100W sound that is sent through the flanger W and the sound that is not sent through the flanger D Level 0 127 Output Level 130 74 ENH gt DELAY ENHANCER gt DELAY This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in series Assignable Parameters MEX Control Delay Bal Enhancer Sens Parameter Value Description EnhancerSens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix 0 127 Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer Delay Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Delay ms 1 2600 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Hz Delay note 1 Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard note Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Bal D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is n
108. the keyboard controller section as well as data used for saving various settings and NOTE patterns Bulk Dump p 99 Messages received via the USB MIDI THRU Connector connector are not transmitted MIDI messages received at MIDI IN connectors are re transmitted without change from the MIDI THRU from this connector to an external MIDI device Use this in situations such as when connector you use multiple MIDI devices simultaneously Connecting to External MIDI Sound Generators NOTE Use a USB Cable no longer V LINK compatible MIDI sound module etc Computer video equipment Fo 5 than a meters gt BEs pe MIDI IN TTT kssse LR cim 8 moiouT i RD 700SX 60 Using the RD 700SX As a Master Keyboard Selecting the MIDI Connector to Use for Output MIDI OUT Port The RD 700SX is equipped with two MIDI connectors and one USB connector You can select which MIDI OUT connector or USB connector is used for outputting the signals for each individual zone IND Low MD HIGH pera o LOWER1 UPPER 1 O 503000 a CG a lt 8 8 t m NUM tock REVERB CHORUS DELAY MULTIEFFECTS O ROOM oem DEPTH Va O CATHEDRAL waw CUT C
109. the System Clock Source setting in Edit mode been set to MIDI p 81 Do you have an external MIDI device connected You cannot set the tempo with the RD 700SX when Clock Source is set to MIDI Accordingly if no external MIDI device is connected then no tempo setting is made for the Rhythm and so the Rhythm does not sound No Pitch Bend When Pitch Bend Lever is Moved Is the Tone Wheel screen appearing in the display The pitch bend effect cannot be applied with the pitch bend lever while the Tone Wheel screen is in the display In this case the pitch bend lever functions as a slow fast switch for the Rotary effect p 53 Set the Part 10 Receive Channel setting in Part Parameter in Edit mode to 10 p 92 Sounds Come From Left or In some Tones the settings are such that sounds randomly play from the left or Is SONG ARP screen selected for the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen Pressing RHYTHM SONG to switch RHYTHM ARP screen p 48 Multi effects are not applied to the Lower part Check the MFX Source and MFX Dest settings p 86 With certain settings the Lower Part s MEX settings are disregarded Right Each right side are panned each time the keys Time Key is are pressed These settings cannot be Pressed changed Panned Sounds can be distorted due to equalizer multi effect and Part volume settings Adjust the following settings Sound is Z
110. the pitches of the sounds being determined by these Feet You can simulate the creation of tones using the harmonic bars by assigning Feet to the ZONE LEVEL sliders While there are only four ZONE LEVEL sliders you can switch the Feet setting by turning the ZONE SWTTCH buttons on and off thus allowing you to assign eight Feet settings to the sliders What Are Feet Feet basically refers to the lengths of pipe used in pipe organs The length of pipe used to produce the reference pitch the fundamental for the keyboard is eight feet Reducing the pipe to half its length produces a pitch one octave higher conversely doubling the pipe length creates a pitch one octave lower Therefore a pipe producing a pitch one octave below that of the reference of 8 eight feet would be 16 for one octave above the reference the pipe would be 4 and to take the pitch up yet another octave it would be shortened to 2 ONE TOUCH EXPANSION Loi R1 UPPER 1 O iD Sa TONE SELECT tan EPIANO MALLET ORGAN STRINGS PAD 2 V ES 2 E s CE 1 65 CI CT 3 ENE Y Bring up the Tone screen p 29 then press the ORGAN If the Tone screen is not currently displayed press ONE TOUCH PIANO then
111. the reverse delay negative values invert the phase 124 Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Rev Dly 200 8000 Hz Frequency at which the high frequency PanA L64 63R Stereo location of Delay A B HFDmp BYPASS content of the reverse delayed sound Pan B will be cut BYPASS no cut Level A 0 127 Volume of delay A B Rev Dly Pan L64 63R Panning of the reverse delay sound Level B Rev Dly Level 0 127 Volume of the reverse delay sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range Delayl Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is High Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the high frequency range synchronized with the tempo Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct Delay1 ms 1 1300 ms Delay time from when sound is input D0 100W sound D and the effect sound W into the tap delay until the delay sound Level 0 127 Output level is heard Hz note 1 Delay time from when sound is input Delay1 D into me tap delay until the delay iud 52 3D DELAY is heard note This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound The delay sound will be Delay2 Mode ms note Settings of the Delay 2 positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Delay2 ms 1
112. the sound Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time Parameter TX CC Value POR Portamento Switch CC65 OFF ON P T Portamento Time CC5 0 127 Setting the Change in Volume According to the Force Used to Play the Keyboard Velocity Sensitivity Max Set the change in volume that occurs in response to the force used to play the keyboard velocity and the maximum value of the change Parameter Value Description SNS 63 63 This setting determines how the vol Velocity ume changes in response to the ve Sensitivity locity The volume is increased as the key board is played with greater force when a positive Value is used when a negative value is selected the vol ume decreases as the keys are played with greater force If this is set to 0 the volume will not be af fected by the strength of your play ing on the keyboard MAX 1 127 Velocity Max Maximum velocity value for the corresponding key Lowering this value will produce softer notes even if you play the key board strongly Changing the Pitch Coarse Tune Fine Tune This makes settings related to the pitch of each Part Parameter RPN Description Value CT 00H Sets the sound s OFF Coarse Tune 02H pitch in semitone 48 48 units 4 octaves F T 00H Sets the sound s OFF Fine Tune 02H pitch in units of
113. the time from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard Pre Delay Deviation adjusts the differences in Pre Delay between each chorus sound Depth Deviation 20 20 Adjust the difference in modulation depth between each chorus sound The shift between the start of each of the chorus sounds increases as the value is increased Pan Deviation 0 20 Adjust the difference in stereo location between each chorus sound With a setting of 0 all chorus sounds will be in the center With a setting of 20 each chorus sound will be spaced at 60 degree intervals relative to the center Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjust the output level 97 TREMOL CHO TREMOLO CHORUS Tremolo Chorus is a chorus effect with added Tremolo cyclic modulation of volume Assignable Parameters 98 SPACE D Space D is a multiple chorus that applies two phase modulation in Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Pan L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the output Treml 0 127 Adjust the spread of the tremolo effect sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R Separation is far right Treml Phase 0 180 degree Adjust the spread
114. this button is lit p 34 In addition you can listen to the demo songs by simultaneously pressing this button and EDIT DEMO PLAY p 31 14 TONE SELECT buttons Pressed to select tones p 33 You can also input numerical values with these buttons when the NUM LOCK button is on NUM LOCK turns on automatically in the Edit and other screens enabling input of numerical values with the buttons MODULATION A 4 BENDER D Pitch Bend Modulation Lever This allows you to control pitch bend or apply vibrato p 44 13 Panel Descriptions Rear Panel 1 POWER ON Switch Switch turns the power on off p 23 2 ACInlet Connect the included power cord to this inlet p 21 3 Wave Expansion Board Installation Slot Remove the cover for installation of optional wave expansion boards SRX Series p 15 4 USB Connector Connect your computer here to exchange Standard MIDI file and setup file between the computer and the RD 700SX p 104 5 PEDAL Jacks DAMPER FC1 FC2 Connecting the pedal switch DP series provided with the RD 700SX to the DAMPER jack allows you to use the switch as a damper pedal With a pedal connected to the FC 1 or FC 2 jack you can then assign a variety of functions to the pedal p 70 p 84 6 MIDI Connectors IN OUT1 OUT2 THRU Used for connecting external MIDI devices and for transmission of MIDI messages p 60 p 91 p 101 7 OUTPUT L MONO R Jacks Provi
115. to speakers and other devices Turning On the Power 1 Before you switch on the power move the volume down all the way by moving the VOLUME Slider Also completely turn down the volume of any connected audio device and other equipment lt i c S m Press the upper portion of the POWER ON switch on the back of the RD 700SX to turn on the power The unit is powered up and the display s backlighting comes on POWER ON E Turn on the power to connected external devices Adjust the volume of the connected external device Adjust the RD 700SX s volume to obtain the proper volume level Getting Ready NOTE In the unlikely event the power is turned off or cut off while Factory Reset p 22 is in progress the data may become corrupted and it may require additional time for the unit to start up the next time won To prevent incorrect functioning of the Pitch Bend Modulation Lever p 44 refrain from touching the lever while the power to the RD 700SX is turned on Nore This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally 23 Getting Ready Turning Off the Power 1 Before you switch on the power move the volume down all the way by moving the VOLUME Slider Also completely turn down the volume of any connected audio device and other A equipment If you need to turn off the 2 power compl
116. unit can also be used as a stereo delay sound coming into the chorus unit Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies 0 OFF Level 0 127 Volume of the chorus sound Neither Chorus or Delay is used Feedback 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the chorus sound that is fed back into the effect 1 CHORUS Delay 0 127 Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Parameter Value Description Rate 0 127 Frequency of modulation Filter Type OFF LPF Type of filter Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation HPF OFF no filter is used Send To 0 127 Adjusts the amount of chorus sound that LPF cuts the frequency range above the Reverb will be sent to the reverb Cutoff Freq HPF cuts the frequency range below note the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter 2 Sixty fourth note triplet Sixty fourth note Thirty second note triplet Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Thirty second note A Sixteenth note triplet Dotted thirty second note Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Sixteenth note Jy Eighth note triplet A Dotted sixteenth note Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz Eighth note A Quarter note triplet Dotted eighth note Hz Rate P note Frequency of modulation n
117. you can change the rhythm s tempo setting p 49 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Param Value Description Parameter Value Tempo 10 250 The way Arpeggio is played and the tempo display may differ with some Arpeggio Styles With Clock Source p 81 set to MIDI M appears in the display and the RD 700SX is synchronized to the tempo of the external MIDI device The tempo cannot be changed with the RD 700SX when M is indicated Setting the Way Arpeggios are Played Arpeggio Style This sets the style of the arpeggio Parameter Value Style Arpeggio Style List p 152 Changing the Order in Which Notes Are Played Arpeggio Motif Set the order to play the notes for the keys pressed from the following Motif UP L The notes are played one by one in sequence from the lowest of the pressed keys The note for the lowest pressed key is sounded each time UP L amp H The notes are played one by one in sequence from the lowest of the pressed keys The notes for both the lowest and highest pressed keys are sounded each time UP The notes are played one by one in sequence from the lowest of the pressed keys No one note is played every time DOWN L The notes are played one by one in sequence from the highest of the pressed keys The note for the lowest pressed key is sounded each time DOWN
118. 0 13 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 8 0 64 OFF CCO1 CC31 CC33 CC95 10 00 00 14 Qaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 9 0 64 BEND UP BEND DOWN AFTERTOUCH 10 00 00 15 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 10 0 64 10 00 00 6F 0aaa aaaa Slider Assign UPPER2 0 97 10 00 00 16 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 11 0 64 10 00 00 70 0aaa aaaa Slider Assign LOWER1 0 97 10 00 00 17 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 12 0 64 10 00 00 71 0aaa aaaa Slider Assign LOWER2 0 97 10 00 00 18 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 13 0 62 Geer ee SE 10 00 00 19 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 14 0 64 10 00 00 72 0000 000a Transpose Switch 0 1 10 00 00 1A 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 15 0 64 OFF ON 10 00 00 1B 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 16 0 64 10 00 00 73 0aaa aaaa Transpose Value 16 112 4 R 48 48 10 00 00 1C 0000 aaaa fo e pep pee ee a a LA E Tr 0000 bbbb SETUP Tempo 10 250 10 00 00 74 0000 000a Split Switch Internal E SE esc bcnc co T LE MM ced 10 00 00 1E 0000 000a 10 00 00 75 0000 000a Split Switch External 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc Upper PIANO Tone Number 0 511 10 00 00 21 0000 000a 10 00 00 76 0aaa aaaa reserved 0000 bbbb 10 00 00 77 0000 000a MFX Structure 0 1 0000 cccc Upper E PIANO Tone Number 0 511 PARALLEL SERIAL 10 00 00 24 0000 000a 10 00 00 78 0000 000a MFX1 Switc
119. 0 208 Synth Stack 8 7 1 265 Tubular bell 121 0 15 155 RichFretless 87 70 21 209 Power Stack 87 7 13 266 Church Bell 121 1 15 156 AllRound Bs 87 70 22 267 Carillon 121 2 15 210 Oct Unison 87 72 14 157 Return2Base 87 70 23 268 Santur 121 0 16 211 Trancy Synth 87 72 15 158 Rubber Bass 87 70 24 x 269 Organ 1 121 0 17 212 SideBandBell 87 72 16 8 159 Virtual RnBs 87 70 25 213 Saw Lead 1 87 72 17 270 Trem Organ 121 1 17 160 Punch MG 87 70 26 214 Saw Lead 2 37 7 18 271 60 sOrgan1 121 2 17 161 Garage Bass 87 70 27 272 70 s E Organ 121 3 17 215 Square Lead 87 72 19 162 Smooth Bass 87 70 28 273 Organ 2 121 0 18 216 Sweep Lead 87 72 20 8 163 MG Bass 87 70 29 274 Chorus Or 2 121 1 18 217 SuperSawSlow 87 72 21 164 101 Bass 87 70 30 275 Perc Organ 121 2 18 218 Jupiter Lead 87 72 22 166 Synth Bass 87 70 3 277 Church Org 1 121 0 2 167 Gashed Bass 87 70 3 RHY GM2 278 Church Org 2 121 1 20 168 VoxB 7 7 4 T AMI Pr M d No Tone Name MSB LSB PC 279 ChurchOrg3 121 2 2 169 Bass RideCym 87 70 35 eee 280 Reed Organ 121 0 21 170 Pearly Harp 87 70 36 219 SXPop Kit 86 64 1 281 Puff Organ 121 1 2 171 Sitar 1 87 70 37 20 SX Rork Kit S e 282 Accordion Fr 121 0 2 172 Sitar2 87 70 38 rid ST NS 283 Accordion It 121 1 2 222 SX R amp B Kit 86 64 4 I 284 Harmonica 121 0 23 223 SX House Kit 86 64 5 BRASS WINDS 285 Bandoneon 1231 0 24 224 GM2STANDARD 120 0 1 286 Nylon str Gt 121 0 25 226 GM2 POWER 120 0 17 173 R amp R Brass 87 71 1 288 Nylon Gto 121 2 25 227 G
120. 000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 16 0 8 10 00 3t 03 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 5 1 3 0 8 10 x 16 3 x 1649 x 16 13 41885 10 00 3t 04 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 8 0 8 10 00 3t 05 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 4 0 8 10 00 3t 06 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 2 2 3 0 8 i i i i 2 ooo 0000 asia pusay Bur Dr eer lt Example4 gt What is the nibbled expression of the decimal value 12587 10 00 3t 08 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 1 3 5 0 8 10 00 3t 09 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 1 1 3 0 8 16 1258 10 00 3t 0A 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 1 0 8 IRE AY DR Coa E As A Ry as wae es a ne 16 78 10 00 00 00 0B Total Size de 16 4 14 i e A Since from the preceding table 0 00H 4 04H 14 OEH 10 0AH the result is 00 04 OE OAH 167 MIDI Implementation Examples of Actual MIDI Messages lt Example1 gt 92 3E 5F 9n is the Note on status and n is the MIDI channel number Since 2H 2 3EH 62 and 5FH 95 this is a Note on message with MIDI CH 3 note number 62 note name is D4 and velocity 95 Example2 CE 49 CnH is the Program Change status and n is the MIDI channel number Since EH 14 and 49H 73 this is a Program Change message with MIDI CH 15 program number 74 Flute in GS lt Example3 gt EA 00 28 EnH is the Pitch Bend Change status and n is the MIDI channel number The 2nd byte 00H 0 is the LSB and the 3rd byte 28H 40 is the MSB but Pitch Bend Value is a signed nu
121. 00a Transmit Resonance Switch 0 1 10 00 1z 03 Oaaa aaaa Velocity Range Upper 1 127 OFF ON 10 00 1z 2B 0aaa aaaa Transmit Resonance 0 127 10 00 1z 04 0aaa aaaa Velocity Sensitivity 1 127 64 63 63 63 A A A A A er er reer seen 10 00 1z 05 0aaa aaaa Velocity Max 1 127 10 00 1z 2C 0000 000a Transmit Attack Time Switch 0 1 OFF ON 10 00 1z 2D 0aaa aaaa Transmit Attack Time 0 127 64 63 LP MR AS AAA A AAA A A RECORD 10 00 1z 2E 0000 000a Transmit Decay Time Switch 0 1 OFF ON 10 00 1z 2F 0aaa aaaa Transmit Decay Time 0 127 10 00 1z 08 0000 000a Damper Switch 0 1 64 63 OFF ON Lo ses ses EE RC aa eres Citi reset era ui Cii o da ca diu Piedra ied ei gu m 10 00 1z 09 0000 000a FC1 Switch 0 1 10 00 1z 30 0000 000a Transmit Release Time Switch 0 1 OFF ON OFF ON 10 00 1z 0A 0000 000a FC2 Switch 0 1 10 00 1z 31 0aaa aaaa Transmit Release Time 0 127 OFF ON 64 63 10 00 1z OB 0000 000a Modulation Switch DST SES ES nm Ed cium RE ipm Go NS ra eric DER OFF ON 10 00 1z 32 0000 000a Transmit Pitch Bend Range Switch 0 1 10 00 1z OC 0000 000a Bender Switch 0 1 OFF ON OFF ON 10 00 1z 33 00aa aaaa Transmit Pitch Bend Range 0 48 10 00 1z OD 0000 000a Control Slider Swtch UPPER1 zk Ses Om e EE ee EE EE e e EE OFF ON 10 00 1z 34 0000 000a Transmit Modulation Depth Switch 0 1 10 00 1z OE 0000 000a Control Slider Swtch UPPER2 0 1 OFF ON O
122. 02 LOW kneb aee eset 12 Lower lof Rh e edet ern 38 Lowest NO 4 2 nente etate 98 DSS Bice otis Sooke euet Abe ee eau aed 63 LWA Slider Assign is 85 LW1 Slider Switch External Zone cuca ii iia id 67 Zone Info s ain de axed SR n 70 LWZ Slider ASSEN inci iii 85 LW2 Slider Switch External Zone iia is 67 Zone Info EE 70 MR ee y ou nee 66 69 M M Doe 20 amu EE e 67 MZ PL ten Poterie o atas et deemed i ULM er Deo 66 Master Lune util ee dar 27 Master Volume site 80 MAA dM ER E E 67 MAX xm AS 69 Md Modulation Switch External Zone zo eei ete eret 67 HUBER 92 Zone ee A A Ta e 70 MENS oA CE E AT yu y xs 52 68 86 92 MEX Control a Te eret esse 87 MEX RE E a Rte uendere oe eie 87 MEX Structure tee irse rte te reveren tob ated 86 MES SWITCHE EE 92 MEX TYP E AA HE 71 MEX Type Tone Info un eiui ee editt tela 71 MEXISOUfce nn eee eee 86 Zone Info ii eter Ga rests 68 MEX2 SOUTC i niit ttt teet en oe tries 86 Zone INFO s at en He te ong lestie edi eter 68 Mic Type eee eee beers 74 Mii Cro Un 1 ere ert eret eee eee ee oes 75 MID FREQ knob ue 12 MID LEVEL knob seen 12 MIDE nt utu 60 92 101 Connection L ere edet er Etre eei decina 21 MIDI Conn ct ts uuu E reete ahorro s 14 MIDI Modeste ferte re crise meet 104 106 MIDI OUT Channel 62 MIDI Out Channel Rhythm 94 MIDEGOUT Porto cun pa cente tete eo oett 61
123. 0H 10H 0 16 Thesame processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received The Mono Poly parameter Tone Info Mono Poly will change 158 e POLY Controller number 127 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7FH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 Thesame processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received The Mono Poly parameter Tone Info Mono Poly will change System Realtime Message Timing Clock Status F8H This message will be received if the Clock Source parameter EDIT SYSTEM Clock Source is MIDI Active Sensing Status FEH When Active Sensing is received the unit will begin monitoring the intervals of all further messages While monitoring if the interval between messages exceeds 420 ms the same processing will be carried out as when All Sounds Off All Notes Off and Reset All Controllers are received and message interval monitoring will be halted System Exclusive Message Status Data byte Status FOH iiH ddH eeH F7H FOH System Exclusive Message status ii ID number an ID number manufacturer ID to indicate the manufacturer whose Exclusive message this is Roland s manufacturer ID is 41H ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standard Universal Non realtime Messages 7EH and Universal Realtime Messages 7FH dd ee data 00H 7FH 0 127 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Of the System Exclusive messages received by this
124. 0SX 2 Setthe device ID number to the same setting as when you performed the bulk dump Setting the Device ID Number Setting the Device ID Number Device ID p 81 3 Make sure that EDIT indicator is extinguished If the EDIT indicator is lit press EDIT to turn the indicator light off and put the RD 700SX in normal performance mode 4 Transmit play back the data from the external sequencer NOTE After playback of the Bulk Dump SETUP data the RD 700SX writes the data to the internal memory Be sure never to turn off the power while this data is being written while Now writing Bulk Dump Data Keep on POWER is showing For details on transmitting exclusive data refer to the owner s manual for your sequencer NOTE Play back the external sequencer at the same tempo you used when performing the bulk dump If you use a faster tempo the data may not be restored correctly NOTE Data cannot be received if the Device ID of the receiving device differs from the Device ID used when Bulk Dump was carried out 99 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Restoring the settings to the factory condition Factory Reset The settings stored in the RD 700SX can be returned to their factory settings ET Executing Factory Reset All results in deletion of the Setups p 56 If you want to keep the recorded content save the Setup file to your computer p 105 or use Bulk Dump
125. 0W Volume balance between the direct D0 100W sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output Level Effect Parameter List 29 3D CHORUS Parameter Value Description This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound The chorus sound will be Output Mode SPEAKER Adjusts the method that will be used to n PHONES hear the sound that is output to the positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right OUTPUT jacks The SE D efed Assignable Parameters will be achieved if you select SPEAKER MFX Control Depth Rate Balance when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones Parameter Value Description Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Filter Type OFF Type of filter High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range LPF OFF No filter is used Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct HPF LPF Cuts the frequency range above D0 100W sound D and the flanger sound W the Cutoff Freq Level 0 127 Output Level HPF Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter 3l 3D S FLANGR 3D STEP FLANGE R Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct This applies a 3D effect to the step flanger sound The flanger sound sound until the chorus sound is heard w
126. 1 WRITE to memorize a setup to RD 700SX Use CURSOR amp Y W to select the file you want to call up then press ENTER The confirmation message appears EDIT Load SETUP File Are You Sure CEXITI CENTERI If you do not want to load the Setup file press EXIT Press ENTER once again to load the setup file The file is loaded into the RD 700SX NOTE Be sure never to turn off the power while the load is in progress If you load a file with a name that contains characters that cannot be displayed by the RD 7008X the file name is displayed ugn as Press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen 90 Deleting Files from Memory File Delete This procedure deletes Setup files and song data loaded from computers that have been saved in memory 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU PS S File Utility USB 6 Part Parameter 7 Rhathm ArPe33i0 amp V Link 3 Utilits 2 Press CURSOR 44 W to select 5 File Utility USB then press ENTER The Edit screen appears EDIT File Ut1 USE SETUP File SETUP File i Delete 3 USB Setting 4 USB Storage 3 Press CURSOR 44 J to select 2 File Delete then press ENTER The following screen appears EDIT File Delete FILES m ALL New Year Live RDS Summer Live RDS PianoBackinsi MID DELETE FILE TY
127. 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 Arpeggio Style Bassline 8 Bassline 9 Bassline 10 Bassline 11 Bassline 12 Bassline 13 Bassline 14 Bassline 15 Bassline 16 Salsa 3 Pop Harp R amp B Harp Synth 1 Synth 2 Synth 3 Synth 4 Synth 5 Synth 6 Synth 7 Seq Pattern 1 Seq Pattern 2 Seq Pattern 3 Seq Pattern 4 Seq Pattern 5 Seq Pattern 6 Seq Pattern 7 Seq Pattern 8 Seq Pattern 9 Seq Pattern 10 Seq Pattern 11 Seq Pattern 12 Seq Pattern 13 Seq Pattern 14 Seq Pattern 15 Seq Pattern 16 Seq Pattern 17 Basic 1 Basic 2 Basic 3 3 Tone Up 4 Tone Up 3 Tone Down Rhythm Pattern List No 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 Rhythm Pattern R amp B Pop 1 R amp B Pop 2 R amp B 1 R amp B 2 Shuffle Pop 1 Shuffle Pop 2 Latin Pop 1 Latin Pop 2 Jazz Brush 1 Jazz Waltz Ballad 1 Ballad 2 Rock 1 Rock 2 Back Beat 1 Back Beat 2 Elec Dance 1 Elec Dance 2 Pop 1 Pop2 Pop 3 Pop A 8Beat Pop 1 8Beat Pop 2 8Beat Pop 3 8Bt Fusion 1 8Bt Fusion 2 Pop Funk 1 Pop Funk 2 Pop Funk 3 Pop Funk 4 Pop Funk 5 Pop Funk 6 Pop Funk 7 Pop Funk 8 16Beat Pop 1 16Beat Pop 2 16Beat Pop 3 16Bt Fusion 1 16Bt Fusion 2 16Bt Fusion
128. 128 OFF ON D a i E 10 00 2p 18 0000 000a Receive Program Change Switch 0 1 Data marked Use nibbled data is expressed in hexadecimal in 4 bit units A value OFF ON i xpr d as a 2 byte nibble 0a ObH has the value of a x 16 b 10 00 2p 19 0000 000a Receive Bender Switch 0 1 ME ye EA SE ES OFF ON 10 00 2p 1A 0000 000a Receive Modulation Switch 0 1 A a OFF ON lt Example1 gt What is the decimal expression of 5AH 10 00 2p 1B 0000 000a Receive Volume Switch 0 1 OFF ON From the preceding table 5AH 9 10 00 2p 1C 0000 000a Receive Pan Switch 0 1 e preceding table 5 OFF ON 10 00 2p 1D 0000 000a Receive Hold 1 Switch 0 1 I OFF ON lt Example2 gt What is the decimal expression of the value 12 34H given as 10 00 2p 1E 0000 000a Receive Expression 0 1 Pata IS ser nal ae pa dir dre be ARE Se hexadecimal for each 7 bits 00 00 00 1F Total Size E A ARENAS AREA EE 2 w x From the preceding table since 12H 18 and 34H 52 18 x 128452 2356 SETUP ToneWheel Backup t ToneWheel Number ToneWheel 1 t 0 ToneWheel 10 t 9 E xc NIE PERPE EM EE La tet b Example3 What is the decimal expression of the nibbled value 0A 03 10 00 3t 00 0000 00aa Percussion Harmonic 0 2 OFF 2ND 3RD 09 0D 10 00 3t 01 0000 000a Percussion Decay 0 1 SLOW FAST From the preceding table since 0AH 10 03H 3 09H 9 ODH 13 10 00 3t 02 0
129. 12x1 dynamic synchronized with the tempo JC 120 open back enclosure 12 x2 dynamic Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz BUILT IN 1 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic FE BUILT IN 2 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser Rate note 1 Frequency of modulation n te BUILT IN 3 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation BUILT IN 4 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser Polarity INVERSE Selects whether the left and right phase BUILT IN 5 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser SYNCHRO of the modulation will be the same or BG STACK 1 sealed enclosure 12x2 condenser the opposite BGSTACK2 large sealed enclosure 12x2 condenser INVERSE The left and right phase MSSTACK 1 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser will be opposite When using a mono MSSTACK2 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser source this spreads the sound METAL large double stack 12x4 condenser SYNCHRO The left and right phase STACK will be the same Select this when 2 STACK large double stack 12x4 condenser inputting a stereo source 3 STACK large triple stack 12 x 4 condenser Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Cross Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the phaser sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase 114 Effect Parameter List
130. 2 This function is called E Piano Edit The settings made in E Piano Edit are stored to ONE TOUCH E PIANO ET When ONE TOUCH E PIANO is pressed all settings other than the E Piano Edit settings are switched to their status at the time the RD 700SX s power was turned on Store any arrangements of settings that you want to keep in Setup p 58 Making the settings 1 Press F1 in the ONE TOUCH E PIANO screen to select the type you want to set 2 Press F2 E PIANO EDIT 1 221 SX E Piano 1 AMP Ture EP AMP Effect Tyre Phaser Effect Depth ze Effect Rate 62 3 Press CURSOR 4 VI b to switch screens and press CURSOR 44 W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 4 Press INC DEC to set the value 5 If you want to save the setting press F1 WRITE The confirmation message appears Press F1 WRITE to save the settings If you want to cancel press EXIT 6 When you finish making settings press EXIT You are returned to the ONE TOUCH E PIANO screen Making Detailed Settings for the ONE TOUCH Tones Selecting the E Piano Sound This chooses the piano Tone to be selected when ONE TOUCH E PIANO is pressed There are 21 Tones to choose from Selecting the Amp Type AMP Type In the past the sounds of electric pianos and similar instruments were always played through some kind of instrument amp The function simulates the sonic characteristics of these instrum
131. 20H SP 64 40H e 96 60H 33 21H 65 41H A 97 61H a 34 22H 66 42H B 98 62H b 35 23H D 67 43H e 99 63H c 36 24H 68 44H D 100 64H a 37 25H 69 45H E 101 65H e 38 26H amp 70 46H F 102 66H f 39 27H I 71 47H G 103 67H g 40 28H 72 48H H 104 68H h 41 29H 73 49H I 105 69H i 42 2AH 74 Aan J 106 6AH j 43 2BH 75 4BH K 107 6BH k 44 2CH 76 ACH L 108 6CH 1 45 2DH TI 4DH M 109 6DH m 46 2EH 78 4EH N 110 6EH n 47 2FH 79 AFH o 111 6FH o 48 30H 0 80 50H P 112 70H p 49 31H 1 81 51H Q 113 71H q 50 32H 2 82 52H R 114 72H r 51 33H 3 83 53H s 115 73H s 52 34H 4 84 54H T 116 74H t 53 35H 5 85 55H U 117 75H u 54 36H 6 86 56H v 118 76H v 55 37H 7 87 57H D 119 778 w 56 38H 8 88 58H x 120 78H x 57 39H 9 89 59H Y 121 79H y 58 3AH 90 5AH z 122 7AH z 59 3BH i 91 5BH 123 7BH 60 3CH lt 92 5CH 124 7CH 61 3DH 93 5DH 125 7DH H 62 3EH gt 94 5EH 63 3FH 95 5FH D decimal H hexadecimal SP is space 169 MIDI Implementation ooueuoseH O O UOUSUEA punog Gx O Gx O PIOH S O Gx O YOUMS 300 ojeba7 Gx O Gx O HOS O O olnu lsos O O ojueweod O O L PIOH by O O y Ja o1uo9 esodind eJauar G O S O Jejojjuoo sodind reeuen Gx O Gx O Z Je onuoo esodind e1euec G O Gx O 1e o4uoo esodind ejeuec Gx O Gx O uoisseJdx3 O S O yodued be O O ooue eg S O Gx O euan oA L O O Anua eq O O au ojueureuog O O adj 1004 S O S O edA ureeug Gx O Gx O uog
132. 21 0 127 121 1 127 121 2 127 121 3 127 121 4 127 121 5 127 121 0 128 121 1 128 121 2 128 121 3 128 148 Rhythm Set List EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number C2 C3 CA C5 C6 C7 C8 SX Pop Kit SX Rock Kit SX Jazz Kit SX R amp B Kit SX House Kit 21 Rock Kick Old Kick Old Kick Analog Kick 2 Dance Kick E Pop Kick Pop Kick Jazz Kick 1 TR909 Kick 1 Lo Bit CHH EXC1 23 Analog Kick 1 Analog Kick 1 Analog Kick 1 TR909 Kick 2 Techno Kick 2 24 Hush Kick Rock Kick Jazz Swish R amp B CHH 2 EXC1 Concert Snare E Por CHH 1 EXC1 Rock CHH1 EXC1 Jazz Tap 1 R amp B CHH 3 EXC1 Snare Roll 26 Reg Snare 1 Rock Snare 1 Jazz Tap 2 R amp B CHH 4 EXC1 Finger Snap E Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap High Q 28 707 Claps 707 Claps 707 Claps 707 Claps Slap 29 Hand Clap 1 Hand Clap 1 Hand Clap 1 Hand Clap 1 Scratch Push CEO Hand Clap 2 Hand Clap 2 Hand Clap 2 Gospel Hand Clap 2 Scratch Pull 31 Hand Clap 3 Hand Clap 3 Hand Clap 3 Hand Clap 2 Sticks EXA Pop PHH EXC1 Pop PHH EXC1 Pop PHH EXC1 R amp B CHH 5 EXC1 Square Click 33 Hand Clap 4 Hand Clap 4 Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Metro Click EM Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Lo Bit CHH EXC1 Metro Bell Old Kick Old Kick Pop Kick Analog Kick 1 House Kick 1 36 Hush Kick Rock Kick Ja
133. 2273 0074 POLAND MX MUSIC SP Z O O UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Roland Iberia S L Portugal Office Cais das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 Porto PORTUGAL TEL 22 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 535500 Gheorgheni ROMANIA TEL 266 364 609 RUSSIA MuTek Dorozhnaya ul 3 korp 6 117 545 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 981 4967 SPAIN Roland Iberia S L Paseo Garc a Faria 33 35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 493 91 00 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab AI Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 17 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou Street Nicosia CYPRUS TEL 022 66 9426 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN MUSIC HOUSE CO
134. 2364 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador ELSALVADOR TEL 262 0788 GUATEMALA Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34 01 zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala TEL 502 599 2888 HONDURAS Almacen Pajaro Azul S A de C V BO Paz Barahona 3 Ave 11 Calle S O San Pedro Sula Honduras TEL 504 553 2029 MARTINIQUE Musique amp Son Z I Les Mangle 97232 Le Lamantin Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 426860 Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 715222 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 NICARAGUA Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago 503 Managua Nicaragua TEL 505 277 2557 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 595 21 492147 PERU Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima Peru TEL 511 4461388 0 3 7 8 TRINIDAD AMR Ltd Ground Floor Maritime Plaza Barataria Trinidad W I TEL 868 638 6385 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02
135. 27 Adjust the output level A Assignable Parameters It s a good idea to use this Parameter to MEX Control Pan Level adjust the difference in volume between d when Overdrive is applied and when it Parameter Value Description is not applied Band1 250Hz 15 415 dB Adjust the 250 Hz gain Band2 500Hz 15 15dB Adjust the 500 Hz gain 88 DISTORTION Band3 1000H2 15 15 dB Adjust the 1000 Hz gain This effect produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive Bandt EINE 21553 15 A te 1250 HZ Sam Band5 2000Hz 15 15 dB Adjust the 2000 Hz gain Assignable Parameters Bande 3150Hz 15 15 dB Adjust the 3150 Hz gain MEX Control Drive Amp Type Pan Band7 4000Hz 15 15 dB Adjust the 4000 Hz gain Band8 8000Hz 15 15 dB Adjust the 8000 Hz gain Parameter Value Description Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 Simultaneously adjust the width of the Drive 0 127 Adjust the degree of distortion The 4 0 8 0 adjusted areas for all the frequency volume will change together with the bands degree of distortion Pan L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the output Pan L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R sound L64 is far left O is center and 63R is far right is far right Level 0 127 Adjust the output level Amp Type SMALL Select the type of guitar amp BUILT IN SMALL small am 2 STACK BUILT IN iiid type amp 91 ENHANCER 3 STACK 2 STACK large double stack amp The
136. 28 x 64 dots graphic LCD with backlit O Connectors Headphones Jack Stereo 1 4 inch phone type Output Jacks L MONO R 1 4 inch phone type Output Jacks L R XLR type Pedal Jacks DAMPER FC1 FC2 1 4 inch TRS phone type MIDI Connectors IN OUT1 OUT2 THRU USB Connector supports file transfer and MIDI AC Inlet O Power Supply AC 117 V AC 230 V or AC 240 V 50 60 Hz AC 220 V 60 Hz O Power Consumption 12W Dimensions 1 414 W x 374 D x 143 H mm 55 11 16 W x 14 3 4 D x 5 11 16 H inches Weight 24 5 kg 54 Ibs 1 oz Accessories Owner s Manual CD ROM RD USB Driver Damper Pedal DP 8 Power Cord Options Wave Expansion Board SRX Series Keyboard Stand KS 17 Pedal Switch DP 2 Damper Pedal DP 8 DP 10 Foot Switch BOSS FS 5U FS 6 TRS phone jacks cannot be used Expression Pedal EV 5 EV 7 In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 172 Index A AC Inlet rite tte ete epe iie 14 Ambi nce 1 emere ete atm 73 AMP Ty Pe az ass aout ais sinus oth SM ad i ees 77 ATD ACCOnDL E 96 Arp Hold u a mettere nn 96 Arp Octave Range ss 96 Arp Melo Vis anidan e ne m bids 96 ATP ZONE Sentier io EROR er PA MO e PE e 96 ARPEGGIO i eet te ees 12 46 AT POR OO o denen tipi a RH RAE 46 Arpeggio Accent uuu sanman a ay husk 96 Arpeggio Hold ss 96 Arpeggio Key Range ee 96 Arpeggio Mot
137. 3 Shuffle Pop 3 Shuffle Pop 4 Shuffle Pop 5 Shuffle Pop 6 Shuffle Pop 7 West Coast Motown R amp B Pop 3 R amp B Pop 4 R amp B Pop 5 Back Beat 3 Back Beat 4 Back Beat 5 Back Beat 6 Back Beat 7 Back Beat 8 Back Beat 9 Back Beat 10 R amp B 3 R amp B 4 R amp B 5 No 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 Rhythm Pattern R amp B 6 R amp B 7 R amp B 8 R amp B 9 R amp B 10 R amp B 11 R amp B 12 R amp B 13 R amp B 14 R amp B 15 R amp B 16 R amp B 17 R amp B 18 Funk 1 Funk 2 Funk 3 8Beat Rock 1 8Beat Rock 2 8Beat Rock 3 16Beat Rock 1 16Beat Rock 2 Ballad 3 Piano Ballad Rockaballad Blue Grass Combo 1 Combo 2 Fast Swing 1 Fast Swing 2 Swing 1 Swing 2 Swing 3 Jazz Brush 2 Free Jazz Jazz 1 Jazz 2 Jazz 3 Jazz 4 Jazz 5 Jazz 6 Jazz 7 Jazz 8 Jazz 9 Jazz 10 Blues 1 Blues 2 Gospel 1 Gospel 2 Polka 1 Polka 2 Latin Pop 3 Latin Pop 4 Latin Pop 5 Latin Pop 6 Latin Pop 7 Latin Pop 8 Latin Pop 9 Latin Pop 10 Latin Pop 11 Bossa Nova 1 Bossa Nova 2 Bossa Nova 3 No 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154
138. 7FH 0 127 These messages are transmitted when Portament Time is set in EXTERNAL Zone OData Entry Controller number 6 38 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 06H mmH BnH 26H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll the value of the parameter specified by RPN NRPN mm MSB ll LSB These messages are transmitted when Bend Range value is set in EXTERNAL Zone OVolume Controller number 7 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 07H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Volume 00H 7FH 0 127 These messages are transmitted when ZONE LEVEL Slider is operated These messages are transmitted when Volume value is set in EXTERNAL Zone 161 MIDI Implementation OPanpot Controller number 10 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH OAH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Panpot 00H 40H 7FH Left Center Right These messages are transmitted when Pan value is set in EXTERNAL Zone OHold 1 Controller number 64 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 40H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON These messages are transmitted when Damper pedal is operated OPortamento Controller number 65 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 41H vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON n MIDI channel number vv Control value These messages are transmitted when Portament S
139. 8 No 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 Tone Name Taisho Koto Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai Tinkle Bell Agogo Steel Drums Woodblock Castanets Taiko Concert BD Melo Tom 1 Melo Tom 2 Synth Drum 808 Tom Elec Perc Reverse Cym Gt FretNoise Gt Cut Noise String Slap Breath Noise Fl Key Click Seashore Rain Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Bird Dog Horse Gallop Bird 2 Telephone 1 Telephone 2 DoorCreaking Door Scratch Wind Chimes Helicopter Car Engine Car Stop Car Pass Car Crash Siren Train Jetplane Starship Burst Noise Applause Laughing Screaming Punch Heart Beat Footsteps Gun Shot Machine Gun Lasergun Explosion MSB LSB PC 121 1 108 121 0 109 121 0 110 121 0 111 121 0 112 121 0 113 121 0 114 121 0 115 121 0 116 121 1 116 121 0 117 121 1 117 121 0 118 121 1 118 121 0 119 121 1 119 121 2 119 121 0 120 121 0 121 121 1 121 121 2 121 121 0 122 121 1 122 121 0 123 121 1 123 121 2 123 121 3 123 121 4 123 121 5 123 121 0 124 121 1 124 121 2 124 121 3 124 121 0 125 121 1 125 121 2 125 121 3 125 121 4 125 121 5 125 121 0 126 121 1 126 121 2 126 121 3 126 121 4 126 121 5 126 121 6 126 121 7 126 121 8 126 121 9 126 1
140. 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which BYPASS sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you do not want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct D0 100W sound D and the delay sound W Level 0 127 Output level 54 LONG TC DLY LONG TIME CTRL DELAY A delay in which the delay time can be varied smoothly and allowing an extended delay to be produced Assignable Parameters 55 TAPE ECHO A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape delay sound This simulates the tape echo section of a Roland RE 201 Space Echo Assignable Parameters MEX Control Echo Level Repeat Rate Mode Parameter Value Description Mode S M L S M Combination of playback heads to use S L M L Select from three different heads with S M L different delay times S short M middle L long Repeat Rate 0 127 Tape speed Increasing this value will shorten the spacing of the delayed sounds Intensity 0 127 Amount of delay repeats Bass 15 15 dB Boost cut for the lower range of the echo sound Treble 15 15 dB Boost cut for the upper range of the echo sound Head S Pan L64 63R Independent panning for the short Head M Pan middle and long play
141. 924 2335 VENEZUELA Instrumentos Musicales Allegro C A Av las industrias edf Guitar import 7 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas Venezuela TEL 212 244 1122 AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Austrian Office Eduard Bodem Gasse 8 A 6020 Innsbruck AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM FRANCE HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Central Europe N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 CZECH REP K AUDIO Kardasovska 626 CZ 198 00 Praha 9 CZECH REP TEL 2 666 10529 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park Calmount Avenue Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 8 7 1 2 0 6 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL
142. Amount of attenuation per octave Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range dB 12 dB Gentle High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 24 dB Steep Level 0 127 Output Level 36 dB Extremely steep Filter 0 127 Filter resonance level Resonance Increasing this value will emphasize the 09 HUMANIZER region near the cutoff frequency Adds a vowel character to the sound making it similar to a human Filter Gain 0 12 dB Amount of boost for the filter output voice Level 0 127 Output level Assignable Parameters MFX Control Rate Drive Depth Vowell Vowel2 Manual Parameter Value Description Drive Sw OFF ON Turns Drive on off Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Vowell a eio u Selects the vowel Vowel2 a eio u 113 Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description 1 1 PHASER Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is This is a stereo phaser A phase shifted sound is added to the original synchronized with the tempo sound and modulated Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency at which the two vowels Hz switch Hz Assignable Parameters Rate D note 1 Frequency at which the two vowels MFX Control
143. Balance D100 0W Volume balance of the original sound Center eee Adjusts thie proportion ofthe delay Feedback sound that is fed back into the effect le EE Negative settings will invert th Level 0 127 Output volume 8 phase HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which 51 SHUFFLE DLY SH UFFLE DELAY BYPASS sound fed back to the effect will be cut Adds a shuffle to the delay sound giving the sound a bouncy delay If you do not want to cut the high effect with a swing feel frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Assignable Parameters Left Level 0 127 Output level of the delay sound MFX Control Balance Delay Shuffle Rate Right Level Center Level Parameter Value Description Output Mode SPEAKER Adjusts the method that will be used to Delay Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is PHONES hear the sound that is output to the synchronized with the tempo OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect Delay ms 1 2600 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is will be achieved if you select SPEAKER heard Hz when using speakers or PHONES when b note 1 Adjusts the time until the delay sound is using headphones Delay heard note Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Shuffle Rate 0 100 Adjusts the ratio as a percentage of the High Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the high range time that elapses before Delay B sounds Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct relative to the time that ela
144. Bulk Dump SETUP to save it to an external sequencer p 99 NOTE When making USB connections be absolutely sure to disconnect the USB cable before starting 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU S File Utilits USE 6 Part Parameter 7 RhYthm ArPessio S U Link 9 Utility 2 Press CURSOR WV to select 9 Utility 3 Press ENTER to display the Edit screen EDIT Utility O Rec Setting i Bulk Dumr Temporary Z Bulk Dume SETUP 3 Factory Reset Curnt 4 Factory Reset All 4 Press CURSOR amp W to select 3 Factory Reset Curnt or 4 Factory Reset All Parameter Value Factory Reset Curnt The currently selected Setup returned to their factory settings Factory Reset All The settings stored in the RD 700SX can be returned to their factory settings NOTE While the Factory Reset is in progress no sounds are produced even when the keys are pressed In addition Rhythms and arpeggios being played are also stopped 100 Factory Reset Current 5 Press ENTER A screen like the one shown below appears Factory Reset Current Current SETUP is CO81 RD SETUP Load Preset OK LNOTE Selecting 000 as the Setup initializes the ONETOUCH PIANO and E PIANO settings 6 Press ENTER The confirmation message appears To cancel the Factory Reset press EXIT 7
145. Control rr 28H 58H 24 24 semitones pp 1 Filter Cutoff Control rr 00H 7FH 9600 9450 cents pp 2 Amplitude Control rr 00H 7FH 0 200 pp 3 LFO Pitch Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 600 cents pp 4 LFO Filter Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 2400 cents pp 5 LFO Amplitude Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 100 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive OScale Octave Tuning Adjust Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 7FH 08H 08H ffH ggH hhH ssH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 08H Sub ID 1 MIDI Tuning Standard 08H Sub ID 2 scale octave tuning 1 byte form ffH Channel Option byte 1 bits 0 to 1 channel 15 to 16 bit 2 to 6 Undefined ggH Channel byte 2 bits 0 to 6 channel 8 to 14 hhH Channel byte 3 bits 0 to 6 channel 1 to7 ssH 12 byte tuning offset of 12 semitones from C to B 00H 64 cents 40H 0 cents equal temperament 7FH 63 cents F7H EOX End Of Exclusive OKey based Instrument Controllers Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 0AH 01H OnH kkH nnH vvH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 0AH Sub ID 1 Key Based Instrument Control 01H Sub ID 2 Controller OnH MIDI Channel 00 OF kkH Key Number nnH Control Number vvH Value nn 07H Level vv 00H 7FH 0 200 Relative nn 0AH Pan vv 00H 7FH Left Right Absolute
146. D Split Freq H 2000 2500 3150 This sets the frequency 4000 5000 6300 separating the high frequency 8000 Hz range HI and midrange MID Level 0 24dB Output Level 1dB 1Step Attack Time 0 100ms This sets the time it takes until the level is compressed after the input exceeds the THRESHOLD Release 50 5000ms This sets the time it takes for Time the compression to be released after the input falls below the THRESHOLD Threshold 36dB 0dB 1dB This sets the level at which 1step compression begins Ratio 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 Compression Ratio 1 1 4 1 1 6 1 1 8 1 2 0 1 2 5 1 3 2 1 4 0 1 5 6 1 8 0 1 16 1 INF Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Managing Setup Files File Utility USB The RD 700SX features a memory in which you can save the RD 700SX s Setup settings You can also connect a computer using a USB cable to save files to the computer and to load files from the computer to the RD 700SX For more on using USB in managing setup files refer to Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode p 104 Saving Setup Files to the Memory Save SETUP File A single individual file containing a collection of 100 setups registered to the RD 700SxX is called a setup file You can save these setup files to the RD 700SX s memory The Setup files you ve saved in memory can be transferred to a computer that s been connected using a USB cable and stored ther
147. D You can change the Output jack of the song data when setting the MIDI OUT Port p 61 51 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Applying Effects to the Sound Multi Effects In addition to chorus p 43 and reverb p 43 the RD 700SX also allows you to apply multi effects to sounds Multi effects provides a collection of 125 different Us Effect Parameter List effects such as distortion and rotary from which you can choose p 112 p You can use two multi effects simultaneously these are referred to as MFX1 and MEX2 The factory settings have a suitable effect assigned to each of the tones EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL iD e DEEN comm es a e D m LL MC gt GLAV GUITAR BRASS VOICE RHY T Ps S WINDS SYNTH GM2 i mum i BAS DEC me WE WE T 7 T y 1 2 3 a s 7 z gt Press MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF getting its indicator to light MEMO The allowable values adjusted 2 with the MULTI EFFECTS Adjust the amount of multi effect applied with the MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL knob vary with CONTROL knob the selected effect For details refer to MFX Control p 87 To cancel the multi effect press MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF the indicator light goes out o Effects a
148. D 700SX Ces cartes d extension memorisant des donnees Wave des morceaux et des ensembles rythmiques elles vous permettront d augmenter considerablement le timbre Pour de plus amples renseignements sur les tonalit s de la carte d expansion Wave se reporter la liste des timbres incluse avec la carte Toutefois certains des noms de tonalit s peuvent s afficher diff remment sur le RD 700SX Consulter la p 36 pour les noms des tonalit s Precautions lors de l installation de la carte d extension Wave Veuillez suivre attentivement les instructions suivantes quand vous manipulez la carte afin d viter tout risque d endommagement des pi ces internes par l lectricit statique Toujours toucher un objet m tallique reli la terre comme un tuyau par exemple avant de manipuler la carte pour vous d charger de l lectricit statique que vous auriez pu accumuler Lorsque vous manipulez la carte la tenir par les c t s vitez de toucher aux composants ou aux connecteurs Utiliser un tournevis cruciforme correspondant a la taille de la vis un tournevis numero 2 En cas d utilisation d un tournevis inapproprie la tete de la vis pourrait etre endommagee Pour enlever les vis tourner le tournevis dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d une montre Pour resserrer tourner dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre Veillez a ne pas laisser tomber de vis dans le chassis du RD 700SX desserrer ES resserrer Ne p
149. D 700SX can play back SMF music files MEMO You can use the USB connector When RHY ARP screen is selected for the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen to exchangesong data between pressing RHYTHM SONG then starts playback of the rhythm n and your computer Refer to Exchanging Files with Computers Storage Mode p 105 Before playing the rhythm first check the screen using the following procedure T Press CURSOR b in the Tone screen to select the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen Song Arpeggio screen Rhythm Arpeggio screen playback songs playback rhythms 4 120 SONG ARP 4 4 120 RHY ARP EE ooo Enjoy Yourself ARP i Phrase 1 1 2 If you re at the RHY ARP screen press F1 to access the SONG ARP screen You ll then be able to play back songs D B EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL ONE TOUCH ZONE SELECT MM EXPANSION J FUNCTION D HIGH EXTERNAL RHYTHM S O LOWER1 UPPER10 C INTERNAL SONG y O Lower 2 t i CNE i REVERB CHORUS DELAY SS o Room zem HA Dep ene OCATHEDRAL Waw NUM UPPER 2 O a D EDIT wame Lock Como 3 TONE SELECT clays GUITAR BRASS woer RHY PIANO EPIANO MALLET ORGAN STRINGS PAD BASS WINDS SYNTH GM2 V T T B JE T vos 1 2 3 s 7 s a EME O
150. D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the Assignable Parameters D0 100W direct sound and the delay sound With MEX Control Balance Coarse A Coarse B a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting Parameter Value Description of D0 100W only the delay sound will be Mode 1 2 3 4 5 Higher settings of this parameter will output result in slower response but steadier Level 0 127 Adjust the output level pitch Delay 1 4 parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo In this Coarse Kee Adjust the pitch of Pitch Shift A in E 1 semitone semitone steps 2 1 octaves Case specify thea Hem the desired note Coarse B 24 12 Adjust the pitch of Pitch Shift B in semitone semitone steps 2 1 octaves FineA 100 100 Make fine adjustments to the pitch of 1 06 T CTRL DLY TIME CONTROL cent Pitch Shift Aun 2 cent steps mmn DE LAY cents When the Effects MFX Control p 87 setting in Edit mode set to One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Delay you can use MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL knob to make FineB 100 100 Make fine adjustments to the pitch of Dina cent Pitch Shift B in 2 cent steps 100 100 changes in the delay time and pitch in real time cents Lengthening the delay will lower the pitch and shortening it will raise One cent is 1 100th of a semitone the pitch Pre Delay A 0 0 500 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift Assignable Parameters A s
151. Dun bum Installing the Wave Expansion Board ss 15 Cautions When Installing an Wave Expansion Board 15 Installing SRX Series Boards eee ce ARR id erre EES 16 Checking the Installed Wave Expansion Boards 17 Installation de la carte d extension Wave French language for Canadian Safety Standard 18 Precautions lors de l installation de la carte d extension Wave sss 18 Installer les cartes de serie S ROC an o eet iier Er EPIRI SES EOS PERLE REPE ES 19 Verification des cartes d extension audio apres installation 20 Connecting the RD 700SX to External Equipment 21 Connecting R dals uu godere ERE UR QE PUE EH EE 22 Turning the Power On and Off Jenae e pU tentent aaa ts 23 Turning On the Power qnaa edidi aile re nn REPRE a ain 23 Turning Off the POW ELS tee trier ERR iranienne 24 Adjusting the Volume edite eto RE E ODER a us PEE RI D tbe CRM apaqsi 24 Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset 25 Adjusting the Display Contrast LCD Contrast sens 26 Tuning to Other Instruments Pitches Master Tune 27 Overview of the RD 700SX 28 Basic Organization of th RD 700SX Janan has Qy tace einen beni ee eese tendon ese 28 Units of Sound iicet has a tec d desideres itte deae nr heure 28 Basic Operation 28 Main ESAE H ions 28 Special IndicatioNS ertet test eee tte tice ette treno dd 29
152. E SWITCH CONTROL Sats So 1 cor EXTERNAL RHYTHM O LOWER 1 UPPER 1 O B o NUM lt 9 t s When demo songs are playing back all settings are switched to their status at the time the RD 7005X s power was turned on Store any arrangements of settings that you want to keep in Setup p 58 1 nore Hold down NUM LOCK and press EDIT No data for the music that is The Demo screen appears played will be output from the MIDI OUT connector RD Taess DEMO Take Break Surerior Grand 1 z Z EVverathina Coo 4 Tone Preview Press CURSOR AA w or INC DEC to select the song that you wish to hear Press CURSOR F2 PLAY or ENTER to start playback of the demo song Press any one of the TONE SELECT buttons and playback begins from the demo song corresponding to the button pressed MEMO When all songs have been played playback will return to the first song and resume Regardless of whether the Pressing a TONE SELECT button during playback stops the song being played and song is playing or stopped playback of the newly selected song begins pressing ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO ends 4 the demo and returns the Press CURSOR EXIT or F1 MENU to stop a so
153. ETUP 3 Bank C 0 100 100 0 100 0 cent 01 00 03 18 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 4 Bank C 0 100 01 00 03 19 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 5 Bank C 0 100 01 00 03 1A 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 6 Bank C 0 100 01 00 03 1B 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 7 Bank C 0 100 01 00 03 1C 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 8 Bank C 0 100 01 00 00 05 0000 000a Clock Source 0 1 01 00 03 1D 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 9 Bank C 0 100 INT MIDI 01 00 00 06 0000 000a Clock Out 0 1 01 00 03 1E 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 0 Bank D 0 100 OFF ON 01 00 03 1F 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 1 Bank D 0 100 4 4 01 00 03 20 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 2 Bank D 0 100 01 00 00 07 0000 000a Damper Polarity 0 1 01 00 03 21 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 3 Bank D 0 100 STANDARD REVERSE 01 00 03 22 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 4 Bank D 0 100 01 00 00 08 0000 000a FC1 Polarity 0 1 01 00 03 23 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 5 Bank D 0 100 STANDARD REVERSE 01 00 03 24 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 6 Bank D 0 100 01 00 00 09 0000 000a FC2 Polarity 0 1 01 00 03 25 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 7 Bank D 0 100 STANDARD REVERSE 01 00 03 26 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 8 Bank D 0 100 01 00 03 27 0aaa aaaa Favorite SETUP 9 Bank D 0 100 01 00 00
154. EXC3 Guiro Long EXC3 Guiro Long EXC3 MEM Claves Claves Claves House Claves House Claves 76 Wood Block Hi Wood Block Hi Wood Block Hi Wood Block Hi Wood Block Hi 77 Wood Block Lo Wood Block Lo Wood Block Lo Wood Block Lo Wood Block Lo EEN Cuica Mute EXC4 Cuica Mute EXC4 Cuica Mute EXC4 Hoo Hi EXC4 Hoo Hi EXC4 79 Cuica Open EXC4 Cuica Open EXC4 Cuica Open EXC4 Hoo Lo EXC4 Hoo Lo EXC4 HEM Triangle Mt EXC5 Triangle Mt EXC5 Triangle Mt EXC5 Triangle Mt EXC5 Electric Triangle Mt EXC5 81 Triangle Op EXC5 Triangle Op EXC5 Triangle Op EXC5 Triangle Op EXC5 Electric Triangle Op EXC5 mL Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Shaker Shaker Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell 84 Wind Chime Wind Chime Wind Chime Wind Chime Wind Chime HE Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets 86 Surdo Mute EXC6 Surdo Mute EXC6 Surdo Mute EXC6 Surdo Mute EXC6 Surdo Mute EXC6 CEA Surdo Open EXC6 Surdo Open EXC6 Surdo Open EXC6 Surdo Open EXC6 Surdo Open EXC6 ga Cana Cana Cana Tambourine Cana 89 Flamenco Timbale Hi Flamenco Timbale Hi Flamenco Timbale Hi Tambourine Flamenco Timbale Hi GEN Flamenco Timbale Lo Flamenco Timbale Lo Flamenco Timbale Lo Cabasa Up Flamenco Timbale Lo 91 Flamenco Timbale Flam Flamenco Timbale Flam Flamenco Timbale Flam Cabasa Down Flamenco Timbale Flam E Shaker 1 Shaker 1 Shaker 1 Shaker 1 Shaker 1 93 Shaker 2 Shaker 2 Shaker 2 Shaker 2 Shaker 2 EM Bongo Lo Mt Bongo Lo Mt Bongo Lo Mt Bongo Lo Mt Bongo Lo Mt Grit Snare LoFi Snare Jazz Sn
155. Enhancer controls the overtone structure of the high frequencies 3 STACK large triple stack amp adding sparkle and tightness to the sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Assignable Parameters Positive settings will emphasize MEX Control Sens Mix boost the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency Parameter Value Description Sens 0 127 Adjust the sensitivity of the enhancer range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range 134 Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Mix 0 127 Adjust the ratio with which the Speed SLOW FAST Simultaneously switch the rotational overtones generated by the enhancer speed of the low frequency rotor and are combined with the direct sound high frequency rotor Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency SLOW Slow down the rotation to the range specified speed the Low Slow Hi Positive settings will emphasize Slow values boost the low frequency range FAST Speed up the rotation to the High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency specified speed the Low Fast Hi range Fast values Positive settings will emphasize Hi Ac
156. F ON Equalizer switch TOUCH MOD The tone changes at the set rate EQ Mid Freq 100 4000Hz Equalizer s basic frequency PEDAL TOUCH The tone changes in response EQ Mid Gain 12 0 12 0 Amount of boost or cut from the to changes in the volume dB equalizer PEDAL The tone changes according to EQ Mid Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 Equalizer bandwidth bandwidth the function of the Manual parameter 4 0 8 0 narrows as value is increased Can be used as a pedal wah Level 0 127 Output volume Filter Type LPF BPF Filter Type LPF Produces a wah effect over a wide frequency range 8 1 H VR CHORUS BPE Stee a wah effect over a This chorus is a descendant of the Roland VR Series effects narrow frequency range Manual 0 127 When Control Type is set to PEDAL Assignable Parameters you can use this parameter to change MEX Control Depth Rate Balance the tone Parameter Value Description Peak deter eet bandwidth o Pre Delay 0 0 100 ms Amount of time that it is to take for the The bandwidth narrows asthe VIRUS chorus sound to be produced after the increased es Rate Mode Hz Note When this is set to note the effect is original sound has sounded a I Rate Mode Hz Note When this is set to note the effect is Synchronized ARE tempo B I Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Wah effect rate synchronized with the tempo Hz 132 Effect Parameter List
157. F No control FC2 CC01 CC31 Controller Numbers 1 31 CC33 CC95 33 95 96 Raises the pitch up to a BEND UP maximum of four octaves 97 Lowers the pitch up to a BEND DOWN maximum of four octaves 98 After Touch AFTER TOUCH 99 Each pedal press raises the key OCTAVE UP range in octave steps up to 4 octaves higher 100 Each pedal press lowers the OCTAVE DWN key range in octave steps up to 4 octaves lower 101 Starts Stops the external START STOP sequencer 102 The tempo will be modified to TAP TEMPO the interval at which you press the pedal 103 Starts and stops Rhythms p RHY PLY STP 48 104 Performs the same function as ARPEGGIO SW ARPEGGIO Switches the Arpeggio p 46 on and off 105 Performs the same function as MFX ON OFF MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF Switches the multi effects p 52 on and off 106 Adjusting the amount of the MFX CONTROL multi effects p 52 107 Starts and stops the song p SNG PLY STP 50 108 Switches the Setups in SETUP UP ascending order 109 Switches the Setups in SETUP DOWN descending order Retaining the Current Tone Even When Tones Are Switched Tone Remain This setting specifies whether the currently heard sound will continue ON or not OFF when another tone is selected Parameter Value Tone Remain OFF ON NOTE Effects settings change as soon as you switch to a new Tone without being influenced by the Tone Remai
158. F ON 10 00 1z 00 0aaa aaaa Keyboard Range Lower 0 87 10 00 02 08 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Stype 0 127 A0 UPPER 10 00 02 09 0000 aaaa Arpeggio Motif 0 11 10 00 1z 01 Oaaa aaaa Keyboard Range Upper 0 87 UP L UP H amp L UP DOWN L DOWN L amp H LOWER C8 DOWN UP amp DOWN L UP amp DOWN L amp H UP amp DOWN 4 RANDOM L RANDOM RHASE 10 00 1z 02 0aaa aaaa Velocity Range Lower 1 127 10 00 02 0A 0aaa aaaa Arpeggio Accent 0 100 0 100 10 00 1z 03 Oaaa aaaa Velocity Range Upper 1 127 10 00 02 OB Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Velocity 0 127 REAL 1 127 Susa qel esas ES 10 00 02 0c 0000 Oaaa Arpeggio Octave Range 61 67 10 00 1z 04 Oaaa aaaa Velocity Sensitivity 1 127 C cp 63 63 10 00 02 OD 0000 000a Arpeggio Hold 9 1 10 00 1z 05 0aaa aaaa Velocity Max 1 127 ORFON IL u eBBesee8Re S inicr indededr at b eir mec ie ee Een in a apri ee TO ete E 10 00 02 OE 0aaa aaaa Key Range Lower 0 87 10 00 1z 06 0aaa aaaa keyboard Transpose 16 112 10 00 02 OF 0aaa aaaa Key Range Upper 0 87 48 48 10 00 02 10 0000 aaaa Rhythm Arpeggio Grid 0 8 so S ege tee ene Dee ee ee 1 4 1 8 1 8L 1 8H 1 12 10 00 1z 07 0000 000a Zone Switch 0 1 1 16 1 16L 1 16H 1 24 OFF ON 10 00 02 11 0000 aaaa Rhythm Arpeggio Duration 0
159. FF ON 10 00 1z 35 0aaa aaaa Transmit Modulation Depth 0 127 10 00 1z OF 0000 000a Control Slider Swtch LOWER1 0 1 0 100 Cent OFF ON O J Sessea os ee d he verstehe de ria uq a t dl ee ad ed at rien vc Shee NS me 166 MIDI Implementation 10 00 1z 36 0000 000a Transmit Chorus Level Switch 0 1 i i sut Decimal and Hexadecimal Table 10 00 1z 37 Oaaa aaaa Transmit Chorus Level 0 127 Ep E EH HEAR EE PE PEE ce ne E An H is appended to the end of numbers in hexadecimal notation 10 09 12 38 000000925 STranenittReverb Level Switch E E In MIDI documentation data values and addresses sizes of Exclusive messages etc are 10 00 1z 39 H 0aaa aaaa H Transmit Reverb Level 0 127 expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits 10 00 1z 3A 0000 000a Transmit Control Change 1 Switch 0 1 The following table shows how these correspond to decimal numbers OFF ON 10 00 1z 3B 0aaa aaaa Transmit Control Change 1 Number 0 127 10 00 1z 3C Oaaa aaaa Transmit Control Change 1 Value 0 127 D H D H D H D H 10 00 1z 3D 0000 000a Transmit Control Change 2 Switch 0 1 PE wis D te RDO ey SOBA OFF ON H H H H 10 00 1z 3E 0aaa aaaa Transmit Control Change 2 Number 0 127 1 01H 33 21H 65 41H 97 61H 10 00 1z 3F 0aaa aaaa Transmit Control Change 2 Value 0 127 2 Bae 36
160. IO getting the indicator to light At the factory settings arpeggios continue playing 2 even after the keys are released Press a key below Middle C C4 but you can also have arpeggios The arpeggio starts with the notes being played in the sequence the keys were stop playing when you release pressed the keys p 96 MED llillu A C4 Hold is set to ON in Edit mode Key ranges in which arpeggios can be played p 96 the ARPEGGIO indicator flashes MEMO If you press ARPEGGIO once more the indicator light goes out and For more detailed information the keyboard returns to the normal performance mode including applicable key ranges and instructions for playing arpeggios refer to Making Arpeggio Settings p 95 Nid When you are performing arpeggios while a rhythm is playing the arpeggio stops playing at the same time the rhythm stops Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Changing the Arpeggio Style You can select the way an arpeggio is played the style to match a variety of different musical genres Press ARPEGGIO getting the indicator to light Press CURSOR gt to go to the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen 4 128 RHY ARP Press CURSOR w to move the cursor to ARP Press INC DEC to select the style The arpeggio s style changes Try playing the keyboard If you press ARPEGGIO once more the indicator light goes out and the keyboard returns to t
161. ISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users
162. LECT EXPANSION FUNCTION DATO pu EXTERNAL UPPER 1 m eue LOWER Y INTROL 400905 OIC Ee MO ROOM SE DEPTH THEDRAL D I O DEL lt 8 s m Ni Sa ITT DEPTH 38 Performing with the Keyboard Press SPLIT getting the indicator to light ZONE SWITCH LOWER 1 lights Try fingering the keyboard 4k Superior Grd amp LHi 145 SX Ac Bass The UPPER tone plays in the right hand section of the keyboard and the LOWER tone plays in the left hand section Split Point B3 LOWER 4 UPPER To exit Split mode press SPLIT once more and the indicator light goes out Changing the Keyboard s Split Point You can change the point at which the keyboard is divided the Split Point in Split mode Hold down SPLIT for several seconds A screen such as the following appears and the current value of the setting is displayed Hold down SPLIT and press a key When you release SPLIT the previous display will reappear The split point key is included in the LOWER section When the split point is set the Key Range p 69 in each zone is divided into left and right ranges with the split point as the boundary and the follo
163. List Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Delay Bal D100 0W Adjusts the volume balance between the Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation depth of the chorus effect D0 100W sound that is sent through the delay W Chorus Bal D100 0W Volume balance between the direct and the sound that is not sent through D0 100W sound D and the chorus sound W the delay D Fingr PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from when the Level 0 127 Output Level direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flngr Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is r H 7 6 FLN DELAY F LANGE R gt DE LAY synchronized with the tempo This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series Fin Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Hz Modulation frequency of the flanger effect Hz Assignable Parameters D note 1 Modulation frequency of the flanger MFX Control Delay Bal Fingr Bal Fin Rate Fingr Feedback n Rate effect note Parameter Value Description Fingr Depth 0 127 Modulation depth of the flanger effect Fingr PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from when the Fingr Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger direct sound begins until the flanger sound that is fed back into th
164. M2ELECTRIC 120 0 25 174 VoyagerBrass 87 71 2 289 Nylon Gt 2 121 3 25 228 GM2ANALOG 120 0 26 175 StackTp Sect 87 7 3 229 GM21AZZ 120 0 33 290 Steel str Gt 121 0 26 176 Oct Brass 87 71 4 s D r Ge ei dl 291 12 str Gt 1231 1 26 177 FullSt Brass 87 71 5 234 GM2ORCHSTRA 120 0 49 292 Mandolin 121 2 26 178 Wood Symphny 87 71 6 232 GM2 SEX 120 0 57 293 Steel Body 121 3 26 179 Bigband Sax 87 7 7 Sad piano 1 i d 294 Jazz Gt 121 0 27 180 Biggie Brass 8 7 8 in Dim 295 Pedal Steel 11 1 2 181 ChamberWinds 87 71 9 aa iis M a a8 296 Clean Gt 121 0 28 182 Soprano Sax 87 71 10 m Et px NDS 297 Chorus Gt 11 1 28 183 Alto Sax 87 71 n xu ure a 298 Mid Tone GTR 121 2 28 184 Tenor Sax 87 71 1 AS Ge uve a 299 Muted Gt 121 0 29 185 Honker Bari 87 71 13 235 T S VICA Ze 300 Funk Pop 121 1 29 186 Flute 87 71 14 e E oe aoe 301 Funk Gt2 11 2 2 187 Oboe 87 71 15 GE SC 302 Jazz Man 121 3 29 188 Pan Pipes 87 71 16 S biis y 13 ux EE 303 Overdrive Gt 121 0 30 189 Bend SynBrs 8 7n 17 a o ae aan 304 Guitar Pinch 121 1 30 190 Saw Brass 87 71 18 m 305 DistortionGt 121 0 31 147 No 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 Tone Name Feedback Gt Dist Rtm GTR Gt Harmonics Gt Feedback Acoustic
165. OA 0000 000a EQ Mode 0 1 SETUP SYSTEM Rule Nu AAA E PATRONS Eeer 01 00 00 OB 0000 000a Pedal Mode 0 1 SETUP SYSTEM e AN Seege ee E 01 00 00 0C 0aaa aaaa System FC1 Assign 0 108 OFF CCO1 CC31 CC33 CC95 BEND UP BEND DOWN AFTERTOUCH 01 00 04 00 0000 000a Switch 0 1 OCT UP OCT DOWN START STOP OFF ON TAP TEMPO RHY PLY STP ARPEGGIO SW 01 00 04 01 0000 000a Mode 0 1 MFX ON OFF MFX CONTROL SNG PLY STP BANK PC NOTE SETUP UP SETUP DOWN 01 00 04 02 0aaa aaaa Lowest No 0 127 01 00 00 OD Qaaa aaaa System FC2 Assign 0 108 01 00 04 03 0000 aaaa Transmit Channel 0 15 OFF CCO1 CC31 CC33 CC95 01 00 04 04 0000 O0aa Transmit Port 0 3 BEND UP BEND DOWN AFTERTOUCH All Outl Out2 USB OCT UP OCT DOWN START STOP 01 00 04 05 0aaa aaaa Key Range Lower 0 87 TAP TEMPO RHY PLY STP ARPEGGIO SW 01 00 04 06 0aaa aaaa Key Range Upper 0 87 MFX ON OFF MFX CONTROL SNG PLY STP 01 00 04 07 0000 000a Local Control 0 1 SETUP UP SETUP DOWN OFF ON ELS et MCN EA IE eee Air pone ee A UEASUR 01 00 00 OE 0000 000a Tone Remain 0 1 00 00 00 08 Total Size OFF ON HS e ne pans De Sete Ee hae ah APCE acc ee se re eds een armee nn 00 00 00 OF Total Size AO MIDI Implementation System One Touch Piano 0000 bbbb Type A t 5 Type B t 6 0000 ccce Lower E PIANO Tone Number 0 511 10 00 00 42 0000
166. ONE LEVEL sliders p 41 Distorted System Master Volume settings p 80 Equalizer Input Gain settings p 45 Isa distortion type effect being applied to the sound p 71 p 87 109 Troubleshooting Problem Check Solution Problem Check Solution Cannot Select The screen is displayed by selecting a Organ Tone TW Organ 1 10 for any of the Tone Wheel the UPPER1 UPPER2 or LOWER Parts Screen in the Tone screen and then pressing CURSOR d p 53 Key Range Is SPLIT set to OFF Settings Not Key Range goes into effect when Effective SPLIT set to ON p 66 p 69 Tempo Doesn t Change Is the System Clock Source setting in Edit mode set to MIDI When you want to perform using the RD 700SX s tempo set this to INT p 81 Pitch is Odd Depending on the Tone selected pitches played in certain registers will be changed and played at other pitches Song Data Not Played Back Correctly Is the Receive GM GM2 System On Switch set to ON Set the System Rx GM System On or System Rx GM2 System On to ON in Edit mode p 82 Are you playing back GS Format song data Once the RD 700SX receives a GS Reset message it then is enabled for GS Format This permits playback of music files bearing the GS logo GS music files However data created exclusively for the Sound Canvas Series may not play back properly on the RD 700SX
167. PE 4 Press F2 to select the type of file to be deleted The file type switches each time F2 is pressed Parameter Value File Type ALL FILES SETUP SMF 5 Use CURSOR 44 W to select the file you want to delete 6 Press F1 DELETE The confirmation message appears EDIT File Delete Are You Sure CEXITI CENTERI If you do not want to delete the file press EXIT Press ENTER to delete the file e Press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Setting MIDI Receive Parts Part Parameter The sixteen Parts played by the RD 700SX s internal sound generator are referred to as Internal Parts When connecting an external MIDI device to a sequencer or other device by assigning the Receive channel to an Internal Part you can receive MIDI messages from the external MIDI device and control the Internal Parts These parameters determine how each Part will receive MIDI messages How to Make Settings 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU 7 Rhathm ArPes33i0 S U Link 9 Utility 2 Press CURSOR 44 Y W to select 6 Part Parameter 3 Press ENTER to display the Edit screen EDIT Part Parameter lt Part gt Partii UPPER1 Tone Surerior Grd Receive Channel 1 Volume 127 Pan e Uoic
168. Panpot 00H 40H 7FH Left Center Right Not received when the Rx Pan EDIT Part Parameter Rx Pan is OFF Thepan parameter EDIT Part Parameter Pan will change OExpression Controller number 11 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH OBH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Expression 00H 7FH 0 127 O General Purpose Controller 1 Controller number 16 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 10H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 OHold 1 Controller number 64 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 40H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON Notreceived when the Rx Hold 1 EDIT Part Parameter Rx Hold 1 is OFF OPortamento Controller number 65 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 41H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON The Portamento Sw parameter Tone Info Portament Sw will change OSostenuto Controller number 66 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 42H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON OSoft Controller number 67 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 43H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON OLegato Foot Switch Controller number 68
169. Press ENTER once again to start the Factory Reset operation NOTE Never turn off the power during Factory Reset while Executing Don t Power Off appears in the display 8 After the Factory Reset operation is finished the Utility screen returns to the display Factory Reset All 5 Press ENTER A screen like the one shown below appears Factory Reset All Erases entire memory content and restores factory Presets OK 6 Press ENTER The confirmation message appears To cancel the Factory Reset press EXIT 7 Press ENTER once again to start the Factory Reset operation NOTE Never turn off the power during Factory Reset while Executing Don t Power Off appears in the display 8 After the Factory Reset operation is finished The Utility screen returns to the display Connecting External MIDI Devices Recording RD 700SX Performances to an External MIDI Sequencer EDIT MENU E S File Utility USB 6 Part Parameter 7 Rhathm ArPFe33i0 S U Link 3 Uutilits Now try using an external sequencer to record your music onto multiple tracks and then play back the recorded performance Connecting to an External Sequencer ET To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections gt MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDIIN MIDIOUT
170. Rhythm Arpeggio Grid Rhythm Arpeggio Duration Arpeggio Accent Arpeggio Octave Range Arpeggio Hold V Link Mode V Link Tx Channel V Link Out Port Key Range Lowest No Local ON OFF Rec Setting Bulk Dump Temporary Bulk Dump SETUP Factory Reset Current Factory Reset All O 3 PS Mo Po fo PO Po o o Po fo PS SEE SEE IS Setting Parameters BS Getting EDIT indicator light H Enter the Edit Mode Edit Menu Screen EDIT MENU 3 Effects 4 5ound Control Y Select a menu EDIT MENU A SeFile Utilits USE 6 Part Parameter 7 Rhythm Arressio 8 V Link 9 Utility EDIT System gt Master Tune EMIA Master Volume EG Mode Pedal Mode Tone Remain aud EDIT System Clock Source Clock Out SETUP Ctrl Ch Device ID 17 USE Driver ORIGINAL WRITE Change the value You can input the value using The number of Edit screen the TONE SELECT buttons and pages may vary according press ENTER to set the value to the menu selected Exit the Edit Mode EDIT Extinguishing 7 EDIT indicator You can press F1 WRITE to save following settings as common settings to RD 700SX 0 System e 4 Sound Control e 8 V Link However following settings are not saved e V Link On or Off Sound Control On or Off Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Making Sys
171. SX s Receive channel However when the Control channel and the Receive channel are both set to the same channel the Control channel takes priority and Setups are switched Switching Tones The MIDI messages transmitted by the external MIDI device will be received by the RD 700SX to select Tones as shown in the following table Group Number Bank Select Program MSB LSB Change Number PIANO 001 020 087 064 001 020 E PIANO 021 041 087 065 001 021 CLAV 042 062 087 066 001 021 MALLET ORGAN 063 072 112 0 001 010 073 092 087 067 001 020 STRINGS 093 114 087 068 001 022 PAD 115 134 087 069 001 020 GTR BASS 135 172 087 070 001 038 BRASS 173 196 087 071 001 024 WINDS VOICE 197 218 087 072 001 022 SYNTH Rhythm Set 219 223 086 064 001 005 For details on the SRX Series Tones refer to the owner s manual for the SRX Series Wave Expansion Board and p 36 103 Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode About USB Functions The USB function used with the RD 700SX features two modes a Storage mode used for transferring files and a MIDI mode used for MIDI transmissions Use of these modes requires that the settings be switched with the RD 700SX and the two modes cannot be used simultaneously NOTE Any switching of the USB mode Storage mode MIDI mode must be performed before the RD 700SX and computer are connected The following shows the compatib
172. TS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL lt S E 3 m REVERB CHORUS DELAY ETNEA Room Turn on the power as described in Turning On the Power p 23 The name of the installed wave expansion board is displayed for as long as EXPANSION A or B is held down The number of tones and Rhythm Sets contained in the expansion board is displayed The example here depicts what you would see if the SRX 02 Concert Piano Wave Expansion Board were installed in the SRX A slot ExFarziaon Board Info R SRAE ZCOncertPna Tone Bg Hat bin Rat bin By releasing the button you go back to the previous screen is Selecting Wave Expansion Board Tones p 35 If appears next to the name of the slot in which the board was installed it may be that the wave expansion board is not being recognized properly Use the procedure in Turning Off the Power p 24 to turn the power off then reinstall the wave expansion board correctly French language for Canadian Safety Stand Getting Ready Installation de la carte d extension Wave French language for Canadian Safety Standard Vous pouvez installer jusqu a 2 cartes d extension optionnelles dans le R
173. U Ede ES ERR 73 Changing the Width of the Sound Stereo Width ss 73 Changing the Sound s Nuance Nuance 73 Changing the Sense of Space Surrounding the Sound Ambience sss 73 Changing the Amount of Reverb Effect Reverb Level 73 Opening Closing the Piano Lid Lid 74 Changing the Characteristics of the Mic Mic Type Distance 74 Adjusting the Resonant Sounds When the Keys are Pressed String Resonance 74 Making the Midrange Equalizer Settings EO SW EQ Gain EQ Frequency EQ Q 74 Changing the Key Touch Key Touch 74 Making Fine Adjustments to the Keyboard Touch Key Touch Offset 75 Setting a Constant Volume Level in Response to the Playing Force Velocity 75 Changing the Timing of Sounds in Response to the Velocity Velocity Delay Sens 75 Changing the Touch Sensitivity According to the Key Range Velocity Keyfollow Sens 75 Finely Adjusting the Tuning Micro Tune 75 Adjusting Resonance when the Damper Pedal is Depressed Sympathetic Resonance 75 Changing Sound Characteristics Tone Modify ss 76 Restore the settings to initial conditions Initialize sees 76 Making Detailed Settings for the E Piano Tones E Piano Edit 76 Making the settings cs re nur titi ede ue Leone iet a REO ITE ERR aa ss 76 Selecting the E
174. Value Description Split Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency at which the low and high High Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the high range ranges will be divided chorus sound Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Delay time from when the original High Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the high range chorus sound is heard to when the low range sound flanger sound is heard Balance D100 0W Volume balance of the original sound Low Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is D0 100W D and chorus sound W synchronized with the tempo Level 0 127 Output volume Low Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate at which the low range flanger Hz sound is modulated Hz 33 2BND FLANGR 2 BAND FLANGE R Low Rate note 1 Rate at which the low range flanger A flanger that lets you apply an effect independently to the low sound ss modulated note frequency and high frequency ranges Low Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the low range flanger sound Assignable Parameters Low Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the low range flanger MFX Control Balance Low Rate HighRate Low Feedback sound High Feedbac Low Feedback 98 98 Proportion of the low range flanger sound that is to be returned to the input Parameter Value Description negative values invert the phase Split Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency at which the low and high LoStp Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is ranges vill be divided synchronized with the tempo Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0
175. Volume and amount of distortion of 2 STACK BUILT IN single unit type amp Volume the amp 3 STACK 2 STACK large double stack amp Pre Amp 0 127 Volume of the entire pre amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Master Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Pre Amp Gain LOW Amount of pre amp distortion High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range MIDDLE Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the output sound HIGH Level 0 127 Output Level Pre Amp Bass 0 127 Tone of the bass mid treble Pre Amp frequency range 36 DISTORTION wide zd Middle cannot be set if Match Drive Produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive The parameters SR da E selected mie d dc Amp Type are the same as for 35 OVERDRIVE PA MH Es MR E e DRIVE 127 0 37 vs OVRDRIVE VS OVE RDRIVE Pre Amp Bright OFF ON Turning this On produces a sharper This is an overdrive that provides heavy distortion and brighter sound Assignable Parameters T duci d applies to We IC MFX Control Level Tone Amp Type Drive Pan 120 Clean Twin and BG Lead Pre Amp Types Parameter Value Description Speaker Sw OFF ON Determines whether the signal passes Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion through the speaker ON or not Also changes the volume OFF Tone 0 127 Sound quality of the Overdrive effect Speaker See thetable Type of speaker Amp Sw OFF ON Turns the Amp Simulator on off below Amp Type SMALL Type of guitar amp Mic Setting 1 2 3 Adjusts the lo
176. Y Press the CHORUS DELAY The chorus type switches each time you press the CHORUS DELA Y TYPE explanation OFF unlit Chorus and Delay is not used CHORUS You can give the sound greater dimension with more fatness and breath DELAY This effect delays the sound to produce an echo like effect Adding Reverberation to the Sound REVERB E Making Reverb Settings p 87 MED You can select the reverb types other than those shown at the left with Reverb Type p 87 in 3 Effects in the Edit screen In this case the REVERB indicator corresponding to the selected type flashes NOTE When the Tone Info s Reverb Amount setting is set to 0 then no effect is applied even when the REVERB knob is turned p 71 Adding Breadth to the Sound CHORUS DELAY E Setting Chorus and Delay p 88 MEMD You can select the chorus types other than those shown at the left with Chorus Type p 88 in 3 Effects in the Edit screen In this case the CHORUS DELA Y indicator corresponding to the selected type flashes 43 Performing with the Keyboard 2 nore Adjust the CHORUS DELAY DEPTH knob to select the amount of When the Tone Info s Chorus chorus effect to be applied Amount setting is set to 0 Rotating the knob clockwise applies a deeper chorus and rotating it then no effect is applied even counterclockwise ap
177. You are returned to the Edit screen 10 Stop the external sequencer Bulk Dump SETUP 6 Press CURSOR D 1 A screen like the one shown below appears Bulk Dumr SETUP To Send System Send Ok Parameter Value From Setup number for the first Setup to be transmitted To Setup number for the last Setup to be transmitted Send System Determines whether the system settings are to be transmitted YES or not NO 7 Press CURSOR A and INC DEC to set the transmitted Setups 8 Putthe external sequencer in record mode 9 Press ENTER to transmit the settings To cancel the Bulk Dump press DEC A screen like the one shown below appears Bulk Dumr SETUP How Executins 1 1009 To cancel PressCEXITI Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT 10 After the transmitting is finished the display will indicate COMPLETE You are returned to the Edit screen 11 Stop the external sequencer Restoring saved settings to the RD 700SX When returning settings saved to an external sequencer back to the RD 700SX an Exclusive message is transmitted from the external sequencer then the data is received by the RD 700SX NOTE Be aware that when you restore Setups data to the RD 700SX the data in the RD 700SX will be overwritten and lost 1 Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external sequencer to the MIDI IN connector of the RD 70
178. a FC 1 Assign 0 106 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 OFF CCO1 CC31 CC33 CC95 01 00 Ot OD 000a aaaa Micro Tune Type 0 16 BEND UP BEND DOWN AFTERTOUCH PRST USER 1 14 OCT UP OCT DOWN START STOP 01 00 Ot OE 0000 aaaa Sympathetic Resonance Depth 0 10 TAP TEMPO RHY PLY STP ARPEGGIO SW 01 00 Ot OF 0000 aaaa Sympathetic Resonance Pitch 0 10 MFX ON OFF MFX CONTROL SNG PLY STP 01 00 Ot 10 0000 aaaa Sympathetic Resonance Level 0 10 10 00 00 5B 0aaa aaaa FC 2 Assign 0 106 OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 00 00 00 11 Total Size BEND UP BEND DOWN AFTERTOUCH Ia mien reinen et 0 te mm iie de Bisnes ii et le O tn E iS et OCT UP OCT DOWN START STOP System One Touch E Piano TAP TEMPO RHY PLY STP ARPEGGIO SW Type A t 7 Type B t 8 MFX ON OFF MFX CONTROL SNG PLY STP LORS a SRE Ne eee MO IAN Eed Address Description 00 5C 0000 0aaa MFX Knob Assgin 0 4 EE arie ei AS varier de tel re e eS Ca AAA AAA ie OFF MFX1 CTRL MFX2 CTRL MFX1 amp 2 CTRL TEMPO 01 00 Ot 00 000a aaaa Tone Number 0 20 pees ee me SA E e thes cc ae aes een ae ee 01 00 Ot 01 0000 00aa Amp Simulator Type 0 2 10 00 00 5D 0000 000a EQ Switch 0 1 OFF EP AMP GTR AMP OFF ON 01 00 Ot 02 0000 0aaa Effect Type 0 4 10 00 00 5E 0aaa aaaa EQ Input Gain 4 124 OFF CHORUS TREMOLO AUTO WAH PHASER 15 15 dB 01 00 Ot 03 0aaa aaaa Effect Depth 0 127 10 00 00 5F 000a aaaa EQ Low Fr
179. a 89 U UP1 Slider Assign ss 85 UP1 Slider Switch External Zone ss 67 Zone NO u kaa ed A Et RS 70 UP2 Sider Switch Lone TNO iii dad 70 UP2 Slider Assign a aat mette 85 UP2 Slider Switch External Zone eese AS 67 Upper Tone dete erp dts 38 EIER een tu aldeas 66 69 USB onn eda e EA NW aU eR 104 Connection ist 21 USB Conhnectot nhi eter Sates 14 USB DriV t usina pedit 106 USB Storage Mode ee 104 USER CQ csi Re 67 Utility uttter mtn D erki 98 V Velo Delay Sens sus 75 84 Velo Keyfolw Sens sss 75 84 Velocity TOS EI c icseentepenntemquiele e gei eet 96 te 84 External Zone eese 66 67 Piano Edit me ata edocet ierit 75 Zone rfO EE 69 176 Velocity Delay Sens Ee 84 Piano Edit ii ines ie eR 75 Velocity Keyfollow Sens Editing atus a aka eden 84 Piano NM page eS Ne matu bes 75 Velocity Max External Zone inse tn o eed ty 67 Zone Info EE 69 Velocity Range Lower External Zone eese ua u 66 LONE INO esis noise eie e God amd pe ed 69 Velocity Range Upper ss 66 Zone NO et t Ne d tr Pep 69 Velocity Sens Zone Info noventa in ct bm ier 69 Velocity Sensitivity External Zone 67 VV Olea e r A a EAA 92 VENK ian antenne hon 12 97 MELINA 97 V3Link Mode 4 e as ete a u Plan 98 V Link OUT Port ss 98 V Link Tx Channel nus a utan aan aulas 98 Voice Reserv
180. aking the Sound Control To cancel this function press the SSOUND CONTROL once more Settings Sound Control p extinguishing the indicator 88 44 Performing with the Keyboard Adjusting the Level of the Sound s Low Mid and High Frequency Ranges EQUALIZER The RD 700SX is equipped with a three band equalizer note You can adjust the levels of the low frequency midrange and high frequency ranges using the EQUALIZER LOW MID and HIGH knobs respectively Equalization is applied to the You can also adjust the midrange frequency with MID FREQ overall sound output from the OUTPUT jacks EQUALIZER EFFECTS SOUND HIGH CONTROL st st ON OFF EE D eg Oy xU Esp KMS Ad e N You can set the RD 700SX so that the equalizer settings are not changed when you change Press EQUALIZER ON OFF to make its indicator light setups Refer to Preventing A screen like the one shown below appears and the equalizer is turned on Equalizer Settings from Being Switched EQ Mode E p 80 Mid Gain HOMERIC 2 Turn the knobs to adjust the levels in each range Rotating a knob LOW MID LEVEL HIGH in the negative direction cuts the level of that frequency range rotate it in the positive direction boost the level of that range In addition rotating MID FREQ in the negative direction lowers the frequency while rotating it in the positive direction raises the frequency You can press F2 to ge
181. an be set independently the unique Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate at which the 16 step sequence will type of modulation characteristic of these speakers can be simulated E SEXES uite closely This effect is most suitable for electric organ Patches D note 1 Rate at which the 16 step sequence will duree ope ys SEC i Rate cycle note Assignable Parameters Attack 04127 Speed at which the pan changes MFX Control Speed Tw Fast Rate Wf Fast Rate Separation between steps Input Sync Sw OFF ON Specifies whether an input note will Parameter Value Description cause the sequence to resume from the Speed SLOW FAST Simultaneously switch the rotational first step of the sequence ON or not speed of the low frequency rotor and OFF high frequency rotor Input Sync 0 127 Volume at which an input note will be SLOW Slows down the rotation to Thres detected the Slow Rate Level 0 127 Output volume FAST Speeds up the rotation to the Fast Rate WfSlow Rate 0 05 10 00 Slow speed SLOW of the low Hz frequency rotor Wf Fast Rate 0 05 10 00 Fast speed FAST of the low frequency Hz rotor 116 Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description 23 CHORUS Woofer Accel 0 15 Adjusts the time it takes the
182. an control not only Note messages but a variety of other external MIDI device settings as well You can control internal and external sound generators independently Pressing EXTERNAL INTERNAL so the button s indicator is lit enables the RD 700SX to control external MIDI sound modules You use the EXTERNAL INTERNAL to switch between control of the INTERNAL zone and control of the EXTERNAL zone You can also make detailed settings for MIDI messages transmitted to external sound modules What s MIDI MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface is a standard specification that allows musical data to be exchanged between electronic musical instruments and computers By using a MIDI cable to connect devices that have MIDI connectors you can create an ensemble in which a single MIDI keyboard can play multiple instruments or change settings automatically as the song progresses About MIDI Connectors r Connecting the RD 700SX to External Equipment p 21 The RD 700SX has the following three types of MIDI connector Their functions differ as described below MID U THRU OUT 2 OUT 1 MIDI IN Connector Performance messages from an external MIDI device are received here These incoming messages may instruct the RD 700SX to play sounds or switch tones MIDI OUT Connector MIDI messages are transmitted from this connector to external MIDI devices The RD 700SX s MIDI OUT connector is used for sending the performance data of
183. an left and right Pre LPF 0 7 Cuts the high frequency range of the Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation sound coming into the reverb Type ROOM1 HALL2 Higher values will cut more of the high Delay time frequencies Type DELAY PAN DELAY Level 0 127 Output level of reverberation HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which the Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation BYPASS high frequency content of the reverb Delay 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound sound will be cut or damped If you do Feedback that is fed back into the effect when the not want to cut the high frequencies set Reverb Character setting is 6 or 7 this parameter to BYPASS Delay 0 127 Adjusts the amount of delay feedback 6 CATHEDRAL Feedback when the Type setting is DELAY or PAN Simulates the type of reverberation in churches and other such spaces DELAY 2 SRV ROOM This simulates typical room acoustic reflections Parameter Value Description Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation Size 1 8 Size of the simulated room or hall High Cut 160 Hz 12 5 Adjusts the frequency above which the kHz high frequency content of the reverb will BYPASS be reduced If you do not want to reduce the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Density 0 127 Density of reverb Diffusion 0 127 Adjust
184. ange High Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the high range chorus sound is heard flanger sound Low Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is High Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the high range flanger synchronized with the tempo sound Low Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate at which the low range chorus High Feedback 98 98 Proportion of the high range flanger Hz sound is modulated Hz sound that is to be returned to the input Low Rate note 1 Rate at which the low range chorus negative values invert ihe phase sound is modulated note Balance D100 0W Volume balance of the original sound A D0 100W D and flanger sound W Low Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the low range Level 0 127 Output volume chorus sound aciousn f the low range choru Low Phase 0 180 deg ed sness of the lo ge chorus 34 2BND S FLN 2BAND STEP High Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Delay time from when the original F LANGE R sound is heard to when the high range A step flanger that lets you apply an effect independently to the low chorus poundisheatd frequency and high frequency ranges High Rate Hz note When this is set to note the effect is Mode synchronized with the tempo Assignable Parameters HighRate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate at which the low range chorus MEX Control LoStp Rt HiStp Rt Low Feedback Hi Feedback Hz sound is modulated Hz Balance High Rate note 1 Rate at which the low range chorus b sound is modulated note Parameter
185. annel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm mono number 00H 10H 0 16 These messages are transmitted when Mono Poly value is set to MONO in EXTERNAL Zone e POLY Controller number 127 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7FH 00H n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 These messages are transmitted when Mono Poly value is set to POLY in EXTERNAL Zone System Realtime Messages e Timing Clock Status F8H This message will be received if the Clock Out parameter EDIT SYSTEM Clock Out is ON OStart Status FAH This message is sent on START operation when START STOP function is selected on Foot Controller OStop Status FCH This message is sent on STOP operation when START STOP function is selected on Foot Controller OActive Sensing Status FEH This message is transmitted at intervals of approximately 250 msec System Exclusive Messages Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Message and Data Set 1 DT1 are the only System Exclusive messages transmitted by the RD 700SX Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Message Oldentity Reply Message Receiving Identity Request Message the RD 700SX send this message Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH dev 06H 02H 41H 03H 02H F7H 00H 00H 00H 01H 00H 00H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message dev Device ID use the same as the device ID of Roland 06H Sub ID 1 General Information
186. anner in which the volume R R SLASH changes as one step progresses to the next LEGATO The change in volume from one step s level to the next L L remains unaltered If the level of a Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is following step is the same as the one synchronized with the tempo preceding it there is no change in Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of the change Hz volume Hz SLASH The level is momentarily set D note 1 Frequency of the change note to 0 before progressing to the level of Rate the next step This change in volume Depth 0 127 Depth to which the effect is applied ecursevenitthedevelof the Low Gain 15 4 15 dB Gain of the low range following step is the same as the High Gain 15 4 15 dB Gain of the high range preceding step Level 0 127 Output Level Shuffle 0 127 Timing of volume changes in levels for even numbered steps step 2 step 4 step 6 1 9 STEP PAN A The higher the value the later the beat This uses a 16 step sequence to vary the panning of the sound progresses Assignable Parameters tevel ee Output level MFX Control Rate Attack Parameter Value Description 21 ROTARY Step 01 16 L64 63R Pan at each step The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is used with the electric organs of the past Since the movement of the synchronized with the tempo high range and low range rotors c
187. arding the checksum please refer to p 168 2 Data Transmission llChannel Voice Messages Note off Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 8nH kkH 40H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 kk note number 00H 7FH 0 127 Note off message is sent out with the velocity of 40H e Note on Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 9nH kkH vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 01H 7FH 1 127 kk note number vv note on velocity e Control Change By selecting a controller number that corresponds to the setting of parameters of controllers Slider Assign FC1 2 Pedal Assign the RD 700SX can transmit any control change message These messages are not transmitted when EXTERNAL Zone Parameter is OFF OBank Select Controller number 0 32 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 00H mmH BnH 20H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm 11 Bank number 00 00H 7F 7FH bank 1 bank 16384 When Rec Mode is ON EDIT Utility Rec Setting Rec Mode these messages are transmitted when Tone is selected OModulation Controller number 1 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 01H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Modulation depth 00H 7FH 0 127 These messages are transmitted when Modulation lever is operated OPortamento Time Controller number 5 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 05H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Portamento Time 00H
188. are 1 Grit Snare LoFi Snare o6 Jungle Snare 1 Jungle Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Jungle Snare 1 Jungle Snare 1 EA Reg Stick Rock Side Stick Jazz Snare Swing R amp B Side Stick 2 R amp B Side Stick 2 98 Titan Snare Rock Snare 2 Jazz Swish Analog Snare Analog Snare LEM O kick Old Kick Old Kick HipHop Kick TR808 Kick 1 100 Pop Kick Pop Kick Jazz Kick 1 TR808 Kick 1 TR808 Kick 2 101 Rock Kick Rock Kick Jazz Kick 2 TR808 Kick 2 Jungle Kick E Analog Kick 1 Analog Kick 1 Analog Kick 1 Techno Kick Techno Kick 103 Rock Snare Dry Rock Snare Dry Jazz Tap 1 Rock Snare Dry Rock Snare Dry ee 104 Electric Snare Electric Snare Jazz Tap 2 Electric Snare Electric Snare 105 Reg Snare Ghost Rock Snare Ghost Pop Snare Swing Jungle Snare 2 Jungle Snare 2 E Slappy Slappy Slappy Vinyl Noise Slappy 107 Wah Gtr Noise 1 Wah Gtr Noise 1 Wah Gtr Noise 1 Wah Gtr Noise 1 Wah Gtr Noise 1 108 Wah Gtr Noise 2 Wah Gtr Noise 2 Wah Gtr Noise 2 Wah Gtr Noise 2 Wah Gtr Noise 2 149 Rhythm Set List W No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number GM2 STANDARD GM2 ROOM GM2 POWER GM2 ELECTRIC 21 j s a gt se eae QuE um SS A tege D 26 NEE E High a High Q High Q High Q 28 Slap Slap Slap Slap 29 ScratchPush EXC7 ScratchPush EXC7 ScratchPush EXC7 ScratchPush EXC7 CEN ScratchPull EXC7 ScratchPull EXC7 ScratchPull EXC7 ScratchPull EXC7
189. as laisser la plaque arriere detachee Apres avoir installe la ou les carte s d extension bien remettre la plaque en place Ne pas toucher aux circuits imprim s ou aux connecteurs Ne jamais forcer lors de l installation de la carte de circuits imprim s Si la carte s ajuste mal au premier essai enlevez la carte et recommencez l installation e Quand l installation de la carte de circuits imprim s est termin e reverifiez si tout est bien install Toujours teindre et debrancher l appareil avant de commencer l installation de la carte N installez que les cartes de circuits imprimes specifiees SRX Series Enlevez seulement les vis indiquees Installer les cartes d extension apres avoir enleve la plaque arriere Veillez a ne pas vous couper les doitgs sur le bord de l ouverture d installation Avant d installer la carte d expansion Wave retirer le panneau arri re Ily a deux emplacements A et B dans lesquels une carte peut tre install e Sp cifier l emplacement utiliser en appuyant sur EXPANSION A ou B sur le panneau avant lors de l utilisation d ondes de tons ou de groupes rythmiques partir des cartes d expansion Wave 18 French language for Canadian Safety Standard Getting Ready Installer les cartes de serie SRX Avant d installer une carte d extension Wave eteindre tous les appareils relies au RD 700SX Detacher la plaque arriere en enlevant les vis indiquees sur le schema suiva
190. atial spread of the sound Low Gain 15 415 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range 136 Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description 101 STEP FLNGR STEP FLANGER High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency The Step Flanger effect is a flanger in which the flanger pitch changes range Positive settings will emphasize a i boost the high frequency range Assignable Parameters Balance D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the MEX Control Step Rate Feedback Balance D0 100W direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the Parameter Value Description direct sound will be output and with a Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the setting of D0 100W only the chorus direct sound begins until the flanger sound will be output sound is heard Level 0 127 Adjust the output level Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the rate of modulation Hz Depth 0 127 Adjust the depth of modulation 1 00 ST FLANGER STE REO FLANGER Feedback 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the flanger This is a stereo flanger The LFO has the same phase for left and sound that is returned fed back into right It produces a metallic reso
191. authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Information EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street ARD El Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 11 Melle St Braamfontein Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 FAX 011 403 1234 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd Royal Cape Park Unit 24 Londonderry Road Ottery 7800 Cape Town SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 799 4900 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090 CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 3 Section Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd GUANGZHOU OFFICE 2 F No 30 Si You Nan Er Jie Yi Xiang Wu Yang Xin Cheng Guangzhou 510600 CHINA TEL 020 8736 0428 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun S
192. back heads Head L Pan Tape Distortion 0 5 Amount of tape dependent distortion to be added This simulates the slight tonal changes that can be detected by signal analysis equipment Increasing this value will increase the distortion W F Rate 0 127 Speed of wow flutter complex variation in pitch caused by tape wear and rotational irregularity W F Depth 0 127 Depth of wow flutter Echo Level 0 127 Volume of the echo sound Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the original sound Level 0 127 Output level 56 LOFI NOISE 126 BYPASS MFX Control Balance Delay In addition to a lo fi effect this adds various types of noise such as Parameter Value Description White noise and cise noise Delay Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is Assignable Parameters Smehronized with the tempo MFX Control Balance Hum Noise Level Disc Noise Level Noise Delay ms 1 2600 ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Level LoFi Type Hz 7 H A note 1 Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Parameter Value Description Delay note LoFi Type 1 9 Degrades the sound quality The sound Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time over which the Delay quality grows poorer as this value is Time changes from the current setting to increased a specified new setting Post Fltr Type OFF LPF Type of filter The rate of change for the Delay Time HPF OFF no filter is used
193. be set You can get the cursor to move more rapidly by holding down MA 4 the CURSOR button that points in the direction you want the VOL PAN REV CHO M P cursor to move while you also press the CURSOR button that 127 SS mn mm mm A D lt xus mn mm me sss points in the opposite direction UuR nlTUMOT 3 Volume Press INC DEC to set the value Pressing INC and DEC simultaneously sets the value to TERNAL_ZONER I OFF TRA LHR UPR URL URU MA 12 QUA FUL 41 127 digg Adjusting the Volume and Pan FUL FUL kes Ranse Lower Volume Pan Aaa 4 Sets the volume and the panning localizes sound image for each of ATK DCY REL COF RES the Tones EE See The Volume setting is mainly used when multiple tones are playing Dl Re to obtain the desired balance in volume between each part Attack Time The Pan setting positions the sound image of each part when the output is in stereo With an increase in the value for L more of the 4 120 ARIAS 4 gt sound will be heard as coming from the left side Similarly more of the sound will originate at the right if the value of R is increased When set to 0 the sound is heard as coming from the center Parameter TX CC Value VOL Volume CC07 OFF 0 127 PAN Pan CC10 L64 0 63R OFF E ando sers Setting the Amount of Reverb and Chorus Reverb Chorus De Fi FZ PB Md This sets the depth of the r
194. between the direct D0 100W sound D and the effect sound W Assignable Parameters Level 0 127 Output level MEX Control Balance Radio Detune Radio Noise Lev LoFi Type Parameter Value Description 61 PCH SHIFTER PITCH SHIFTER LoFi Type 1 9 Degrades the sound quality The sound A stereo pitch shifter quality grows poorer as this value is increased Assignable Parameters Post Fltr Type i Le de us MFX Control Balance Fine Coarse Delay HPF LPF cuts the frequency range above Parameter Value Description the Cutoff Coarse 24 12 semi Adjusts the pitch of the pitch shifted HPF cuts the frequency range below sound in semitone steps the Cutoff Fine 100 100 Adjusts the pitch of the pitch shifted Post F Cutoff 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the Post Filter cent sound in 2 cent steps Radio Detune 0 127 Simulates the tuning noise of a radio As Delay Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is this value is raised the tuning drifts synchronized with the tempo further Delay ms 1 1300 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct Radio Noise 0 127 Volume of the radio noise sound until the pitch shifted sound is Lev heard Hz Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range b note 1 Adjusts the delay time from the direct High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Delay sound until the pitch shifted sound i
195. board The settings are switched to those of the Setup that has been called up MED There are four banks A B C and D Each time you press F2 the bank is switched in the following sequence A B 2CoODoAoJ Using the Convenient Functions in Performances MED Setups indicated by a RHY When the Tone screen is displayed the SETUP indicator lights and the Setup before henares lacteos performing with a session like screen appears when CURSOR d is pressed From the Setup screen you can get back to the Tone screen by pressing CURSOR feel while playing a aia LA However the Tone Wheel screen is displayed if TW Organ 1 10 is selected for any Be sure to check it out Part in the Tone screen Refer to Simulating the Creation of Organ Tones Tone Wheel Mode p 53 Selecting Setups Other Than the Favorite Setups 1 Press SETUP getting the indicator to light 2 Press INC DEC or TONE SELECT buttons to select the Setup to be called up After INC DEC is pressed the following screen appears the Setup screen then reappears after a few moments The screen does not change when the TONE SELECT buttons are used to input Setup numbers Press ENTER afterwards to set the number di OF SETUR RE EE mei RHY R amp EB mae4 RAY Funk RAY POF 2 RHY Rock 1 EEN Registering the Setups You Like Favorite Setups You can also register the Setups you like and use frequently to
196. cation of the overdrive sound L64 is far left 0 is overdrive sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right center and 63R is far right Chorus PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the Delay Time 0 1 500 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard sound is heard Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the modulation speed of the Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the delay Hz chorus effect sound that is fed back into the effect Chorus Depth 0 127 Adjust the modulation depth of the Negative settings will invert the chorus effect phase Chorus Bal D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the Delay HF 200 8000 Hz Adjust the frequency above which D0 100W overdrive sound that is sent through the Damp BYPASS delayed sound fed back to the effect will chorus and the overdrive sound that is be cut If you do not want to cut the high not sent through the chorus With a frequencies of the feedback set this setting of D100 0W only the parameter to BYPASS overdrive sound will be output With a Delay Bal D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the setting of D0 100W only the D0 100W overdrive sound that is sent through the overdrive sound that is sent through the delay and the overdrive sound that is chorus will be output not sent through the delay With a Level 0 127 Adjust the output level set
197. cation of the mic that s BUILT IN SMALL small amp capturing the sound of the speaker 2 STACK BUILT IN single unit type amp This can be adjusted in three steps 3 STACK 2 STACK large double stack amp from 1 to 3 with the mic becoming 3 STACK large triple stack amp more distant as the value increases Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Mic Level 0 127 Volume of the microphone High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the direct sound Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the output sound Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the output Level 0 127 Output Level Level 0 127 Output level 38 VS DIST VS DISTORTION This is a distortion effect that provides heavy distortion The parameters are the same as for 37 V5 OVERDRIVE Specifications of each Speaker Type The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units Type Cabinet Speaker Microphone SMALL 1 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic SMALL 2 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic MIDDLE open back enclosure 12x1 dynamic JC 120 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic 121 Effect Parameter List Type Cabinet Speaker Microphone Parameter Value Description BUILT IN 1 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic Mode GATE Type of gate BUILT IN 2 open back enclosure 12x2 condense
198. celeration 0 15 Adjust the time it takes the high boost the high frequency range frequency rotor to reach the newly Level 0 127 Adjust the output level selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Lower values will require longer times 92 AUTO WAH Lo Acceleration 0 15 Adjust the time it takes the low The Auto Wah cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in frequency rotor to reach the newly timbre selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Assignable Parameters Lower values will require longer times MFX Control Rate Depth Peak Manual High Level 0 127 Adjustthe volume of the high frequency rotor Parameter Value Description Low Level 0 127 Adjust the volume of the low frequency Filter Type LPF BPF Select the type of filter Yotor HE the wah egcebwil be applied Separation 0 127 Adjust the spatial dispersion of the over a wide frequency range sound BPF Th wah effect will beapplied Level 0 127 Adjust the output level over a narrow frequency range Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the frequency of the modulation Hz 94 COMPRESSOR Depth 0 127 Adjust the depth of the modulation The Compressor flattens out high levels and boosts low levels Sens 0 127 Adjust the sensitivity with which the smoothing out unevenness in volume filter is controlled Manual 0 127 Adjust the frequency from which the Assignable Parameters effect is applied MFX Control Pan Level Peak 0 127
199. ch delay sound Right Level 0 127 Volume of each delay sound Center Level 0 127 Volume of each delay sound 144 Reverb Parameter Effect Parameter List These settings allow you to select the desired type of reverb and its Parameter Value Description HF Damp 36 0 dB Adjusts the amount of damping applied to Gain the frequency range selected with HF Damp With a setting of 0 there will be no reduction of the reverb s high characteristics frequency content 0 OFF 3 SRV HALL Reverb is not used This simulates typical concert hall acoustic reflections The parameters are the same as for 2 SRV ROOM 1 REVERB Normal reverb 4 SRV PLATE This simulates a reverb plate a popular type of artificial reverb unit Parameter Value Description 2 that derives its sound from the vibration of a metallic plate Type ROOMI Type of reverb delay E gt ROOM2 ROOM1 short reverb with high density The parameters are the same as for 2 SRV_ROOM STAGE ROOM2 short reverb with low density STAGE2 STAGE 1 reverb with greater late HALLI reverberation 5 GM2 REVE RB HALL2 STAGE2 reverb with strong early GM2 Reverb DELAY reflections PAN HALL1 very clear sounding reverb Parameter Value Description DELAY HALL2 rich reverb Character 0 7 Type of reverb DELAY conventional delay effect 0 5 reverb PAN DELAY delay effect with echoes 6 7 delay that p
200. ch shifter has two Delay ms 1 1300 ms Delay time from the original sound until pitch shifters and can add two pitch shifted sounds to the original the pitch shifted sound is heard Hz Ohd Del b note 1 Delay time from the originalsound until elay the pitch shifted sound is heard note Assignable Parameters Feedback 98 98 Proportion of the pitch shifted sound MFX Control Balance Pch1 Coarse Pch2 Coarse Pch1 Dly Pch2 Dly tharis Rn Re ere to the input negative values invert the phase Parameter Value Description Low Gain 15 15 dB Amount of boost cut for the low Pch1 Coarse 24 12 semi Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift 1 in frequency range semitone steps High Gain 15 15 dB Amount of boost cut for the high Pch1 Fine 100 100 cent Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift Pitch 1 frequency range in 2 cent steps Balance D100 0W Volume balance of the original sound Pch1 Delay ms note When this is set to note the effect is D0 100W D and pitch shifted sound W Mode synchronized with the tempo Level 0 127 Output volume Pch1 Dly ms 1 1300 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the Pitch Shift 1 sound is s 64 REVERB GC Pchi Delay note 1 Adjusts the delay time from the direct Adds reverberation to the sound simulating an acoustic space b sound until the Pitch Shift 1 sound is heard note Assignable Parameters Pch1 Feedback 98 98 96 Adjusts the proportion of the pitch MFX Control Time Ty
201. compressor 6 Press CURSOR yr P 1 to switch screens and press CURSOR 44 W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set With certain parameters pressing F2 L M H selects the low frequency range midrange or high frequency range 7 Press INC DEC to set the value 8 If you want to save this settings press F1 WRITE The settings are written to Sound Control Type USER 9 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Settings saved in the RD 700SX are not deleted even when the power is turned off Selecting the Type of Compressor Sound Control Type When you change the this parameter the Sound Control parameters will be automatically adjusted to the optimal values You can make the settings easily by first setting the Sound Control Type and then changing only the necessary parameters Parameter Value Description Type HARD COMP Applies strong compression Sound SOFT COMP Applies mild compression Control Type LOW BOOST Boosts the low end MID BOOST Boosts the midrange HI BOOST Boosts the high end USER The saved settings are written Detailed Settings of Compressor Parameter Value Description Split Freq L 200 250 315 400 This sets the frequency 500 630 800 Hz separating the low frequency range Lo and midrange MI
202. creen is displayed switches the RD 700SX to this screen You can change Song Rhythm patterns Arpeggio patterns and the tempo Pressing CURSOR 4 when this screen is displayed returns you to the Tone screen 4 120 RHY ARP EXTERNAL Screen When EXTERNAL INTERNAL is pressed the button s indicator lights up and the RD 700SX switches to the mode enabling it to control an external MIDI sound generator The status of this button determines whether the RD 700SX s buttons are used to control the INTERNAL Zone EXTERNAL INTERNAL unlit or to control the EXTERNAL Zone EXTERNAL INTERNAL lit In addition you can make detailed settings for the MIDI messages to be transmitted to the external sound generator p 61 4 120 AREA OUT Ch MSB LSE PC 1 957 064 001 2 CMIDI OUT Port Special Indications A mark is displayed to the right of the tone name when you select an 88 key multisampled piano tone in the Tone screen m A mark is displayed to the left of the tone name when you select TW Organ 1 10 in the Tone screen Pressing CURSOR 4 while this mark is displayed brings up the Tone Wheel screen p 53 H With Clock Source p 81 set to MIDI the tempo indication changes to M for each screen The tempo can be changed with the external MIDI devices when this mark is indicated En With EQ Mode p 80 set to SYSTEM this mark appears upper right on the screen Equalizer settings do no
203. ction that provides for the play of music and visual material By using V LINK compatible video equipment visual effects can be easily linked to and made part of the expressive elements of a performance Examples By using the RD 700SX and Edirol DV 7PR together you can Make Edirol DV 7PR playback settings remotely from the RD 700SX Use the RD 700SX s keyboard to switch the Edirol DV 7PR s images clips palettes Ju order to use V LINK with the RD 700SX and Edirol DV 7PR you will need to make connections using an USB MIDI Interface sold separately Connection Examples Use a USB MIDI Interface cable to connect the RD 700SX s MIDI OUT connector to the DV 7PR s remote jack ET Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices RD 700SX soc TB TT p 0 pueioy Ee mom noma RD 7 005 a P re ege ss DOGO W y MIDIOUT USB MIDI interface cable A REMOTE 0000000 0000 Ea Edirol DV 7PR Projector Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Turning the V Link ON OFF Press V LINK so the indicator is lighted V LINK will light and the V Link setting will be on In this state you can operate the keyboard to manipula
204. ctory Reset press EXIT Press ENTER once again to start the Factory Reset operation During the execution Executing Don t Power OFF appears in the display After the Factory Reset operation is finished the ONE TOUCH screen will appear Turn off the power to the RD 700SX then turn it on again You can also restore only part of the setting to their factory status Refer to Restoring the settings to the factory condition Factory Reset p 100 Adjusting the Display Contrast LCD Contrast The characters in the display may be difficult to view immediately after turning on the power or after extended use this may also be because of where and how the display is situated In such instances adjust the display contrast by turning the CONTRAST knob on the front panel O ZX TI 58850 OO EXIT TONE INFO ZONE INFO ENTER 26 Getting Ready Tuning to Other Instruments Pitches Master Tune For a cleaner ensemble sound while performing with one or more other instruments ensure that each instrument s basic pitch is in tune with that of the other instruments In general the tuning of an instrument is indicated by the pitch in Hertz Hz of the middle A note This matching of other instruments basic reference pitches is called tuning ONE TOUCH ZONE SELECT MEN FUNCTION O LOWERT UPPER1 O ON OFF 0 DO D CITE
205. cursor to the parameter to be set 6 Press INC DEC to set the value 7 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Making the rhythm Settings The RD 700SX features internal drum patterns complementing Jazz Rock and other various musical genres This kind of drum pattern is called a Rhythm For more about switching Rhythms on and off refer to Playing Rhythm RHYTHM SONG p 48 Adjusting the Tempo Tempo Specify the tempo of the Rhythm NOTE The RD 700SX has only one tempo setting Once you change the setting the tempo indicated in the Tone screen and the tempo setting for the arpeggiator p 47 both change Parameter Value Tempo 10 250 The way Rhythm is played and the tempo display may differ with some Rhythm Patterns With Clock Source p 81 set to MIDI M appears in the display and the RD 700SX is synchronized to the tempo of the external MIDI device The tempo cannot be changed with the RD 700SX when M is indicated Adjusting the Volume Rhythm Volume Adjusts the volume of the rhythm Parameter Value Volume 0 127 Changing Patterns Rhythm Pattern This selects the rhythm pattern Select from 185 options Parameter Value Patrn Refer to Rhythm Pattern List p 153 You can also change
206. cy 0 127 Frequency response of the playback Pre Filter Type 1 6 Selects the type of filter applied to the Range system sound before it passes through the Lo Fi Decreasing this value will produce the effect impression of an old system with a LoFi Type 1 9 Degrades the sound quality The sound poor frequency response quality grows poorer as this value is Disc Type LP EP SP Rotational speed of the turntable increased This will affect the frequency of the Post Fltr Type OFF Type of filter scratch noise LPF OFF no filter is used ScratchNoise 0 127 Amount of noise due to scratches on HPF LPF cuts the frequency range above Lev the record the Cutoff Dust Noise Lev 0 127 Volume of noise due to dust on the HPF cuts the frequency range below record the Cutoff Hiss Noise Lev 0 127 Volume of continuous hiss Post F Cutoff 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the Post Filter Total Noise Lev 0 127 Volume of overall noise Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Wow 0 127 Depth of long cycle rotational High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range irregularity Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct Flutter 0 127 Depth of short cycle rotational D0 100W sound D and the effect sound W irregularity Level 0 127 Output level Random 0 127 Depth of indefinite cycle rotational irregularity 5 8 LOFI RADIO Total W F 0 127 B rotational In addition to a Lo Fi effect this effect also generates radio noise Balance D100 0W Volume balance
207. d LED OM LED OFF Press CURSOR 4 Y wl 4 Y gt to move the cursor to the parameter for changing the Feet LED ON and LED OFF in the screen indicate whether ZONE SWITCH is switched on or off Parameter Value UP1 16 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 2 1 3 5 1 1 3 1 UP2 LW1 LW2 Press INC DEC to select the Feet When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Disabling the Button Panel Lock Once Panel Lock is engaged all buttons except for the VOLUME slider CONTRAST knob Pitch Bend Modulation lever Pedal ONE TOUCH PIANO ONE TOUCH E PIANO and EXIT will not function This prevents settings from being changed inadvertently on stage or in other such situations While holding down EDIT press ENTER Following display will appear 4 128 TONE Ak Wa panel is Locked G Press EXIT m Press ONE TOUCH PIANO or EXIT to cancel Panel Lock 55 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Selecting Stored Settings SETUP The RD 7005X s INTERNAL ZONE p 28 and EXTERNAL ZONE p 28 tone settings effect settings and other such settings are collectively referred to as a Setup Once you ve stored your preferred settings and settings for the songs to be performed as a Setup you can then switch whole groups of settings during a performance just by
208. d not sent through the chorus With a will be output With a setting of setting of D100 0W only the enhancer D0 100W only the enhancer sound sound will be output With a setting of that is sent through the delay will be D0 100W only the enhancer sound output that is sent through the chorus will be Level 0 127 Adjust the output level output Level 0 127 Adjust the output level 118 ENH gt FLANGR ENHANCER gt CHORUS 120 CHO gt DELAY CHORUS gt DELAY This effect connects a chorus and a delay unit in series Assignable Parameters This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in series MEX Control Chorus Bal Delay Bal Assignable Parameters Parameter Value Description MEX Control Fingr Bal Fingr Rate Enhancer Sens Chorus PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus Parameter Value Description sound is heard Enhancer Sens 0 127 Adjust the sensitivity of the enhancer Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the modulation speed of the Enhancer Mix 0 127 Adjust the ratio with which the Hz chorus effect overtones generated by the enhancer Chorus Depth 0 127 Adjust the modulation depth of the are combined with the direct sound chorus effect Flngr PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the Chorus Bal D100 0W Adjust t
209. d Range will change 00H 01H mmH IH Channel Fine Tuning mm Il 20 00H 40 00H 60 00H 4096 x 100 8192 0 4096 x 100 8192 cent The Fine Tune parameter Tone Info Fine Tune will change 00H 02H mmH IH Channel Coarse Tuning mm 10H 40H 70H 48 0 48 semitones Il ignored processed as 00H The Coarse Tune parameter Tone Info Coarse Tune will change 00H 05H mmH Un Modulation Depth Range mm Il 00 00H 06 00H 0 16384 600 16384 cent RPN null RPN and NRPN will be set as unspecified Once this setting has been made subsequent Parameter values that 7FH 7FH Tr were previously set will not change mm 11 ignored e Program Change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 pp Program number 00H 7FH prog 1 prog 128 Not received when the Rx Program Change parameter EDIT Part Parameter Rx Program Chanage is OFF 157 MIDI Implementation Pitch Bend Change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte EnH 1H mmH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll Pitch Bend value 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 8192 0 8191 Notreceived when the Rx Bender parameter EDIT Part Parameter Rx Bender is OFF Channel Mode Messages AII Sounds Off Controller number 120 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 78H 00H n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 When this message is received all notes currently sounding on the corresponding cha
210. d buttons A B indicates that you are to hold down A and press B What to do Operation Page Switching Arpeggio Hold On and Off ARPEGGIO CONTROL ZONE LEVEL p 96 Selecting Zone to Play Arpeggios ARPEGGIO ZONE SWITCH p 96 Changing Transpose setting TRANSPOSE Key p 42 Changing the Keyboard s Split Point SPLIT Key p 39 Panel Lock EDIT ENTER p 55 Changing the MFX2 Source MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF ZONE SWITCH p 86 Setting the Reverb Chorus Amount for each Part ZONE SWITCH REVERB or CHORUS knob p 71 You can easily call up Edit screens for related parameters for the following functions by holding down SHIFT while pressing buttons turning knobs or operating other controllers Example Edit Effects Reverb Type indicates the Effects Reverb Type parameter in Edit screen What to do Operation Page Page Switching the Damper Pedal s On Off SHIFT Damper Pedal Zone Info Damper Pedal Switch p 70 Assigning Functions to Pedals SHIFT FC1 2 Edit Control FC1 FC2 p 85 Setting the V Link SHIFT V LINK Edit V Link p 97 Setting the Sound Control SHIFT SOUND CONTROL Edit Sound Control p 88 Selecting the Chorus Delay Type SHIFT CHORUS DELAY Edit Effects Chorus Type p 88 Setting the Chorus Amount 1 SHIFT CHORUS Knob Tone Info Chorus Amount p 71 Selecting the Reverb T
211. d is heard Time 5 500 ms Adjust the time from when the reverb is heard until when it disappears Low Gain 15 15dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the D0 100W direct sound and the reverb sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the reverb sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjust the output level Effect Parameter List 111 OVDRV CHO OVERDRIVE gt CHORUS This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in series 113 OVDRV gt DLY OVERDRIVE gt DELAY This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in series Assignable Parameters Assignable Parameters MEX Control Chorus Bal Chorus Rate OD Drive MFX Control Delay Bal OD Drive Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description OD Drive 0 127 Adjust the degree of overdrive OD Drive 0 127 Adjust the degree of overdrive distortion The volume will change distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion together with the degree of distortion OD Pan L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the OD Pan L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo lo
212. d power cord to the RD 700SX and plug the other end into an AC power outlet Connect the RD 700SX and the external device Use audio cables to connect audio equipment such as an amp or speakers Use MIDI cables to connect MIDI devices Use USB cables to connect computer If you are using headphones plug them into the PHONES jack Connect pedal switches or expression pedals as necessary Connecting Pedals 22 Connect the pedal included with the RD 700SX to one of the PEDAL jacks When connected to the DAMPER jack the pedal can be used as a damper pedal Connecting the pedal to the FC 1 or FC 2 jack allows you to assign a variety of functions to the pedal p 70 p 85 About the Output Jacks This instrument is equipped with balanced XLR type jacks Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below Make connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of other equipment you intend to connect COLD NOTE Use Stereo headphones NOTE Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 7 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedal you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit NOTE Set the switch on the included pedal to Continuous when the pedal is connected Turning the Power On and Off Once the connections have been completed turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage
213. de 106 Switching USB Drivers i u au aqu nr tete ree ee etienne entire P ronne tasses 106 APPendIC OS uuu nue sense state certe 100 Troubleshootinigs srss M 108 Error Messages Other Messages 111 Error Messages ua qaa a as ede eed ie eee E EE ete 111 Other M sSag S 111 Etfect Parameter LISIS AA A anao qus tti aa 112 Multi Effects Parameter s a nn diamant henri 112 Chorus Parameter se co chain hate teo np aane aquse t ume TAL 144 Reverb Paftam elter gaya sa essaie tingere teo n al Da EE 145 jog E 146 EhyihmsSet Listed dd dante EE ee EE a a etus 149 Arpegglo Style Lituano nica deca det ao a aT nn rte 152 Rhythm Pattern LISE uyaykuy aasawa kaaman cade cen eie at tun ama de 153 Setup Pista o aaa aaa Qha massa nr mn ete aea inen os e peines 154 EE E 155 MIDE Implementation senec ire mise ec iter I n det d desereret i LH RR acia 156 Main Specifications uu n t peas qain aste tert entend derer quie t perte nn 172 Indexer taie ect nh aasawa aaa ee 173 P rpose Oriented Index ee deeem deerit ne ieget ree tpe trie eee ets 178 Volume SEINE ii Ne tame Oh ave entente RO ge etai delete edente 178 Key To ch and Velocity au taa dat ai akanayaq aa teet des 178 Equalizer ee eee de eedem tei tiui de cel eter E 178 Pitch and Tuning er eere cd t ee i derit tetendit 178 Effects Reverb Chorus Multi Effects sn 178 Control A vs ede ka uk s id 178 Key Ranganna as A inde
214. de output of the audio signals These are connected to an amp or other device For monaural output use the L MONO jack p 21 8 BALANCED OUT L R Jacks Connectors for balanced output of the audio signals Connect to mixers and other such gear p 21 9 PHONES Jack A set of headphones can be connected to this jack p 21 Even when headphones are connected sound will still be output from the OUTPUT jacks 14 Getting Ready Installing the Wave Expansion Board Up to two optional Wave Expansion Boards SRX Series can be installed in the RD 700SX Wave Expansion Boards store Wave data Patches and Rhythm Sets and by equipping the RD 700SX with these boards you can greatly expand your sound palette For more information about the wave expansion board tones refer to the patch list included with the wave expansion board However some of the tone names may be displayed differently on the RD 700SX Check 36page as you refer to the tone names Cautions When Installing an Wave Expansion Board To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be caused by static electricity please carefully observe the following whenever you handle the board Before you touch the board always first grasp a metal object such as a water pipe so you are sure that any static electricity you might have been carrying has been discharged When handling the board grasp it only by its edges Avoid touching any of the electron
215. device the Universal Non realtime messages and the Universal Realtime messages and the Data Request RO1 messages and the Data Set DT1 messages will be set automatically Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Messages Oldentity Request Message Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH dev 06H 01H F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message dev Device ID dev 10H 1FH 1 32 the initial value is 10H 17 06H Sub ID 1 General Information 01H Sub ID 2 Identity Request F7H EOX End Of Exclusive When this message is received Identity Reply message p 163 will be transmitted OGM1 System On Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 7FH 09H 01H F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH D number Universal Non realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 01H Sub ID 2 General MIDI 1 On F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Not received when the Rx GM GM2 System On parameter EDIT System Rx GM GM2 System ON is OFF MIDI Implementation OGM2 System On Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 7FH 09H 03H F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 03H Sub ID 2 General MIDI 2 On F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Not received when the Rx GM GM2 System On parameter EDIT System Rx GM GM2 System ON is OFF OGM System O
216. dh filter d j This is an equalizer which cuts the volume greatly allowing you to LPF Frequencies below the cutoff add a special effect to the sound by cutting the volume in varying pb requencies in the region of the cuto anges HPF Frequencies above the cutoff NOTCH Frequencies other than the Assignable Parameters region of the cutoff MEX Control Boost Cut Low Boost Cut Mid Boost Cut High Filter Slope 12 24 36 Amount of attenuation per octave Parameter Value Description dB 36 dB Extremely steep Boost Cut Low 60 4 dB These boost and cut each of the High 24 dB Steep Boost Cut Mid Middle and Low frequency ranges 12 dB Gentle Boost Cut At 60 dB the sound becomes inaudible Filter Cutoff 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the filter High 0 dB is equivalent to the input level of Increasing this value will raise the cutoff the sound frequency Filter 0 127 Filter resonance level Resonance Increasing this value will emphasize the region near the cutoff frequency Filter Gain 0 412 dB Amount of boost for the filter output 112 Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description 07 ENHANCER Modulation Sw OFF ON On off switch for cyclic change Controls the overtone struc
217. diately turn the power off remove the The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or f smoke or unusual odor occurs Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto the unit or The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise has become wet or The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through Do not force the unit s power supply cord to S Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the circuit Z board SRX Series p 15 DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a S level that could cause per
218. dis ei 92 EXPANSION buttons 13 EXTERNAL INTERNAL 12 61 65 F Pelea kau hate A u u u anie 67 FICTone Into uyay neret 70 F1 FC1 Pedal Switch External Zone et aedes 67 Zone MO adios 70 E2 Zone Info ii ette 68 F2 FC2 Pedal Switch External Zone rason ned dts 67 Zone Info uu aaa yaa ar endis ds 70 Factory Reset EEN 25 100 Favorite Setups sse 57 FCT xti eee it eoa eei eds 80 85 Polatity Zeg ta neral OR 81 TCO eno reto ce ev NON ne A 80 85 Elauter Ru EROR 81 Fleet anto Se dt an ib 53 54 File Delete sise ee ates 91 File Utility USB tette eme 89 Fine Tune External Zone tei et aedes 67 Tone Info EE 7 EXE eegene e se Bose 2 cost IU 68 EXD nt pui rr a EET I wands 68 H EIE aee ee ei ana EE 92 Harmonie Bat i 54 EH GEI knob 5 2 13 5 n eth e 12 l Initialize Piano Edit sss 76 K Key Range P wqe p 96 External Zone ss 66 NUS BI dec 98 Zone INO EE 69 Key Range Lower External Zone ne e ta a Mi 66 Zone O uunc etie tese O ar 69 Key Range Upper External Zone 5 enel ai SE 66 Zone Info s adde ed de deerat oc eR das 69 Key Touch i ete eem eere 83 Beleeger rt E tisse itae se teens 83 Pano Editada 74 Key Touch Offset Edi als 83 Piano Editando 75 L A rene u et ung 74 Load SETUP Ple carnada aaa 90 Local ONO ais ote da ht ens 98 Local Swatch tede eere ee is 101 1
219. dt 62 Selecting Sounds on an External MIDI Device 63 Adjusting the Volume of Each Zone EXTERNAL ZONE 64 Detailed Settings for Transmitted Parts EXTERNAL ins 65 How to Make Settings tne eene eet n ir dee n e te dee nete 65 Adjusting the Volume and Pan Volume Pan 65 Setting the Amount of Reverb and Chorus Reverb Chorus sss 65 Playing Sound Monophonically Mono Poly ss 66 Setting the Transposition for Each Individual Zone Transpose sss 66 Setting the Key Range Key Range Lower Upper ss 66 Changing the Range That Plays in Response to the Velocity Velocity Range Lower Upper ss 66 Changing Tone Elements ATK DCY REL COF REBS eee nnn 66 Smoothly Changing the Pitch Portamento ss 67 Setting the Change in Volume According to the Force Used to Play the Keyboard Velocity Sensitivity Max seen 67 Changing the Pitch Coarse Tune Fine Tune 67 Setting the Range for the Change in Pitch with the Bender Bend Range 67 Setting the Amount of Modulation Applied Modulation Depth 67 Turning Each Controller On and Off sens 67 Transmitting the Control Change USER CC USER CC Value 67 Making Detailed Settings for Tones 68 Making Zone Settings Zone Info tete ree id e a eerie rere fears 68 How ito Make Se
220. e ue eie RR EFIE Rug 92 Ae EE NM 65 68 Volume External Zone ii aee ben 65 Master Re ORE PRG ODER HE EET 80 Master Volumes 24 Part Paramete essent 92 A hng ides 93 Zone Info E 68 VOLUME Slider 12 XRLE uses EE 66 69 NM RIG siia spi ada 66 69 W Wave Expansion Board 15 35 WRITE 5 itte eR den 13 30 58 Re EE 58 Z VoM dde li Soa 28 ZONE LEVEL Slider eee 41 External Zone ss 64 ZONE LEVEL Slider mii E 12 ZONE SELECT io E fec Liso 13 ZONESWIECEL 5 au y di 12 41 External Zone us 64 177 Purpose Oriented Index This index lists the main setting items relevant to play of the RD 700 s keyboard EDIT aaa bbb indicates the bbb parameter in Edit screen aaa Volume Setting Changing the Volume for the entire RD 700SX VOLUME Slider p 24 EDIT 0 System Master Volume p 80 Changing the volume for Individual Zone PE ZONE LEVEL Slider p 41 nne e e Zone Info Volume p 68 Changing the volume for each Internal Part Tm EDIT 6 Part Parameter Volume p 92 Key Touch and Velocity Changing the key touch EDIT 1 Key Touch p 83 Changing the value of velocity for each INTERNAL Zone E ato Zone Info Velocity Sens p 69 Zone Info Ve
221. e p 105 If you want to save the changed settings of a system parameter memorize settings by pressing F1 WRITE then save an setup file 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU amp Part Parameter T Rhathm Rnnresasio S U Link 9 Utility 2 Press CURSOR 44 J W to select 5 File Utility USB then press ENTER The Edit screen appears EDIT File Ut1 USE SETUP File SETUP File Delete 3 USB Setting 4 USB Storage 3 Press CURSOR 44 J W to select 0 SAVE SETUP File then press ENTER The following screen appears 89 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT EDITCSave SETUP File CBETUP File DELETE INSERT Press CURSOR d V b to move the cursor to the positions where the characters are to be input 5 Press INC DEC to enter the characters Names can consist of up to 16 characters The following characters are available space amp 0 9 9 A Z When F2 is pressed a single character blank space is inserted a z pressing F1 deletes one character Repeat steps 4 5 to input the name When you have finished determining the name for the new Setup file press ENTER The setup files are saved in memory NOTE Saving appears in the display while the save is in progress Be sure never to turn off the power If a file with the same name has already b
222. e Description Delay L Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Delay L ms 1 1300 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is heard Hz b note 1 Adjusts the time until the delay sound is Delay L heard note Delay R Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Delay R ms 1 1300 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is heard Hz b note 1 Adjusts the time until the delay sound is Delay R heard note Phase Left NORMAL Phase of the delay sound Phase Right INVERSE Feedback Mode NORMAL Selects the way in which delay sound is CROSS fed back into the effect See the figures above Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which BYPASS sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct D0 100W sound D and the delay sound W Level 0 127 Output level 44 LONG DELAY A delay that provides a long delay time Assignable Parameters MFX Control Balance Delay Pan Parameter Value Description Delay Mode m
223. e d extension Wave installee dans le creneau SRX A CON CINE CO Mettre sous tension de la facon decrite sous Turning On the Power p 23 Le nom de la carte d expansion Wave install e s affiche tant que la touche EXPANSION A ou B est tenue enfonc e Le nombre de tonalit s et de groupes rythmiques compris sur la carte d expansion s affiche L exemple montre ce qui serait affiche si la carte d extension audio SRX 02 Concert Piano etait installee dans la fente SRX A ExFarnziaon Board Info R 3RA5s zConcertPnao Tane 58 RAYA Rhythm Lorsque vous le relacherez vous serez ramene a l ecran precedent IS Selecting Wave Expansion Board Tones p 35 Si est affiche a cote du nom de la fente dans laquelle la carte est installee il est possible que la carte d extension audio installee ne soit pas reconnue correctement Mettre hors tension de la facon decrite sous Turning Off the Power p 24 et reinstaller correctement la carte d extension audio Getting Ready Connecting the RD 700SX to External Equipment The RD 700SX is not equipped with an amplifier or speakers In order to produce Nove sound you need to hook up audio equipment such as a monitor speaker or a stereo To prevent malfunction and set or us
224. e effect Negative settings will invert the phase Delay HF 200 8000Hz Adjusts the frequency above which Damp BYPASS sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Bal D100 0W Adjusts the volumebalancebetween the D0 100W sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output Level 69 DIST gt CHORUS DISTORTION CHORUS The parameters are essentially the same as in 66 OVERDRIVE CHORUS with the exception of the following two Overdrive Drive gt Distortion Drive Overdrive Pan Distortion Pan 70 DISTCFLANGR DISTORTION FLANGER The parameters are essentially the same as in 67 OVERDRIVE FLANGER with the exception of the following two Overdrive Drive Distortion Drive Overdrive Pan Distortion Pan 129 Effect Parameter List 71 DIST gt DELAY DISTORTION DELAY The parameters are essentially the same as in 68 OVERDRIVE gt DELAY with the exception of the following two Overdrive Drive Distortion Drive Overdrive Pan Distortion Pan 72 ENH gt CHORUS ENHANCER CHORUS This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in series Assignable Parameters MFX Control Chorus Bal Chorus Depth Cho Rate Enhancer Sens Parameter Value Description EnhancerSens 0 127 Sensitivity of the en
225. e effect sound is heard Negative settings will invert the Flngr Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is phase synchronized with the tempo Fingr Bal D100 0W Adjusts the volume balance between the Fln Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz D0 100W sound that is sent through the flanger Hz W and the sound that is not sent D note 1 Frequency of modulation note through the flanger D Fin Rate 2 Level 0 127 Output Level Flngr Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Flngr Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect 7 8 SYM RESONCE SYMPATH ETIC Negative settings will invert the RESON ANC E phase On an acoustic piano holding down the damper pedal allows other Hing Bal DONS Volume balance between the direct strings to resonate in sympathy with the notes you play creating rich D0 100W sound D and the flanger sound W 8 pata TOU pay Delay Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is and spacious resonances This effect simulates these sympathetic synchronized with the tempo resonances Delay ms 1 2600 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Assignable Parameters Hz MFX Control Depth Damper P Sft Amount P Sft Level pay Dy ECT Mes parameter Vae Desoto note y Depth 0 10 Depth of the effect Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay Damper Ge Peur EE sound tha
226. e force is used to play the keys As the value is increased the timing of the sound is delayed more Press ENTER to display the Edit screen when less force is used to play the keys EDIT Control Parameter Value Velo Delay Sens 63 63 ctrl Knob Changing the Touch Sensitivity According to the Key Range E EE i Slider Assign Velocity Keyfollow Sens Ul SEDIT This setting changes the touch sensitivity according to the key range LH1 CC 1 LW2 CC74 being used As the value is increased the touch becomes heavier in the upper EDIT CHarmonic Bari LED ON LED OFF registers and lighter in the lower keys Parameter Value Velo Keyfolw Sens 63 63 4 Press CURSOR 4 VI b to switch screens and press CURSOR 44 W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC DEC to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen For more on the following parameters refer to the corresponding pages Harmonic Bar p 54 Assigning Functions to Pedals FC1 FC2 Pedal Assign This setting determines the function of the pedal switches or expression pedals such as the optional EV series that are connected to the FC1 and FC2 jacks on the rear panel Parameter Value Function Parameter Setting Chan
227. e headphones or damage to speakers or other Audio cables MIDI cables USB cables headphones and expression pedals are not included devices always turn down the Consult your Roland dealer if you need to purchase accessories such as these volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections MID eer OUTPUT eee BALANCED OUT SO OUTT y A LIMONO R L 06 999 00 3 COLD Q HOT 8 E z E E EXPANSION e e sa de PHONES AB to Power outlet Computer Expression pedal EV 5 7 Pedal switch or Pedal switch DP 2 8 DP 2 8 Stereo headphones L E joo oo aoe le 5 MIDI IN Cu m 4 MIDI OUT debo d 0 0 0 0 0 0 001 Eu fmm Jm 000 ooo oojojojojojojo ooo Monitor speakers M Tt powered Mixer etc MIDI sequencer etc Power amp MIDI sound module etc V LINK compatible video equipment nona HEH 21 Getting Ready Before you begin making connections confirm the following Is the volume level of the RD 700SX or connected amp turned all the way down Is the power to the RD 700SX or connected amp turned off Connect supplie
228. e inpolg bx O O Dags yueg P O be O OO Vx S O v x V9 A UB X O e lod ouon SPON pezuoweyy SIE SIE del del 00 UOISI8 A eys uonejueurejduJ AIN POOS AON op LZ 04 69 89 29 99 S9 v9 61 8L ZE EI LL OL 8 Z 8 9 S v 2 L Bueuo 01U09 ce 0 pueg uolld sJeuueu9 S As HO SON Ay90 8A UO SION 89I0A NL JequinN eJON pala y soDesso N ynejeq paBuey I uueuo ynejeq oiseg uonounJ XS004Z Qu IPPON OUBId eubiq 170 MIDI Implementation x ON X ONON 110 INNO y SPO A10d 110 INO SPON S9A O ONON NO INWO 9poIN ATOd NO INNO L apo peuBisse aie seDesseui sou ueuw olluoO XJ 10 Z LOJ q S8AI8981 pue syuisuelJ G luo 8PON IND y peAreoe LOY JO peinoexe SI JeJsueJ eye ueuM syusuel LAN USAS L Se peziufooeu Z eigejojes s X O SION josay uu91s S Buisuas eAnoy JO SeION IV sabessan HO UO 18901 xny Si llonuoo IV So JO punos WV ZZL 21L XXXXOX ZZL 931 OZL spueuuuuoo su esy q901 uajs s O x OOXOOX OO 1senbex eun Delage Buos uonisog Buos UOUJUJO waj s s OAISNI9XT Ule1s S co O 8z ON we1Boiq Z l 0 AURA ER ARR 4equnwN ent bueyo Le O O weiBoid X O Ze1 0 gS 8S1 Nd O O LOL O0 gS JSI NdHN X O 66 86 041002 XdN O O S6 LE 1 Z 19 lo11uooO 1004 O O S6
229. e reverb sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 66 OVDRV gt CHO OVERDRIVE CHORUS This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in series Assignable Parameters MEX Control Chorus Bal Cho Rate Chorus Depth Overdrive Drive Parameter Value Description Overdrive 0 127 Degree of distortion Drive Also changes the volume Overdrive Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Chorus PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Cho Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz Hz Cho Rate note 1 Frequency of modulation note D Chorus Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Chorus Bal D100 0W Adjusts the volume balance between the D0 100W sound that is sent through the chorus W and the sound that is not sent through the chorus D Level 0 127 Output Level 67 OVDRV gt FLNGR OVERDRIVE gt FLANGER This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in series Assignable Parameters MEX Control Fingr Bal Fln Rate Fingr Depth Fingr Feedback Overdrive Drive Parameter Value Description Overdrive 0 127 Degree of distortion Drive Also changes the volume Overdrive Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Flngr PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from whe
230. e same time and even have different tones played in the left and right parts of the keyboard Performing with Layered Tones You can perform with up to four layered tones applied to the entire keyboard UPPER1 UPPER2 EQUALIZER EFFECTS ONE TOUCH ZONE SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION HIGH O LOWER 1 UPPER O en e d oun urrenz o D EDI um Lock y y y lt REVERS CHORUS DELAY D MULTI EFFECTS soon CHORUS O DELAY r ry ORGAN STRINGS PAD BASS WINDS YET mM GM2 T T U y T T CONTROL CCOO n i CO E s 7 s Press PART SWITCH UPPER1 and UPPER2 getting the indicators to light Try fingering the keyboard Superior Brd UPS 093 SX Strings 1 The Tones for UPPER1 and UPPER are layered and played Press UPPER2 once more and the indicator light goes out The Tones for UPPERI played Likewise pressing LOWER 1 and LOWER 2 lets you then layer four tones Performing with the Keyboard Pressing Two TONE SELECT buttons Simultaneously Keep NUM LOCK off when carrying out this operation Even without pressing the ZONE SWITCH buttons you can layer two tones by pressing two TONE SELECT buttons simultaneously F
231. e this procedure to save the data to an external MIDI device in situations such as when you want to perform by connecting another RD 700SX with the same settings or to prevent your Setups and system settings from corruption 1 Usea MIDI cable optional to connect the RD 700SX s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector on an external sequencer 2 Press EDIT getting its indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU S File Utility USB 6 Part Parameter T Rhathm Rn ressio S U Link 9 Utility 3 Press CURSOR w to select 9 Utility 4 Press ENTER to display the Edit screen EDIT Utility O Rec Setting 4 Factors Reset All 5 Press CURSOR 44 W to select 1 Bulk Dump Temporary or 2 Bulk Dump SETUP Parameter Value Bulk Dump Temporary The contents of the currently selected Setup are transmitted Bulk Dump SETUP The contents of Setups in the specified range are transmitted Bulk Dump Temporary 6 Press CURSOR b A screen like the one shown below appears Bulk Dumr Temporary Temporary SETUP is CRD SETUP Send Ok 7 Put the external sequencer in record mode 8 Press ENTER to transmit the settings To cancel the Bulk Dump press DEC The message Now Executing appears in the display during transmission of the data 9 After the transmitting is finished the display will indicate COMPLETE
232. eReserve 64 o EDIT Part Param lt Part gt Part 1 UPPER1 Part Switch ON MFX Switch ON BS PC Md PB YI Hi Pr Ex ra 021 04 021 021 Ig 0 0 Rx Bank Select 4 Press CURSOR 44 J W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC DEC to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen 91 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Selecting the Part to Be Set Part Tone Choose the Part for which you want to make settings Parameter Value Part 1 16 Parts assigned to the INTERNAL Zone are indicated by a marker UPPER1 appearing after the part name Tone When the Part to be set is selected the name of the assigned tone appears You can select tone using the TONE SELECT buttons For more on the Tone refer to Tone List p 146 Setting the Receive Channel Receive Channel When using MIDI messages from an external MIDI device to play the RD 700SX set the Receive channels for each of the RD 700SX s parts so they re matched up with the channels that ll be used for transmission by the external MIDI device Parameter Value Voice 0 64 Reserve The figure in parentheses before the settings value shows the remaining number of voices that can be set It is not possible for the settings of all Parameter Value Receive Channel 1 16
233. ect While the Tone Wheel screen is displayed you can change the undulation rate of the Rotary effect with the Pitch Bend lever The Rotary effect is an effect that recreates the sound of the rotating speakers used to augment the sound of an organ The Rotary effect is set to alternately rotate more rapidly or slowly when the Pitch Bend lever is moved to the left and right the direction is not fixed Changing the ZONE LEVEL Slider Feet Assignments Harmonic Bar You can change the Feet assigned to each of the ZONE LEVEL sliders used in Tone Wheel mode Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU A SYS tem LI Ke Touch Z Control X Effectz 4 5ound Control T Press CURSOR amp J w to select 2 Control Press ENTER to display the Edit screen 54 NOTE The Percussion is applied only to the UPPER Tone Nore When percussion is on the 1 pitch will not be produced p 53 MED The settings changed here are stored to each Tone Even when you exit from Tone Wheel mode you can press ORGAN to select the Tone With the changed settings MED This Pitch Bend Lever setting is effective only in the Tone Wheel screen Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Press CURSOR 4 HI b to select Harmonic Bar Feet Assignments in the Tone Wheel Screen BELL NL MEL 16 51 3 8 4 22 3 2 135113 1 EDIT LHarmonic Barl
234. ed to a computer via USB Do not use the computer to create RD 700SX folders Do not use the computer for operations on the RD 700SX including formatting the RD 700SX s User memory optimizing scanning the disk etc The RD 700SX can only handle file names that consist of single byte alphanumeric characters Only the following types of files can be exchanged between the RD 700SX and computers Standard MIDI Files MID is used as the extension SETUP Files RDS is used as the extension Exchanging Files Windows Me 2000 XP Users 1 In My Computer double click the removable hard disk icon The files saved in the RD 700SX s memory are displayed Macintosh Users 1 Double click the RD 700SX drive icon The files saved in the RD 700SX s memory are displayed Exiting Storage Mode Windows Me 2000 XP Users 1 In My Computer right click the removable hard disk icon and execute Remove Macintosh Users 1 Drag the RD 700SX drive icon into the trash 105 Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode Canceling USB Communication If you want to power off the RD 700SX when it is connected to your computer in Storage mode you must first cancel USB communication on your computer as described here Windows Me 2000 XP Users 1 Use the device eject button shown in the taskbar at the lower right of your computer screen to cancel the connection with the RD 700SX Macintosh Users 1 Make
235. een saved the confirmation message Overwrite OK appears To overwrite the file press ENTER to save the file under a different name press EXIT Press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen 5 Calling Up Setup Files from Memory Load SETUP File Use this procedure to call up setup files that have been saved in memory NOTE The current settings are erased when a setup file is called up Be sure to save you would like to keep first before calling up Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU S File Utility 6 Part Parameter F Rh athm ArFes33i0 S U Link 9 Utility 2 Press CURSOR amp W to select 5 File Utility USB then press ENTER The Edit screen appears 7 EDIT File Ut1 USE SETUP File SETUP File Delete 3 USB Setting 4 USB Storage Press CURSOR 44 to select 1 Load SETUP File then press ENTER The following screen appears EDIT Load SETUP File New Year Live Summer Live When loading System parameter settings press F2 System to check in the check box System Parameter is following settings System settings p 79 Sound Control Settings p 88 V Link Settings p 97 Favorite Setup Settings p 57 ONE TOUCH PIANO and E PIANO Settings p 73 The system parameter is memorized by only the setup file saved after pressing F
236. een the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Flngr PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Bal parameter adjusts the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound note 1 A Sixty fourth note triplet A Sixty fourth note Thirty second note triplet Thirty second note A Sixteenth note triplet Dotted thirty second note Sixteenth note de Eighth note triplet Dotted sixteenth note A Eighth note g Quarter note triplet 2 Dotted eighth note J Quarter note dg Half note triplet J Dotted quarter note J Half note o3 Whole note triplet Dotted half note Whole note kag Double note triplet Dotted whole note wa Double note note 2 Sixteenth note y Eighth note triplet A Dotted sixteenth note J Eighth note es Half note triplet Dotted eighth note J Quarter note E Half note triplet H Dotted quarter note J Halt note 143 Effect Parameter List 3 GM2 CHORUS C horu s Pa ra mete r Parameter Value Description Pre LPF 0 7 Cuts the high frequency range of the The RD 700SX s Chorus effect
237. eggio screen 2128 RHY ARE If you re in the SONG ARP screen press F1 to access the RHY ARP screen Press RHYTHM SONG to make the button indicator light The Rhythm begins playing Press CURSOR amp w to move the cursor to RHY Press INC DEC to select the pattern The Rhythm s pattern changes If you press RHYTHM SONG once more the indicator light goes out and the Rhythm stops playing Changing Rhythm Tempos 1 In the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen press CURSOR 44 to move the cursor to in the screen Press INC DEC to change the tempo The Rhythm are played at the selected tempo You can change a variety of arpeggio settings beyond just the arpeggio style and tempo by holding down SHIFT and pressing RHYTHM SONG For details refer to Making the Rhythm and Arpeggio Settings Rhythm Arpeggio p 93 MEMO For more information about the kind of Rhythm Patterns please refer to Rhythm Pattern List p 153 NEM When the Tone screen is displayed the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen appears when CURSOR gt is pressed Pressing CURSOR 4 when the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen is showing then displays the Tone screen MEMO The way Rhythm is played and the tempo display may differ with some Rhythm Patterns 49 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Playing the Songs RHYTHM SONG The R
238. ementation 3 Parameter Address Map EE Address Description Transmission of marked address is divided to some packets For example ABH in HU s d B 3 E 01 00 02 00 0aaa aaaa Low band Attack time 0 100 hexadecimal notation will be divided to 0AH and OBH and is sent received in this 01 00 02 01 Oaaa aaaa Low band Release time 0 100 01 00 02 02 00aa aaaa Low band Threshold 0 36 order 36 35 34 33 29 28 27 26 25 24 20 19 18 17 16 15 11 10 1 RD 700SX Model ID 00H 00H 03H a b 01 00 02 03 0000 aaaa Low band Ratio 0 13 1 1 0 Tri 4 1 1 6 1 8 1 2 2 1 4 0 ivi 1 5 8 16 1 INF Olndivisual Parameters 01 00 02 04 000a aaaa Low band Level 0 24 0 d 2 Bi Ay 5 6 77 By S 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 These messages are transmitted when Bulk Dump Temporary funcion is executed 20 21 22 23 24 dB 01 00 02 05 0aaa aaaa Mid band Attack time 0 100 Please don t use a parameter or a address marked Reserved 01 00 02 06 0aaa aaaa Mid band Release time 0 100 A 01 00 02 07 00aa aaaa Mid band Threshold 0 36 The parameters for Setup are temporary If you want to leave the parameters after the 36 2355 234 23377 032 31 30 2295 228 E 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 RD 700SX is turned off execute SETUP Write 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
239. ens a Velo Keyfolw Sens 0 4 Press CURSOR amp W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC DEC to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Changing the Key Touch Key Touch The setting below allows you to adjust the response you get from the keyboard when you finger the keys Parameter Value Description Key Touch SUPER An even lighter setting than LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT This sets the keyboard to a light touch You can achieve fortissimo ff play with a less forceful touch than usual so the keyboard feels lighter This setting makes it easy to play even for children This sets the keyboard to the standard touch You can play with the most natural touch This is the closest to the touch of an acoustic piano HEAVY This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch You have to finger the keyboard more forcefully than usual in order to play fortissimo ff so the keyboard touch feels heavier Dynamic fingering adds even more feeling to what you play SUPER An even heavier setting than HEAVY HEAVY MEDIUM Making Fine Adjustments to the Keyboard Touch Key Touch Offset This setting provides even more precise adjustment of the key touch than available with the Key Touch setting alone This allows you to ad
240. ent amps Parameter Value Description AMP Type OFF No amp is used EP AMP This simulates the amp section of a vintage electric piano featuring a built in amp GTR AMP Thissimulates a multipurpose guitar amp Applying Effects to the Sound Effect Type Depth Rate You can use effects that are often used with electric pianos Parameter Value Description Effect Type OFF CHORUS Selecting the type of effects TRERMOLO AUTO WAH PHASER Effect Depth 0 127 This sets the amount of effect applied to the sound Increasing the value deepens the effect while the effect gets weaker at lower values Effect Rate 1 200 This sets the rate of the effect s cycling Increasing the value deepens the effect while the effect gets weaker at lower values Making the Midrange Equalizer Settings EQ SW EQ Gain EQ Frequency EQ Q This sets the midrange equalization Parameter Value Description EQSW ON OFF This determines whether the following EQ Freq EQ Gain and EQ Q settings are enabled ON or not OFF EQ Gain 12 0 12 0 dB Change the amount of equalization gain EQ 100 125 160 200 Set Frequency Point Changes Frequency 250 315 400 500 the level of the selected 630 800 1000 frequency range with 1250 1600 2000 frequency selected here at the 2500 3150 4000Hz center Parameter Value Descri
241. equency 0 30 01 00 Ot 04 0000 aaaa 16 20 25 31 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 01 00 Ot 05 0000 bbbb Effect Rate 1 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 0 05 10 00 Hz 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 01 00 Ot 06 0000 000a EQ Switch 0 1 6300 8000 10000 12500 16000 Hz OFF ON 10 00 00 60 Gaas aaaa EQ Low Gain 4 124 01 00 Ot 07 000a aaaa EQ Frequency 0 20 12 0 12 0 dB 1step 0 2dB 100 125 160 200 250 315 10 00 00 61 0000 Gaas EQ Low Q 0 4 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 Hz 10 00 00 62 000a aaaa EQ Mid Frequency 0 30 01 00 Ot 08 0aaa aaaa EQ Gain 4 124 16 20 25 31 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 12 12 dB 0 2dB step 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 01 00 Ot 09 0000 0aaa EQ O 0 4 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 6300 8000 10000 12500 16000 Hz 10 00 00 63 Gaas aaaa EQ Mid Gain 4 124 12 0 12 0 dB 1step 0 2dB 10 00 00 64 0000 Gaas EQ Mid Q 0 4 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 10 00 00 65 000a aaaa EQ High Frequency 0 30 Address Description 16 20 25 31 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 ee See See st pee ee qasa SR PE Te EE 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 10 00 00 00 0aaa aaaa SETUP Name 1 32 127 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 32 127 ASCII 6300 8000 10000 12500 16000 Hz 10 00 00 01 0aaa aaaa SETUP Name 2 32 127 10 00 00 66 0aaa aaaa EQ High Gain 4 124 10
242. equency above which the reverberant sound will be cut As the frequency is set lower more of the high frequencies will be cut resulting in a softer and more muted reverberance If you do not want the high frequencies to be cut set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the reverb sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the reverb sound will be output Level L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the pitch shifted sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Low Gain 15 415 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain 15 415 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the pitch shift sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the pitch shif
243. er Value Clock Out ON OFF Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Using Program Change Messages to Switch x Upa SETUP Control Channel You can switch the RD 700SX s Setups with MIDI messages from an external MIDI device Set the MIDI Receive channel for receiving the MIDI messages Program Changes from the external MIDI device to be used for switching Setups When not switching Setups from an external MIDI device set this to OFF Parameter Value Control Channel 1 16 OFF ET When the Control Channel settings are transmitted along with the part s MIDI receive channel p 92 switching of Setups takes priority over the switching of tones For more information about Switching Setups refer to Switching Setups p 103 Setting the Device ID Number Device ID The Device ID number is an identification number used when transmitting and receiving MIDI Exclusive messages When transmitting Exclusive messages the device ID numbers of the corresponding devices must be matched Parameter Value Device ID 17 32 Switching the Pedal s Polarity Pedal FC1 FC2 Polarity Switch the polarity of pedals connected to the RD 700SX This can be set individually for each of the Pedal jacks on the rear panel FC1 FC2 DAMPER On some pedals the electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of other pedals If your pedal ha
244. er il eie OFF ON Address Description 10 00 1z 15 Qaaa aaaa Transmit Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 EE Kee 10 00 1z 16 0000 000a Transmit Bank Select LSB Switch 0 5 1 10 00 07 00 0000 aaaa Chorus Type 0 3 OFF ON OFF CHORUS DELAY GM2 CHORUS 10 00 1z 17 0aaa aaaa Transmit Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 10 00 07 01 0aaa aaaa Chorus Level 0 127 10 00 1z 18 0000 000a Transmit Program Change Switch 0 1 10 00 07 02 0000 00aa reserved OFF ON 10 00 07 03 0000 00aa Chorus Output Select 0 2 10 00 1z 19 0aaa aaaa Transmit Program Changet 0 127 MAIN REV MAIN REY jf Sos ex rr ie e e pete ine deu curi aga ei rip Sk eer ua oie dae iiie ita Ie ir gu ed upper Kee 10 00 1z 1A 0000 000a Transmit Level Switch 0 1 10 00 07 04 0000 aaaa OFF ON Chorus Parameter 1 20 12768 52768 10 00 1z 1B 0aaa aaaa Transmit Level CC 7 0 127 10 00 07 53 0000 aaaa 20000 20000 j doc eS poi eue tic ER E E E CE EE EE ee eege 10 00 1z 1C 0000 000a Transmit Pan Switch 0 1 00 00 00 54 Total Size OFF ON dee EE Eeer 10 00 1z 1D 0aaa aaaa Transmit Pan CC 10 0 127 L64 R63 XI note E AE A NE T see nn a ee mr PASS ee CES 10 00 1z 1E 0000 000a Transmit Coarse Tune Switch 0 1 OFF ON 10 00 1z 1F 0aaa aaaa Transmit Coarse Tune 16 112 10 00 08 00 0000 aaaa Reverb Type 0 7 48 48 OFF REVERB ROOM HALL jf 29 b inicia ie e A de ril uli ri Bon ed ied ke il dd a
245. es that is received at the same MIDI channel after that are recognized as changing toward the value of the RPN messages In order not to make any mistakes transmitting RPN Null is recommended after setting parameters you need This device transmits the following RPNs RPN Data entry MSB LSB MSB LSB Notes 00H 00H mmH IIH Pitch Bend Sensitivity mm 00H 18H 0 24 semitones Il ignored processed as 00H 00H 01H mmH IIH Channel Fine Tuning mm Il 20 00H 40 00H 60 00H 4096 x 100 8192 0 4096 x 100 8192 cent 00H 02H mmH IH Channel Coarse Tuning mm 10H 40H 70H 48 0 48 semitones Il ignored processed as 00H 00H 05H mmH IIH Modulation Depth Range mm Il 00 00H 06 00H 0 16384 x 600 16384 cent 7FH 7FH ere RPN null RPN and NRPN will be set as unspecified Once this setting has been made subsequent Ge Program Change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 pp Program number 00H 7FH prog 1 prog 128 When Rec Mode is ON EDIT Utility Rec Setting Rec Mode these messages are transmitted when Tone is selected Pitch Bend Change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte EnH HH mmH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll Pitch Bend value 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 8192 0 8191 162 MIDI Implementation Channel Mode Messages e MONO Controller number 126 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7EH 01H n MIDI ch
246. ess ENTER to display the Edit screen Press F2 to switch between MFX1 and MFX2 EDITCMulti Effects gt MFX Struct MFX1 Source UPPER1 MFX1 Dest SAME MFA Tyre 75 SYM RESNANCE Cis Eram EDITCMulti Effects gt MFX Struct ZZETZINNN MFXZ Source UPPERZ 1 EQUALIZER Low Gain EDIT Reverb Rev Tyre Pre Delay Time Size Hish Cut Density CHORUS Settings Screen 5 125800Hz 127 EDIT Chorus Cho Tyre Outrut Filter Tyre Cutoff Fre Pre Delay Rate Mode 4 Press CURSOR 4 V b to switch screens and press CURSOR 44 Y W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC DEC to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Making Multi Effects Settings The Multi effects are multi purpose effects that completely change the sound type by changing the sound itself Contained are 125 different effects types select and use the type that suits your aims In addition to effects types composed of simple effects such as Distortion Flanger and other such effects you can also set up a wide variety of other effects even connecting effects in series or in parallel Additionally while some multi effects types feature chorus and reverb the reverb p 43 and chorus p 43 effects discussed later in this volume are handled separately MFX Structure This settin
247. etely first turn e off the POWER switch then Turn off the power to connected external devices unplug the power cord from the power outlet 3 Refer to Power Supply p Press the lower portion of the POWER ON switch on the back of the 5 RD 700SX The power is switched off Adjusting the Volume Adjust the volume using the VOLUME slider Move the slider up to increase the volume or down to lower it Also adjust the volume of the connected device to an appropriate level 24 Getting Ready Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset When using the RD 700SX for the first time start by returning the settings to their o factory defaults so that the RD 700SX operates as described in the procedures in the owner s manual Executing this operation deletes the Setup settings p 56 If you want to keep any internally stored content use Notes the Bulk Dump Bulk Dump Never turn off the power during Factory Reset while Now Executing SETUP procedure to save the O appears in the display data to an external sequencer p 99 Turning off the power while Factory Reset is in progress may result in corrupted internal data and may prevent the power from being turned on again If you have confirmed that the internal data has been lost or if a similar problem exists NOTE consult the retailer from whom you purchased the instrument or the nearest Roland When making USB connections be absolutely sure to disc
248. even more detailed reverb settings When you select a Reverb Type a number of parameters unique to that type are displayed Refer to p 145 for the values that can be set 87 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Setting Chorus and Delay Chorus adds depth and spaciousness to the sound You can select whether to use this as a chorus effect or a delay effect You can set the amount of Chorus applied separately for each individual tone p 71 Chorus Type You can select the chorus type When you change the Chorus Type the Chorus parameters will be automatically adjusted to the optimal values Rather than setting the chorus parameters one by one you can make the settings more easily by first setting the Chorus Type and then changing only the necessary parameters The way the CHORUS DELAY indicators light changes with the selected type Parameter Value Description Chorus Type OFF Chorus or Delay is not used The indicator does not light CHORUS Normal Chorus The CHORUS indicator remains lit DELAY Normal Delay The DELAY indicator remains lit GM2 CHORUS This is a GM2 reverb The CHORUS indicator flashes Selecting the Output Destination OUT PUT SELECT This selects the output mode for the chorus sound Parameter Value Description Output MAIN The chorus sound is output SELECT without being passed through the reverb The chor
249. everb and chorus effects UP 1 uz uz uu urz Z uz mu mu Parameter TX CC Value REV Reverb CC91 OFF 0 127 CHO Chorus CC93 Ctrl Slider Sy LNS CC VAL CC URL NK gp i 27 L CCO2 BREATH 1 Using the RD 700SX As a Master Keyboard Playing Sound Monophonically Mono Poly Specifies whether the tone will play polyphonically POLY or monophonically MONO The MONO setting is effective when playing a solo instrument tone such as sax or flute Parameter Value M P Mono Poly OFF M MONO CC126 P POLY CC127 Setting the Transposition for Each Individual Zone Transpose You can perform with each zone transposed to a different pitch When multiple zones are set to on you can create a richer sound by setting the two Tones to different octaves Also if the Keyboard Mode is set to Split and you are playing a bass Tone in the lower Part you can use the Transpose function to play the bass at a lower pitch Parameter Value TRA Transpose 48 0 48 Setting the Key Range Key Range Lower Upper Set the keyboard range in which each Zone will sound This can be used to make notes in different areas of the keyboard play different Tones Specify the lower limit LWR and upper limit UPR of the key range being set You can also set this by pressing a specific key and then pressing ENTER Parameter Value LWR
250. expected 95 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Selecting the Zone for the Arpeggio Performance Arpeggio Zone This sets the zone to be used for the arpeggio performance when multiple tones are used p 37 Parameter Value Arp Zone UPPER UPPER2 LOWER1 LOWER2 ALL Setting the Key Range for the Arpeggio Performances Arpeggio Key Range You cannot perform in the normal manner in the range set for arpeggio performances but you can specify the range used for the arpeggios which even allows you for example to split the keyboard and play arpeggios as accompaniment in the left side and the melody in the right Specify the leftmost and rightmost keys in the range to be used for arpeggios Parameter Value Key Range A0 C8 Keeping the Force of the Notes Constant Arpeggio Velocity This sets how strongly sounds are played when you press the keys Parameter Value Description Arp Velocity REAL Reproduces the actual strength of the keyboard touch 1 127 Sets the velocity at a fixed valued regardless of the keyboard touch Even if Arpeggio Velocity is set to a value other than REAL the sound s velocity changes in accordance with the Arpeggio Style and Arpeggio Accent values Rhythm Arpeggio Grid Refer to p 94 Rhythm Arpeggio Duration Refer to p 94 Changing the Accent Strength Arpeggio Accent Modifies the strength
251. eyboard strongly Assigning Internal Parts to INTERNAL Zone Part Assign This determines which internal Parts are assigned to the INTERNAL Zone Parameter Value P A Part Assign 1 16 69 Making Detailed Settings for Tones Turning the Controllers in Each Zone On and Off These settings determine whether the pedals connected to each PEDAL jack DaMPER FC1 FC2 the Modulation lever the Bender and the Slides are used to control the Parts ON or not OFF Parameter Description Value Dp Damper pedal ON OFF F1 Pedal connected to the FC1 jack F2 Pedal connected to the FC2 jack PB Pitch Bender Md Modulation Lever UP1 Control Slider UP1 UP2 Control Slider UP2 Lw1 Control Slider LW1 LW2 Control Slider LW2 Making Tone Settings Tone Info You can make more detailed settings to the tones assigned to each of the Internal parts LNOTE In certain selected Tones there may be parameters that cannot be changed How to Make Settings 2 In the Tone screen press F1 Tone Info The F1 is lit and the Tone Info screen appears TONE INFO b Part Partii UPPER Tone 991 Surerior Grd Reverb Amount 198 Chorus Amount a MFA 75 SYM RESONANCE Mono Pols POLY Press CURSOR 4 VI b to switch screens and press CURSOR 44 W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set TONE INFO 4
252. f MFX1 Assign applied MFX2 MULTI EFECTS CONTROL knob CTRL adjusts the MFX Control of MFX2 applied MFX1 MULTI EFECTS CONTROL knob amp 2CTRL adjusts the MFX Control of MFX1 and MEX2 applied TEMPO MULTI EFECTS CONTROL knob changes the tempo Changing the Slider Settings Slider Assign This sets the function of the slider when CONTROL ZONE LEVEL is set to CONTROL lit Parameter Value Description Slider Assign OFF No control UP1 UP2 CCO1 CC31 Controller Numbers 1 31 33 LW1 LW2 CC33 CC95 95 96 Raises the pitch in semitone BEND UP units up to a maximum of four octaves 97 Lowers the pitch in semitone BEND DOWN units up to a maximum of four octaves 98 After Touch AFTER TOUCH 85 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT eoe the Multi Effects Reverb and Chorus Effects Effects The RD 700SX contains four effects processors two multi effects chorus and reverb Settings can be made separately for each effects processor NOTE Making abrupt changes in the settings values may cause the sound to become distorted or overly loud Carefully monitor volume levels while making the settings How to Make Settings 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU A Touch n ontrol ffects ound Control vr 2 Press CURSOR 44 W to select 3 Effects 3 Pr
253. fect can specify the pattern by which the cutoff frequency will change P will occur ir the range ofthe cenin Assignable Parameters frequency MFX Control Rate Filter Resonance Filter Type Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be affected Parameter Value Description Sens 0 127 Adjusts the sensitivity with which the Step 01 16 0 127 Cutoff frequency at each step filter is controlled Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is Polarity UP DOWN Sets the direction in which the synchronized with the tempo frequency will change when the auto Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate of modulation Hz wah filter is modulated Hz UP The filter will change toward a note 1 Rate of modulation note higher frequency Rete DOWN The filter will change toward Attack 0 127 Speed at which the cutoff frequency a lower frequency changes between steps Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is Filter Type LPF BPF Filter type synchronized with the tempo HPF Frequency range that will pass through Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz NOTCH each filter Hz LPF Frequencies below the cutoff z n BPF ie in the region of the Rate A Pet PEI EE cutoff Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation HPF Frequencies above the cutoff Phase 0 180 deg Adjusts the degree of phase shift of the NOTCH Frequencies other than the left and right sounds when the wah region of the cutoff effect is applied Filter Slope 12 24 36
254. fect is Delay4 ms 1 2600 ms The parameters are the same as for the synchronized with the tempo note 1 Delay 1 Delay1 ms 1 2600 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is Delay4 b heard Hz Delay1 98 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound D n note 1 Adjusts the time until the delay sound is Feedback that s fed back into the effect Negative elay1 heard note settings invert the phase Delay2 Mode ms note Settings of the Delay 2 HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which Delay2 ms 1 2600 ms The parameters are the same as for the BYPASS sound fed back to the effect is filtered note 1 Delay 1 out If you don t want to filter out any Delay2 A the high frequencies set this parameter Delay3 Mode ms note Settings of the Delay 3 to BYPASS Delay3 ms 1 2600 ms The parameters are the same as for the Delay1 Pan L64 63R Stereo location D note 1 Delay 1 Delay2 Pan L64 63R Delayst wt I Delay3 Pan L64 63R Delay4 Mode ms note Settings of the Delay 4 Delay4 Pan L64 63R Delay4 ms 1 2600 ms m Parameters ate the same ge fot the DelaylLevel 0 127 Output level of Delays 1 Delay4 xa eu Delay2 Level 0 127 Output level of Delays 2 Delay1 98 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound Delay3 Level 0 127 Output level of Delays 3 Feedback that s fed back into the effect Negative Delay4 Level 0 127 Output level of Delays 4 settings invert the phase Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency ra
255. ff Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 7F 09H 02H F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 02H Sub ID 2 General MIDI Off F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Not received when the Rx GS Reset parameter EDIT System Rx GS Reset is OFF Universal Realtime System Exclusive Messages OMaster Volume Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 01H IH mmH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control messages 01H Sub ID 2 Master Volume 1H Master Volume lower byte mmH Master Volume upper byte F7H EOX End Of Exclusive The lower byte 11H of Master Volume will be handled as 00H The Master Volume parameter EDIT System Master Volume will change OMaster Fine Tuning Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 03H 11H mmH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 03H Sub ID 2 Master Fine Tuning HH Master Fine Tuning LSB mmH Master Fine Tuning MSB F7H EOX End Of Exclusive mm Il 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 100 0 99 9 cents OMaster Coarse Tuning Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 04H 11H mmH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message
256. g determines how MFX1 and MFX2 are connected Parameter Value Description MFX PARALEL The effects are connected in parallel Structure SERIAL The effects are connected serially MFX Source On the RD 700SX the MFX Type can be stored along with the tones assigned to each part This settings determine which multi effects are used Parameter Value Description MFX1 2 FIXED The multi effect doesn t change even Source OFF at when you switch to a different tone MFX2 This setting is convenient when you Source want to use the same multi effect even when changing tones UPPERI The MEX Type of the Tone assigned UPPER2 to the selected part is applied LOWER RHYTHM NOTE When MEX Source is set to FIXED the MFX Dest setting is fixed at ALL PART and the multi effects are applied to all parts MFX Dest This settings determine the part to which the MFX1 are applied Parameter Value Description MFX Dest SOURCE The multi effect is applied only to Destination PART the part selected in MFX1 Source SAME The multi effect is applied to parts MFX assigned the same multi effect as the part selected in MFX1 Source ALL PART The multi effects are applied to all parts Type Select the Multi Effects Type There are 125 different multi effects available Refer to the Effect Parameter List p 112 Parameter Value
257. g materials Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 7 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Handling CD ROMs Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner Main Features Progressive Hammer Action The RD 700SX incorporates Rolande progressive hammer action keyboard which realistically reproduces the comfortable natural touch of the grand piano While offering excellent responsiveness and quiet action this keyboard also reproduces the subtle changes in touch as you move from the lower to the higher registers Additionally the progressive hammer action keyboard features an environmentally friendly design with absolutely no lead used in the hammers New Piano Tones The instrument features newly developed authentic piano tones with wide dynamic range and rich expression Great for any musical genre or scene whether it be performing with a band or playing a solo ballad the RD 700SX is the perfect stage piano Additionally The instrument features an 88 note multisampled piano painstakingly recorded by professional engineers It boasts not only tonal quality but also a high level of presence making it closer than ever to the real thing It is also furnished with a wealth of electr
258. g the Tone When the zone to be set is selected the name of the assigned tone appears You can select tone using the TONE SELECT buttons Parameter Value Tone Refer to Tone List p 146 Setting the Volume and Pan Volume Pan Sets the volume and the panning localizes sound image for each of the Zones The Volume setting is mainly used when multiple tones are playing to obtain the desired balance in volume between each zone The Pan setting localizes the sound image of each zone when the output is in stereo With an increase in the value for L more of the sound will be heard as coming from the left side Similarly more of the sound will originate at the right if the value of R is increased When set to 0 the sound is heard as coming from the center Parameter Value VOL Volume 0 127 PAN L64 0 R63 Setting the Zone to Which Multi effects Are Applied MFX1 MFX2 Source This setting determines the zone to which multi effects are applied Parameter Value FX1 MFXI Source ON OFF FX2 MFX2 Source LNOTE Multi effects can be applied to only one zone Once one zone has been switched on the same multi effect is switched off in the other zones ET You can apply either MFX1 or MFX2 not both to a zone If both MFX1 and MFX2 are switched on for the same zone MFX2 alone will be the one that is actually applied Making Detailed Settings fo
259. ged FC1 FC2 OFF No control Pedal CC01 CC31 Controller Numbers 1 31 Assign CC33 CC95 33 95 96 Raises the pitch up to a BEND UP maximum of four octaves 97 Lowers the pitch up to a BEND DWN maximum of four octaves 98 After Touch AFTER TOUCH 99 Each pedal press raises the key OCT UP range in octave steps up to 4 octaves higher 100 Each pedal press lowers the OCT DOWN key range in octave steps up to 4 octaves lower 101 Starts Stops the external START STOP sequencer 102 The tempo will be modified to TAP TEMPO the interval at which you press the pedal 103 Starts and stops Rhythms p RHY PLY STP 48 104 Performs the same function as ARPEGGIO SW ARPEGGIO Switches the Arpeggio p 46 on and off 105 Performs the same function as MFX ON OFF MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF Switches the multi effects p 52 on and off 106 Adjusts the amount of multi MFX CONTROL effects p 52 107 Starts Stops the song p 50 SNG PLY STP Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Changing the MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL Knob Settings Control Knob Assign Normally MULTI EFECTS CONTROL knob is used for making settings that adjust the multi effects MFX1 Control but they can also be used for settings that change the way tones are played or the tempo Parameter Value Description Ctrl Knob OFF No control Control MFX1 MULTI EFECTS CONTROL knob Knob CTRL adjusts the MFX Control o
260. ght Level 0 127 Adjust the volume of the right delay CROSS fed back into the effect sound NORMAL The left delay sound will Center Level 0 127 Adjust the volume of the center delay be fed back into the left delay and the sound right delay sound into the right delay Low Gain 15 15dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency CROSS The left delay sound will be range fed back into the right delay and the Positive settings will emphasize right delay sound into the left delay boost the low frequency range Delay Left 0 1 500 0 ms Adjust the time from the direct sound High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency until when the left delay sound is heard tange Delay Right 0 1 500 0 ms Adjust the time from the direct sound Positive settings will emphasize until when the right delay sound is boost the high frequency range heard Balance D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the Feedback 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the delay D0 100W direct sound and the delay sound With sound that is fed back into the effect a setting of D100 0W only the direct Negative settings will invert the sound will be output and with a setting phase of D0 100W only the delay sound will be HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjust the frequency above which output BYPASS sound fed back to the effect will be cut Level 0 127 Adjust the output level If you do not want to cut the high Delay C Delay L and Delay R parameters can be se
261. gogo Agogo Agogo Train 69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Jetplane ex 808marac Maracas Maracas Maracas Helicopter ShrtWhistle EXC2 ShrtWhistle EXC2 ShrtWhistle EXC2 ShrtWhistle EXC2 Starship C572 LongWhistle EXC2 LongWhistle EXC2 LongWhistle EXC2 LongWhistle EXC2 Gun Shot EN Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Machine Gun 74 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Lasergun EH 808clave Claves Claves Claves Explosion 6 Woodblock Woodblock Woodblock Woodblock Dog 77 Woodblock Woodblock Woodblock Woodblock HorseGallop EZ Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Bird 79 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Rain EN MuteTriang EXC5 MuteTriangl EXC5 MuteTriangl EXC5 MuteTriangl EXC5 Thunder 81 OpenTriangl EXC5 OpenTriangl EXC5 OpenTriangl EXC5 OpenTriangl EXC5 Wind mL Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Seashore Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Stream C684 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bubble EN Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets sd 86 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 EA Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 ge up SAN ee RS ee NS NO pee Applause JI 151 Arpeggio Style List No 0 JO Q GQ N P G Go oO Q G GO GQ Q GQ DD N N N O N N N 2 ch ch ch ch O N O Om ND zz O
262. h 0 1 0000 bbbb OFF ON 0000 cccc Upper CLAV MALLET Tone Number 0 511 10 00 00 79 0000 Oaaa MFX1 Source 0 4 10 00 00 27 0000 000a FIXED UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWER1 LOWER2 0000 bbbb 10 00 00 7A 0000 00aa MFX1 Destination 0 2 0000 cccc Upper ORGAN Tone Number 0 511 SOURCE PART SAME MFX PART ALL PART 10 00 00 2A 0000 000a 10 00 00 7B 0000 000a MFX2 Switch 0 1 0000 bbbb OFF ON 0000 ccce Upper STRINGS Tone Number 0 511 10 00 00 7C 0000 Oaaa MFX2 Source 0 4 10 00 00 2D 0000 000a OFF UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWER1 LOWER2 0000 bbbb 10 00 00 7D 0000 000a reserved 0000 cccc Upper PAD Tone Number 0 511 10 00 00 7E 0000 000a reserved 10 00 00 30 0000 000a U Ge eege 0000 bbbb 10 00 00 7F 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign LOWER2 ON 1 9 0000 cccc Upper GTR BASS Tone Number 0 511 16 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 1 3 5 2 1 1 3 1 10 00 00 33 0000 000a 10 00 01 00 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign LOWER2 OFF 1 9 0000 bbbb 10 00 01 01 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign LOWER1 ON 1 9 0000 cccc Upper BRASS WINDS Tone Number 0 511 10 00 01 02 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign LOWER1 OFF 1 9 10 00 00 36 0000 000a 10 00 01 03 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign UPPER2 0N 1 9 0000 bbbb 10 00 01 04 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign UPPER2 OFF 1 9 0000 ccce Upper VOICE SYNTH Tone Number 0 511 10 00 01 05 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Ass
263. han Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd 8th Floor Railway Plaza 39 Chatham Road South T S T Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 2333 1863 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA Roland Asia Pacific Sdn Bhd 45 1 Block C2 Jalan PJU 1 39 Dataran Prima 47301 Petaling Jaya Selangor MALAYSIA TEL 03 7805 3263 This product must be disposed of separately When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE SWEE LEE MUSIC COMPANY PTE LTD 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Soi Verng NakornKasem New Road Sumpantawongse Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 224 8821 VIETNAM SAIGON MUSIC DISTRIBUTOR TAN DINH MUSIC 138 Tran Quang Khai Street
264. hancer Enhancer Mix 0 127 Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer Chorus PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Cho Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz Hz Cho Rate note 1 Frequency of modulation note D Chorus Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Chorus Bal D100 0W Adjusts the volume balance between the D0 100W sound that is sent through the chorus W and the sound that is not sent through the chorus D Level 0 127 Output Level 73 ENH FLANGER ENHANCER FLANGER This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in series Assignable Parameters MFX Control Flngr Bal Fin Rate Fingr Depth Fingr Feedback Enhancer Sens Parameter Value Description EnhancerSens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix 0 127 Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer Flngr PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flngr Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Fln Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz Hz Fln Rate b note 1 Frequency of modulation note Flngr Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Flngr Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound
265. he Type of Compressor Sound Control Type 89 Detailed Settings of Compressor nennen n nennen 89 Managing Setup Files File Utility USB nene nennen nnne nennen 89 Saving Setup Files to the Memory Save SETUP File EE 89 Calling Up Setup Files from Memory Load SETUP File 90 Deleting Files from Memory File Delete ss 91 Setting MIDI Receive Parts Part Parameter 91 How to Make Settings coe rn tete etie sd n nie ea te ers Ere Dea TA Mass 91 Selecting the Part to Be Set Dart Tone itni ian E E E 92 Setting the Receive Channel Receive Channel ss 92 Setting the Volume and Pan Volume Pan s ss 92 Setting the Required Polyphony Voice Reserve 92 Preventing Parts from Being Played Part Switch ss 92 Making the Effect ON OFF Settings MFX Switch 92 Setting Reception and Blocking of MIDI Messages from External MIDI Controllers 92 Making the Rhythm and Arpeggio Settings Rhythm Arpeggio ss 93 How to Make Settings s masa qas espe eodem dte tie a ODER TA MS 93 Making the rhythm Settings g ie 93 Making Arpes glo Settings minita dete ee ved 95 About V ET 97 Connection Exatmples eere etaed etra tit date trie rere ti cepe trecentos 97 Turning the V Link ON OFF estet tite as 97 V Link Seti iia io geret n desee pie ite ty 97 Detailed Settings of V Link cis ode titan dte ete oett tanned tette ndr 98 Other Functions Utility eee tutore te te ete ane deserere rei
266. he depth of modulation direct sound will be output and with a Phase 0 180 degree Adjust the spatial spread of the sound setting of D0 100W only the chorus Feedback 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the sound will be output processed sound that is returned fed Level 0 127 Adjust the output level back into the input Positive settings will return the sound in phase and e negative settings will return the 1 02 STE REO DLY STEREO DELAY sound in reverse phase Assignable Parameters The effect becomes more prominent as MEX Control Balance the value is increased Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency Parameter Value Description range Feedback mode NORMAL Select the way in which delay sound is Positive settings will emphasize CROSS fed back into the effect boost the low frequency range NORMAL The left delay sound will High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency be fed back into the left delay and the range right delay sound into the right delay Positive settings will emphasize CROSS The left delay sound will be boost the high frequency range fed back into the right delay and the Balance D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the right delay sound into the left delay D0 100W direct sound and the flanger sound Delay Left 0 1 500 0 ms Adjust the time from the direct sound With a setting of D100 0W only the until when the left delay sound is heard direct s
267. he normal performance mode Changing Arpeggio Tempos 1 In the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen press CURSOR 44 to move the cursor to in the screen Press INC DEC to change the tempo When you play the keyboard arpeggios are played at the selected tempo You can change a variety of arpeggio settings beyond just the arpeggio style and tempo by holding down SHIFT and pressing ARPEGGIO For details refer to Making Arpeggio Settings p 95 LU Setting the Way Arpeggios are Played Arpeggio Style p 95 E Arpeggio Style List p 152 MEMO When you re at the Tone screen you can press CURSOR b to go to the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen From the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen you can get back to the Tone screen by pressing CURSOR 4 l MED The way arpeggio is played and the tempo display may differ with some arpeggio Styles 47 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Playing Rhythm RHYTHM SONG The RD 700SX features internal drum patterns complementing Jazz Rock and other various musical genres These drum patterns are referred to as Rhythms You can perform using Rhythms combined with various functions for example performing arpeggios while a Rhythm is playing When SONG ARP screen is selected for the Rhythm Song Arpeggio screen pressing RHYTHM SONG then starts playback of the song Before playing the rhythm first
268. he ratio with which the overtones generated by the enhancer Assignable Parameters are combined with the direct sound MEX Control Chorus Bal Chorus Rate Enhancer Sens Delay Time 0 1 500 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the Parameter Value Description dn EUM B faece ny PRSE Sens i Adjust ue SE i BIS ETHER Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the delay Enhancer Mix 0 127 Adjust the ratio with which the sound that is fed back into the delay overtones generated by the enhancer gt Ke input Negative settings will invert are combined with the direct sound the phase Chorus PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the Delay HF 200 8000 Hz Adjust the frequency above which dee sound begins until the choris Damp BYPASS delayed sound fed back to the delay sound is heard input will be cut If you do not want to Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the modulation speed of the cut the high frequencies of the delay Hz chorus effect feedback set this parameter to BYPASS CHERE 05127 Adjust the mod lation depth of the Delay Bal D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the Chorus eters D0 100W enhancer sound that is sent through the Chorus Bal D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the delay and the enhancer sound thatisnot D0 100W enhancer sound that is sent through the sent through the delay With a setting of chorus and the enhancer sound that is D100 0W only the enhancer soun
269. he volume balance between the direct sound begins until the flanger D0 100W direct sound and the chorus sound sound is heard With a setting of D100 0W only the Flngr Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the modulation speed of the direct sound will be output With a Hz flanger effect setting of D0 100W only the chorus Flngr Depth 0 127 Adjust the modulation depth of the sound will be output flanger effect Delay Time 0 1 500 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the Flngr Fbk 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the flanger direct sound begins until the delay sound that is fed back into the effect sound is heard Negative settings will invert the Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the delay phase sound that is fed back into the delay Fingr Bal D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the input Negative settings will invert D0 100W enhancer sound that is sent through the the phase flanger and the enhancer sound that is Delay HF 200 8000 Hz Adjust the frequency above which not sent through the flanger With a Damp BYPASS delayed sound fed back to the delay setting of D100 0W only the enhancer input will be cut If you do not want to sound will be output With a setting of cut the high frequencies of the feedback D0 100W only the enhancer sound set this parameter to BYPASS that is sent through the flanger will be Delay Bal D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the output D0 100W chorus
270. hen selecting a Wave Expansion Board Rhythm Set with the RD 700SX the Wave Expansion Board Rhythm Sets are placed after Patches called Tones on the RD 700SX Thus when you want to specify a Wave Expansion Board Rhythm Set in terms of a Tone number the Tone number can be arrived at by adding the desired Rhythm Set number in the Rhythm Set List to the last Patch number in the Patch List Wave Expansion Board Tone Name Correspondence Table The RD 700SX displays certain SRX Series tone names as shown below There may be displayed differently from Owner s Manuals of SRX series SRX 03 SRX 05 SRX 07 SRX 08 STUDIO SRX Supreme Dance Ultimate Keys Platinum Trax No Tone Name No Tone Name No Tone Name No Tone Name 005 Taxi EP 236 Tri EP 011 TouchEP SRX 378 Echo EP SRX 021 USEP 239 EP Chd Menu 013 Stage EP 2 022 Studio EP 240 EP Maj 9th 015 80 s EP 023 ANEP 241 EP Maj 11th 017 Padded EP 024 Sens EP 242 EP Min 11th 019 Sine EP 022 ClaviQ EP 024 70 EP Bs 033 The 70 EP 36 Performing with the Keyboard Playing Multiple Tones with the Keyboard The RD 700SX features four Internal zones UPPER 1 UPPER 2 LOWER 1 and LOWER 2 and one tone can be assigned to each of these zones You can perform using combinations of tones by turning each zone on or off You can have multiple tones layered together at th
271. ic components or connectors Usea Philips screwdriver that is suitable for the size of the screw a number 2 screwdriver If an unsuitable screwdriver is used the head of the screw may be stripped To remove a screw rotate the screwdriver counter clockwise To tighten a screw rotate the screwdriver loosen EN tighten clockwise Be careful that the screws you remove do not drop into the interior of the RD 700SX Do notleave the rear panel cover removed After installation of the Wave Expansion Boards is complete be sure to replace the cover Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection terminals Never use excessive force when installing a circuit board If it doesn t fit properly on the first attempt remove the board and try again When circuit board installation is complete double check your work Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the circuit board Install only the specified circuit board s SRX Series Remove only the specified screws Becareful not to cut your hand on the edge of the installation bay Install the Wave Expansion Boards after removing the rear panel cover There are two slots A and B into which a board can be installed Specify which slot s board is to be used by pressing EXPANSION A or B on the front panel when using waves tones or Rhythm Sets from the wave expansion boards 15 Getting Ready I
272. ies STER mean tone and Pythagorean scales Performances are possible in all keys first technique III ARABIC Arabic Scale This scale is suitable for Arabic music Temperament C Ctt D Eb Key E F F G G A Bb B Sets the keynote Precise Modification of Chord Sonorities Stretch Tune Changes the pitch using the stretch tuning method typically used on acoustic pianos This makes high range sounds slightly higher in pitch and low range sounds slightly lower in pitch Parameter Value Description Stretch Tune OFF No stretch tune DEFAULT This is the standard tuning curve Switching Between Reception of GM GM2 System On and GS Reset Specifies whether General MIDI System On General MIDI 2 System On or GS Reset messages from external MIDI devices will be received ON or not OFF Parameter Value Rx GM GM2 ON OFF System ON Rx GS Reset Setting the Keyboard Touch Key Touch You can make advanced settings for the touch used for the keys How to Make Settings 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU st 1 key Z Control S Effects 4 S5ound Control k 2 Press CURSOR 44 W to select 1 Key Touch 3 Press ENTER to display the Edit screen EDIT Key Touch Key Touch Key Touch Offset REAL Velocity Velo Delay S
273. if 95 Arpeggio Octave Range sess 96 Arpeggio Style ya ua ahin ukuna aap aaah 47 95 Arpeggio Style List 152 Arpeggio Tempo EE 95 Arpeggio Velocity ss 96 Arpeggio Zone us 96 ATK sss teet ote eot ee DR vu pas 66 Attack Time External Zone ricette 66 Tone Info EE 72 B BR cas ditties ns rr fed tte aa 67 BALANCED OUT Jacks grtn 14 Bank Select LSB ertt eerte 63 Bank Select MSB usines 63 Bend Range Extemal Zone guenata a qalas Man tits 67 TONG MIO sn sen e tee e 72 Bender Modulation Lever 44 I ena 92 Bulk Dump eerte eie epe endis 98 Bulk Dump SETUP ss 99 Bulk Dump Temporary en 99 C CTI aae Saee en deett ieu a dei eee 67 C1 MEX Control uu eese 87 C2 MEX Conttol ius 87 carte d extension Wave sss 18 CC T sse dee e teque eed peas 67 E E Ne medendi mE 67 Enanos 62 CHO tato aia 65 A en tenere 43 diter nana enr en rie 88 External Zone sis 65 Tone fo EE 71 Chorus Amount asian 71 Chons A US 88 CHORUS DELAY eee 12 43 CHORUS DELAY DEPTH knob 12 44 Clock Out tie ns teer ranae 81 Clock Source amiet ou 81 Coarse Tune External Zone eese eee eren 67 Tone Info iiiter bes 71 E ei re dadas 66 Connection External Equipment sss 21 MIDE 22 re e n Ge ox a 60 101 103 Pedale np aate eite udin 22 USB 20 exe Rs te t dte ua su 60 CONTRAST knob enne 13 Control iss aq a
274. igh f High Gain 15 15 dB the gain of the high frequency Pararieler Value Description po ui e 4 settings will emphasize Dly Left 200 1000 ms Adjust the time delay from the direct boost the high frequency range note 2 sound until when the left delay sound is Balance D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the nae D0 100W direct sound and the delay sound With Dly Right 200 1000 ms Adjust the time delay from the direct a setting of D100 0W only the direct note 2 sound until when the right delay sound sound will be output and with a setting Heard of D0 100W only the delay sound will be Dly Center 200 1000 ms Adjust the time delay from the direct output note 2 sound until when the center delay Level 0 127 Adjust the output level sound is heard Feedback 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect 1 03 MOD DELAY MODULATION Negative settings will invert the DELAY phase E HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjust the frequency above which Thig effect adds modulation to the delayed sound producing an effect BYPASS sound fed back to the effect will be cut similar to a flanger If you do not want to cut the high i frequencies of the feedback set this Assignable Parameters parameter to BYPASS MEX Control Rate Balance Left Level 0 127 Adjust the volume of the left delay Parameter Value Description sound Feedback mode NORMAL Select the way in which delay sound is Ri
275. ign UPPER1 ON 1 9 10 00 00 39 0000 000a 10 00 01 06 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign UPPER1 OFF 1 9 0000 Bb5D i ns tomm Cut at VS pes ee SESSE Ea 0000 cccc Upper RHY GM2 Tone Number 0 511 10 00 01 07 0000 000a reserved MEC Ic ie E M MK DNE 10 00 01 08 0000 000a reserved 10 00 00 3C 0000 000a 10 00 01 09 Oaaa aaaa reserved 0000 bbbb _ EE EE e a Ae acci efe asas 0000 cccc Lower PIANO Tone Number 0 511 00 00 01 0A Total Size 10 00 00 3F 0000 000a Hees oe Ml ee c EE ipii eae ie cei hid ne MIDI Implementation 10 00 1z 10 0000 000a Control Slider Swtch LOWER2 0 1 SETUP Rhythm Arpeggio OFF ON ees 10 00 1z 11 0000 aaaa Part Assign 0 15 Address Description 1 16 Ata AAA AE ASA A A A ROME PME 10 00 02 00 0000 aaaa 00 00 00 12 Total Size 0000 bbbb Rhythm Pattern 0 184 thea SSS SSS SSS SS SSS Se aS SSS a ae SSS SS ae ee nes eee 10 00 02 02 0aaa aaaa Rhythm Accent 0 100 10 00 02 03 0000 000a Rhythm Set Change Enable 0 35 SETUP External Zone 10 00 02 04 000a aaaa Rhythm MIDI Out Channel 0 16 UPPER OFF 1 16 UPPER2 10 00 02 05 0000 0aaa Rhythm MIDI Out Port 0 4 LOWER1 OFF 1 2 USB ALL LOWER2 10 00 02 06 0000 0aaa Arpeggio Zone 0 4 DRE ne er EE ALL UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWER1 LOWER2 Address Description 10 00 02 07 0000 000a Arpeggio Switch COS 4 ft eee oes eae EE EE EE hou eS OF
276. ility between operating systems and modes Operating System Storage Mode MIDI Mode Windows XP 2000 Me or later o o Windows 98 98SE x o Mac OS 9 9 04 or later o o Mac OS X o o The functions may not work correctly with some computers Switching Between Storage Mode and MIDI Mode Switching to USB Storage Mode 5 Use INC DEC to select STORAGE A confirmation dialog box appears The USB Cable must be disconnected before switchins the USB Modes TEXITI TENTERI 6 To switch the mode press ENTER to cancel press EXIT USB Storage mode will be selected 7 If you want to save the setting press F1 WRITE For details on operations in USB Storage mode refer to p 89 Switching to MIDI Mode 5 Use INC DEC to select MIDI A confirmation dialog box appears The USB Cable must be disconnected before switching the MIDI Modes L EXITJ LENTER3 ET Any switching of the USB mode Storage mode MIDI mode must be performed before the RD 700SX and computer are connected NOTE When switched to USB MIDI mode the RD 700SX cannot receive signals through the MIDI IN connector 1 Press EDIT 2 Press CURSOR dh 1 W to select 5 File Utility USB and then press ENTER 3 Press CURSOR amp 1 W to select 3 USB Setting and then press ENTER The USB Setting screen appears EDIT USE Settins USE Mode USB MIDI Thr
277. ill be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Assignable Parameters Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz MFX Control StepRate Depth Feedback Balance Hz note 1 Frequency of modulation note Parameter Value Description Rate A Filter Type OFF Type of filter Depth 0 127 Modulation depth of the chorus effect LPF OFF No filter is used Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound HPF LPF Cuts the frequency range above Output Mode SPEAKER Adjusts the method that will be used to the Cutoff Freq PHONES hear the sound that is output to the HPF Cuts the frequency range below OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect the Cutoff Freq will be achieved if you select SPEAKER Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter when using speakers or PHONES when Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from when the using headphones direct sound begins until the flanger Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range sound is heard High Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the high range Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct synchronized with the tempo D0 100W sound D and the chorus sound W Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz Level 0 127 Output Level Hz Rate D note 1 Frequency of modulation note 30 3 D FLANGER Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation This app
278. in EXTERNAL Zone ODecay Time Controller number 75 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4BH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Decay Time value relative change 00H 40H 7FH 64 0 63 These messages are transmitted when Decay Time value is set in EXTERNAL Zone OEffect 1 Reverb Send Level Controller number 91 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5BH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Reverb Send Level 00H 7FH 0 127 These messages are transmitted when Reverb value is set in EXTERNAL Zone OEffect 3 Chorus Send Level Controller number 93 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5DH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Reverb Send Level 00H 7FH 0 127 These messages are transmitted when Chorus value is set in EXTERNAL Zone ORPN MSB LSB Controller number 100 101 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 65H mmH BnH 64H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H EH ch 1 16 mm upper byte MSB of parameter number specified by RPN 11 lower byte LSB of parameter number specified by RPN lt lt lt RPN gt gt gt Control Changes include RPN Registered Parameter Numbers which are extended When using RPNs first RPN Controller numbers 100 and 101 they can be sent in any order should be sent in order to select the parameter then Data Entry Controller numbers 6 and 38 should be sent to set the value Once RPN messages are received Data Entry messag
279. is By applying successive cuts to the sound this effect turns a synchronized with the tempo conventional sound into a sound that appears to be played as a Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of the change Hz CES i 3 Hz backing phrase This is especially effective when applied to sustain note 1 Frequency of the change note type sounds Rate Depth 0 127 Depth to which the effect is applied Assignable Parameters Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range MEX Control Rate Attack Shuffle High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level Parameter Value Description Step 01 16 0 127 Level at each step Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is 18 AUTO PAN synchronized with the tempo Cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate at which the 16 step sequence will Hz cycle Hz Assignable Parameters D note 1 Rate at which the 16 step sequence will MFX Control Rate Depth Mod Wave ME cycle note Parameter Value Description Attack 0 127 bs at which the level changes etween steps Mod Wave TRI SQR Modulation Wave Input Sync Sw OFF ON Specifies whether an input note will SIN SRI TRE foangle wave ause the sequence to resume from the SAW2 SQR square wave A tst SEN ON t SIN sine wave irst step of the sequence ON or no SAW1 2 sawtooth wave OFF Input Sync 0 127 Volume at which an input note will be Thres detected SAWI SAW Mode LEGATO Sets the m
280. is a descendant of the Roland VR Series effects This changes the volume level in a cyclic manner Switching between the Mono and Stereo Tremolo Type settings also switches the volume control waveform Assignable Parameters MEX Control Rate Depth Tremolo Type Parameter Value Description Tremolo Type Mono Stereo Mono The left and right volume levels change simultaneously Stereo The left and right volume levels change in alternating fashion Rate Mode Hz Note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency at which the effect is applied Hz Hz Rate D note 1 care at which the effect is applied Depth 0 127 Depth of the effect Low Gain 15 15 dB Boost or cut in the low end High Gain 15 15 dB Boost or cut in the high end Level 0 127 Output volume 83 VR AUTO WAH This wah is a descendant of the Roland VR Series effects This is a special wah effect an effect in which the tone is changed cyclically produced by shifting the filter in a cyclic fashion You can switch the Control Type parameter to select from Auto Wah Touch Wah or Pedal Wah SE x lowering the value boosts the Assignable Parameters Amp Type OFF Amp Type MEX Control Rate Depth Peak Manual EP AMP Parameter Value Description GTR AMP Control Type MOD Effect Control Types EQ Switch OF
281. just between Key Touch settings values Parameter Value Key Touch Offset 10 9 Description The touch sensitivity becomes heavier as the value increases NOTE When this settings value continues into the positive or negative direction the Key Touch s five step value is switched automatically in accordance with that value 83 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Setting a Constant Volume Level in Pedal and MULTI EFFECTS Response to the Playing Force CONTROL Knob Settings Velocity Control This sets the sound to play at a fixed volume regardless of the You can change the functions assigned to the pedals sliders and MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL knob settings strength used to play the keyboard the velocity Parameter Value Description Velocity REAL Volume levels and the way sounds How to Ma ke Setting S are played change in response to the velocity gU E 12127 Values for the volume and the way 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light sounds are played remain constant The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU Changing the Timing of Sounds in Response to the Velocity Velocity Delay Sens 4 Sound Control w This sets the interval from the time the key is played to when the sound is produced 2 Press CURSOR 44 J W to select 2 Control As the value is decreased the timing of the sound is delayed more EQ when mor
282. king Detailed Settings for Tones Making Zone Settings Zone Info The sixteen Parts played by the RD 700SX s internal sound generator are referred to as Internal Parts Of the sixteen Internal Parts you can select four of them to function as the four Parts UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWERI and LOWER2 which can be freely controlled with the RD 700SX s buttons and keyboard These four Parts are collectively known as the Zone You can perform operations like Split with the INTERNAL Zone very simply using the RD 700SX s keyboard and you can make more detailed settings for the Zone as well NOTE Depending on the tone selected there may be parameters that cannot be altered How to Make Settings 1 In the Tone screen press F2 Zone Info The F2 is lit and the Zone Info screen appears 4 120 CG 4 TONE Surerior Grd 3 Strings 1 S4 Ac Bass Soft Pad CTONEI The names of zones that have Zone SW set to OFF are shown in lowercase letters 2 Press CURSOR vr P to switch screens 3 Press CURSOR yr 11D yr w to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 4 120 EST 4 VOL PAN Fail FXZ 127 FA CO e CI MFX1 Source 4 Press INC DEC to set the value Pressing INC and DEC simultaneously sets that parameter to the standard default value 5 When you finish making settings press F2 extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Selectin
283. laced so it is level and sure to remain stable If not using a rack or stand you still need to make sure that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that will properly support the unit and keep it from wobbling The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the rear side of unit Use only the attached power supply cord Also the supplied power cord must not be used with any other device Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can S damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be S capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist Do not allow any objects e g flammable material coins pins or liquids of any kind S water soft drinks etc to penetrate the unit N power cord from the outlet and request servicing by your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page when Imme
284. lating a Checksum Roland Exclusive messages RQ1 DT1 are transmitted with a checksum at the end before F7 to make sure that the message was correctly received The value of the checksum is determined by the address and data or size of the transmitted Exclusive message Ge How to calculate the checksum hexadecimal numbers are indicated by H The checksum is a value derived by adding the address size and checksum itself and inverting the lower 7 bits Here s an example of how the check sum is calculated We will assume that in the Exclusive message we are transmitting the address is aa bb cc ddH and the data or size is ee ffH aa bb cc dd ee ff sum sum 128 quotient remainder 128 remainder checksum Example1 Setting CHORUS TYPE to DELAY DT1 According to the Parameter Address Map p 164 the start address of Temporary Setup is 10 00 00 00H the offset address of CHORUS at Setup is 04 00H and the address of CHORUS TYPE is 00 00H Therefore the address of CHORUS TYPE of Setup is 10 00 00 00H 07 00H 00 00H 10 00 07 00H DELAY has the value of 02H So the system exclusive message should be sent is FO 41 10 000043 12 10 00 07 00 02 2 F7 1 2 3 4 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 4 Model ID RD 700SX 5 Command ID DT1 3 Device ID 17 6 End of Exclusive Then calculate the checksum 10H 00H 07H 00H 02H 16 0 7 0
285. lease Time 64 63 Higher values produce longer decay Offset set lower values for a clear cut sound 77 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT The process of changing tone parameters to create the tones you like and changing the settings for various functions is known as editing When EDIT is pressed and the indicator is lit the RD 700SX switches to Edit mode You can save edited settings to Setups Edited settings are discarded when the RD 700SX s power is turned off so be sure that any settings you want to keep are saved to a Setup For details refer to Storing Settings to Setups WRITE p 58 System function 0 System settings are saved the instant a change is made in any of the parameter values Therefore no changes to the settings are lost even when the power is turned off Parameters That Can Be Set You can set the following parameters in Edit mode Master Tune Master Volume EQ Mode Pedal Mode Tone Remain Clock Source Clock Out SETUP Control Channel Device ID USB Driver Damper Polarity FC1 Polarity FC2 Polarity Display Mode Part Mode Temperament Temperament Key Stretch Tune Rx GM GM2 System ON Rx GS Reset Key Touch Key Touch Offset Velocity Velocity Delay Sensitivity Velocity Keyfollow Sensitivity FC1 Pedal Assign FC2 Pedal Assign Control Knob Assign Slider Assign Harmonic Bar MEX Structure MFX1 Source MEX2 Source MFX1 Destination Type MEX
286. lies a 3D effect to the flanger sound The flanger sound will be Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound n Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right 5 ds SEN EH EE SCH Assignable Parameters Negative settings will invert the MFX Control Depth Rate Feedback Balance phase Step Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is Parameter Value Description synchronized with the tempo Filter Type OFF Type of filter StepRate Hz 0 10 20 00 Rate period of pitch change Hz LPF OFF no filter is used Hz HPF LPF cuts the frequency range above Step Rate note 1 Rate period of pitch change note the Cutoff Freq b HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Output Mode SPEAKER Adjusts the method that will be used to Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter PHONES hear the sound that is output to the Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from when the OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect direct sound begins until the flanger will be achieved if you select SPEAKER sounds heard when using speakers or PHONES when Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is using headphones synchronized with the tempo Tow Gam 15 15 dB Gam of the low range Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz High Gain 15 115 dB Gain of the high range Hz Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct n note 1
287. lighter setting than LIGHT LIGHT This sets the keyboard to a light touch You can achieve fortissimo ff play with a less forceful touch than usual so the keyboard feels lighter This setting makes it easy to play even for children MEDIUM This sets the keyboard to the standard touch You can play with the most natural touch This is the closest to the touch of an acoustic piano HEAVY This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch You have to finger the keyboard more forcefully than usual in order to play fortissimo ff so the keyboard touch feels heavier Dynamic fingering adds even more feeling to what you play SUPER HEAVY An even heavier setting than HEAVY NOTE This setting is switched automatically according to the value of Key Touch Offset which follows NOTE Changing this setting also changes the Key Touch setting in Edit Mode p 83 Making Detailed Settings for the ONE TOUCH Tones Making Fine Adjustments to the Keyboard Touch Key Touch Offset This setting provides even more precise adjustment of the key touch than available with the Key Touch setting alone This allows you to adjust between Key Touch settings values Parameter Value Velo Keyfolw Sens 63 63 Parameter Value Description Key Touch 10 9 The touch sensitivity becomes Offset heavier as the value increases NOTE When this setting
288. locity Max p 69 E HERR Zone Info Velocity Range p 69 Equalizer Preventing equalizer settings from being switched EUER EDIT 0 System EQ Mode p 80 Setting the Equalizer EQUALIZER knob p 44 OE PIANO EDIT EQ p 74 LR EN E PIANO EDIT EQ p 77 Pitch and Tuning Changing the pitch for the entire RD 700 PEERS EDIT 0 System Master Tune p 27 Transposing the entire keyboard TRNSPOSE p 42 Changing the pitch for each Tone INIM ELE IM RUE CLE Tone Info Coarse Tune p 71 dai GU d OUT huu sal Zone Info Fine Tune p 71 ME EDIT 0 System Stretch Tune p 82 Changing the pitch for each INTERNAL Zone EE Zone Info Transpose p 69 Changing the pitch for each EXTERNAL Zone sat HR EXTERNAL INTERNAL Transpose p 66 Changing the temperament pm EDIT 0 System Temperament p 82 Changing the pitch for each key of Piano Tone woud viel Gaels Jeb PIANO EDIT Micro Tune p 75 Effects Reverb Chorus Multi Effects Changing the amount of reverb for the entire RD 700SX m REVERB knob p 43 Changing the amount of reverb for each Tone ne Tone Info Reverb Amount p 71 Changing the amount of reverb for Piano Tone RS etre ERE SEES PIANO EDIT Reverb Level p 73 Changing the reverb type EDIT 3 Effects Reverb Type p 87 Changing the amount of chorus for the entire RD 700 TEES CHORUS knob p 43 Changing the amount of cho
289. low This is a stereo chorus A filter is provided so that you can adjust the frequency rotor to reach the newly timbre of tie chorus sound selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Assignable Parameters Lower values will require longer times MEX Control Depth Rate Balance Wf Level 0 127 Volume of the low frequency rotor Tw Slow Rate 0 05 10 00 Settings of the high frequency rotor Parameter Value Description Hz The parameters are the same as for the Filter Type OFF LPF Type of filter Tw Fast Rate 0 05 10 00 low frequency rotor HPF OFF No filter is used Hz LPF Cuts the frequency range above Tweeter Accel 0 15 the Cutoff Freq Tweeter Level 0 127 HPF Cuts the frequency range below Separation 0 127 Spatial dispersion of the sound the Cutoff Freq Level 0 127 Output Level Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard 22 VK ROTARY Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is This type provides modified response for the rotary speaker with the synchronized with the tempo low end boosted further Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz This effect is a descendant of the Roland VK Series built in rotary Hz b note 1 Frequency of modulation note speaker Rate Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Assignable Parameters Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound MEX Con
290. lue or switches it off TONE SELECT Buttons Numeric Keys When NUM LOCK is on lit numerical values can be input directly using the TONE SELECT buttons which then serve as 0 9 numeric keys When you enter the number the value will blink This indicates that the value has not yet been finalized To finalize the value press ENTER With some parameters NUM LOCK may come on automatically allowing you to input numerical values directly with the TONE SELECT buttons Only numerical values can be entered using the numeric keys To switch the positive or negative signs for numerical values and make continuous changes in the numerical values press INC or DEC Listening to the Demo DEMO PLAY Here s how to listen to these songs The RD 7008X features the internal demo songs that exhibit the special capabilities NOE of the instrument All rights reserved No Song Name Composer Copyright Unauthorized use of this 01 Take a Break Scott Tibbs 2004 Roland Corporation material for purposes other than private personal 02 Superior Grand Scott Tibbs 2004 Roland Corporation Ste enjoyment is a violation of 03 Everything Cool Scott Tibbs 2004 Roland Corporation applicable laws 04 Tone Preview Scott Tibbs 2004 Roland Corporation Demo song 04 Tone Preview makes effective use of the internal tones A total of ten pieces are offered one for each TONE CATEGORY EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZON
291. manent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result Do not put anything that contains water e g flower vases on this unit Also avoid the use of insecticides perfumes alcohol nail polish spray cans etc near the unit Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry soft cloth CAUTION position does not interfere with its proper venti The unit should be located so that its location or lation This RD 700SX for use only with Roland stand KS 17 Use with other stands or carts is capable AN of resulting in instability causing possible injury Always grasp only the plug on the power supply cord when plugging into or unplugging from an Gi outlet or this unit power plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs Also disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire At regular intervals you should unplug the O Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit Never handle the power cord or its plugs with d wet hands when plugging into or unplugging S from an o
292. mber in which 40 00H 64 x 12480 8192 is 0 so this Pitch Bend Value is 28 00H 40 00H 40 x 1280 64 x 124 80 5120 8192 3072 If the Pitch Bend Sensitivity is set to 2 semitones 8192 00 00H will cause the pitch to change 200 cents so in this case 200 x 3072 8192 75 cents of Pitch Bend is being applied to MIDI channel 11 lt Example4 gt B3 64 00 65 00 06 OC 26 00 64 7F 65 7F BnH is the Control Change status and n is the MIDI channel number For Control Changes the 2nd byte is the control number and the 3rd byte is the value In a case in which two or more messages consecutive messages have the same status MIDI has a provision called running status which allows the status byte of the second and following messages to be omitted Thus the above messages have the following meaning B3 6400 MIDI ch 4 lower byte of RPN parameter number 00H B3 6500 MIDI ch 4 upper byte of RPN parameter number 00H B3 060C MIDI ch 4 upper byte of parameter value DCH B3 2600 MIDI ch 4 lower byte of parameter value 00H B3 647F MIDI ch 4 lower byte of RPN parameter number 7FH B3 657F MIDI ch 4 upper byte of RPN parameter number 7FH In other words the above messages specify a value of 0C 00H for RPN parameter number 00 00H on MIDI channel 4 and then set the RPN parameter number to 7F 7FH RPN parameter number 00 00H is Pitch Bend Sensitivity and the MSB of the value indicates semitone units so a value
293. mbourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine ShakeTambourine 55 Pop Splash Cymbal Rock Splsh Cymbal Pop Splsh Cymbal TR909 Ride House Splash Cymbal HEN Cha Cha Cowbell Cha Cha Cowbell Cha Cha Cowbell Cha Cha Cowbell House Cowbell 57 Pop Crash Cymbal 2 Rock Chinese Cymbal 2 Jazz Crash Cymbal 2 House Crash Cymbal HouseCrash Cymbal EH Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Pop RideCymbal 2 Pop Ride Cymbal 1 Pop Ride Cymbal 1 Pop Ride Cymbal 2 Pop Ride Cymbal 2 60 Bongo Hi Bongo Hi Bongo Hi House Bongo Hi House Bongo Hi Kil Bongo Lo Bongo Lo Bongo Lo House Bongo Lo House Bongo Lo 62 Conga Mute Conga Mute Conga Mute House Conga Hi House Conga Hi eco Conga Hi Conga Hi Conga Hi House Conga Mt House Conga Mt 64 Conga Lo Conga Lo Conga Lo House Conga Lo House Conga Lo 65 Timbale Hi Timbale Hi Timbale Hi Timbale Hi Timbale Hi EZE Timbale Lo Timbale Lo Timbale Lo Timbale Lo Timbale Lo 67 Agogo Bell Hi Agogo Bell Hi Agogo Bell Hi Agogo Bell Hi Agogo Bell Hi LEM Agogo Bell Lo Agogo Bell Lo Agogo Bell Lo Agogo Bell Lo Agogo Bell Lo 69 Shaker 2 Shaker 2 Shaker 2 Cabasa Cabasa a Shaker 3 Shaker 3 Shaker 3 House Maracas House Maracas Whistle Short EXC2 Whistle Short EXC2 Whistle Short EXC2 Whistle Short EXC2 Whistle Short EXC2 72 Whistle Long EXC2 Whistle Long EXC2 Whistle Long EXC2 Whistle Long EXC2 Whistle Long EXC2 E Guiro Short EXC3 Guiro Short EXC3 Guiro Short EXC3 Guiro Short EXC3 Guiro Short EXC3 74 Guiro Long EXC3 Guiro Long EXC3 Guiro Long
294. me balance between the direct D0 100W sound D and the tremolo chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 28 SPACE D This is a multiple chorus that applies two phase modulation in stereo It gives no impression of modulation but produces a transparent 118 Assignable Parameters MFX Control Depth Rate Balance chorus effect Parameter Value Description Assignable Parameters Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct MFX Control Depth Rate Balance sound until the chorus sound is heard Parameter Value Description Rate Mode HZ note 5 cd Sus RSC Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct n sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate Hz oe Frequency of modulation Hz Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is note 1 Frequency of modulation note See m tempo Rate b Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Hz Pre Delay 0 20 Adjusts the differences in Pre Delay Rate b note 1 Frequency of modulation note Deviat between each chorus sound Depth 0127 Depth of modulation Depth 20 20 Adjusts the difference in modulation Ph 0 180d Spatial Tofthesound Deviation depth between each chorus sound ase CR pa a Spies gore 30 Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Balance D100
295. mpets or other transposed instruments The reference Transpose setting is C4 and the setting can be adjusted in semitone units in a range of 48 0 48 CHORUS DELAY ROOM minm E BIR 3 CLAV EPIANO MALLET ZONE SELECT LOWER R1 nore Note messages from MIDI IN connector will not be transposed EXPANSION FUNCTION NUM EDT write OCK Too voice 7 muy ORGAN STRINGS P NDS SC GM2 U U U v V Hold down TRANSPOSE for several seconds A screen such as the following appears and the current value of the setting is displayed Hold down TRANSPOSE and press a key For example to have E sound when you play C on the keyboard hold down TRANSPOSE and press the E4 key The degree of transposition then becomes 4 When you release TRANSPOSE the previous display will reappear When the amount of transposition is set the Transpose function switches on and TRANSPOSE lights up When the transpose value is set to 0 the button s indicator will remain dark even if you press the TRANSPOSE To turn off Transpose press TRANSPOSE so that its indicator goes off The next time TRANSPOSE is pressed the sound is transposed by an amount
296. n a zone s ZONE SWTICH indicator is lit on the zone sounds when the keyboard is played The screen Zone names are indicated in uppercase letters When a zone s ZONE SWITCH indicator is not lighted off the zone does not sound even when the keyboard is played The screen Zone names are not indicated Only UPPERI appears in lowercase ZONE SWITCH will turn on or off each time you press it ZONE LEVEL Slider MEMO Use the VOLUME slider when adjusting the overall volume When a zone s ZONE SWITCH indicator is not lighted no sound is produced for the level p 24 zone even when the slider is moved Adjusts the volume of an individual zone NOTE Zones to which tones from external sound modules are assigned are called Xou cannot adjustithe volume EXTERNAL Zones With the RD 7008X you can control both the External and oo INTERNAL Z in the same manner For more on the control of EXTERNAL e ones in the same er Por more on tie co ZONE LEVEL is lit Zone refer to Adjusting the Volume of Each Zone EXTERNAL Zone p 64 Performing with the Keyboard Transposing the Key of the Keyboard TRANSPOSE You can transpose performances without changing the keys you are playing as well as change the pitch by an octave This feature is called Transpose This is a convenient feature to use when you want to match the pitch of the keyboard performance to a vocalist s pitch or perform using the printed music for tru
297. n external MIDI device 108 Tones Are Altered Did you call up a Setup When a Setup is called up the current Tone effect and other settings are disabled and the selected Setup goes into effect p 56 Resave required settings to a Setup p 58 Did you press ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO When ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO is pressed the current Tone effect and other settings are disabled and settings for use in piano performances go into effect p 32 Resave required settings to a Setup p 58 Troubleshooting Problem Check Solution Problem Check Solution Is the Tone Control function assigned to Is a TW Organ 1 10 Tone selected the MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL knob Effects are applied differently to the Tone Check the Control Knob Assign settings Wheel than they are with other effects in Edit mode p 85 Effects set in Effects MFX Source p 86 lied dl f each Part When a mono connection is used the q AER ON DR pe E re T A tone quality can vary depending on the Part Parameter settings p 92 or the ones Are tone selected and the register in which it MEX ine f hT h T Altered is 1824 un Se or each Tone in the Tone 2 e nfo p 68 Tor optimal listening quality When Tone Wheel is selected for e dd so ede multiple Parts it is applied to all the M e one SN dwh LAN Parts regardless of whether the Rx Xon t ped A E ACER Pitch Bend and Rx
298. n more than one parameter is present in a screen the name and value of the parameter to be changed is shown with a box around it This box is referred to as the cursor The cursor is moved with the CURSOR buttons d 120 NIIS e TRA LHA UPR URL URL aM 12 EU H 127 UREA FUL FUL am lui 8FU LF L 1127 Cursor luz FUL FUL 1127 Che Ranae Louer Additionally when multiple parameters are presented horizontally in a row as shown in the EXTERNAL screen you can get the cursor to move more rapidly by holding down the CURSOR button that points in the direction you want the cursor to move while you also press the CURSOR button that points in the opposite direction S URSO Changing the Settings Values ONE TOUCH ZONE SELECT JM EXPANSION FUNCTION LOWER 1 UPPER 1 O NUM MELDE O LowER2 UPPER2 O EDIT WRITE LOCK TV GE on TONE SELECT pemo A x SUITAR BRASS eer om PIANO EPIANO MALLET ORGAN STRINGS COCO When changing settings values you can use DEC and INC or the TONE SELECT buttons numeric keys DEC INC Pressing INC increases the value and DEC decreases it Keep the button pressed for continuous adjustment For faster value increases keep INC pressed down and press DEC For decreasing value faster keep DEC pressed down and press INC Simultaneously pressing DEC and INC sets that parameter to the standard default va
299. n off the power until COMPLETED appears in the display Unavailable while in Rec Mode This is displayed when the EXTERNAL INTERNAL button is pressed with Rec Mode ON When Rec Mode is ON you cannot change the External settings To make changes to the External settings set Rec Mode to OFF p 101 Memory Full There is not sufficient space left on the user memory Delete files stored on the RD 700SX memory File Exists Overwrite OK A file with the same name is already exists If you execute the procedure the file will be overwrite If you don t want to overwrite change a filename Can not Save The save could not be performed correctly The internal memory capacity of the RD 700SX may be full Delete files stored on the RD 700SX memory Can not Delete The data cannot be deleted Select the File Type to ALL FILES in the DELETE screen then repeat the procedure Panel is Locked Buttons will not function Press EXIT to cancel Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description M U Iti Effects Pa ra mete r APhase Low OFF ON Turns the Anti Phase function on and Sw off for the Low frequenc
300. n setting Because of this certain effects settings can cause notes that were until then sounding to no longer be heard even though Tone Remain has been set to ON NOTE Even if Tone Remain is set to ON the sound of the current tone is not carried over when changing from a Virtual Tonewheel tone to a non Virtual Tonewheel tone Changing the Clock Timing Source Clock Source You can control the tempo from an external MIDI device Set this to MIDI when synchronizing to the clock tempo of an external MIDI device Parameter Value Description Clock Source INT Synchronized to the internal clock MIDI Synchronized to the external MIDI device s clock The tempo indication 4 changes to Mz for each screen Internal tempo settings are made in the Tone screen p 29 the Rhythm Edit screen p 93 the Arpeggio Edit Screen p 93 Song Rhythm Arpeggio screen p 29 and Virtual Tonewheel Screen p 29 NOTE The tempo cannot be set if Clock Source is set to MIDI without there being any external MIDI device connected This can result in Arpeggios p 46 and Rhythms p 48 not sounding and may change the manner in which certain effects are applied Transmitting Synchronization Messages Clock Out This setting determines whether or not the MIDI messages necessary to synchronize the RD 700SX with external devices are to be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector Paramet
301. n the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Fingr Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Parameter Value Description Fin Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz Hz Fin Rate b note 1 Frequency of modulation note Flngr Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Fingr Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Fingr Bal D100 0W Adjusts the volume balance between the D0 100W sound that is sent through the flanger W and the sound that is not sent through the flanger D Level 0 127 Output Level 68 OVDRV DELAY OVERDRIVE DELAY This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in series Assignable Parameters MFX Control Delay Bal Overdrive Drive Parameter Value Description Overdrive 0 127 Degree of distortion Drive Also changes the volume Overdrive Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Delay Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Delay ms 1 2600 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Hz b note 1 Adjusts the delay time from the direct Delay sound until the delay sound is heard note Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into th
302. nance that rises and falls like a jet the input Negative settings will airplane taking off or landing A filter is provided so that you can invert the phase 2 The effect becomes more prominent as adjust the timbre of the flanged sound NS the value is increased Assignable Parameters Step Rate 0 10 20 00 Adjust the rate period of pitch change MEX Control Rate Feedback Balance Hz note 2 Step Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the Parameter Value Description value of the desired note Filter Type OFF Select the type of filter Phase 0 180 degree Adjust the spatial spread of the sound LPF OFF a filter will not be used Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency HPF LPF cut the frequency range above range the cutoff frequency Positive settings will emphasize HPF cut the frequency range below boost the low frequency range the cutoff frequency High Gain 15 15dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Adjust the basic frequency of the filter range Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the Positive settings will emphasize direct sound begins until the flanger boost the high frequency range sound is heard Balance D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the rate of modulation D0 100W direct sound and the flanger sound Hz With a setting of D100 0W only the Depth 0 127 Adjust t
303. nes simultaneously Parts are where Tones that are created when the RD 7005X is used as a sound generator are assigned Since different Tones can be assigned to each of the Parts and controlled individually you can have multiple Tones play simultaneously divide the keyboard into separate ranges and have different Tones sound in the different parts Split and enjoy playing ensemble performances The sixteen Parts played by the RD 700SX s internal sound generator are referred to as Internal Parts Zone The RD 700SX features four Parts UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWERI and LOWER that you can use for freely controlling the Internal Parts with the RD 700SX s buttons and keyboard These four Parts that are used for controlling the Internal Parts are collectively known as the INTERNAL Zone Four of the sixteen Internal Parts are assigned to the INTERNAL Zone for control the RHYTHM Part is fixed at Part 10 Furthermore you can freely control external MIDI sound generators with the RD 700SX in the same manner as with the INTERNAL Zone You can likewise control the external MIDI sound generator with the four Parts UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWERI and LOWER2 with this group of four Parts being referred to as the EXTERNAL Zone The external MIDI sound generator is assigned to these three Parts for control the RHYTHM Part can also be partially set Basic Operation Main Screens ONE TOUCH Screen When ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO is pre
304. ng during playback original screen to the display Press EXIT or F1 EXIT while the song is stopped to finish with the Demo screen You are returned to the Tone screen Performing with the Keyboard Piano Performances ONE TOUCH Now try performing with the piano With the RD 700SxX you can call up the optimal settings for piano performances with the press of a single button You can also select your preferred tones and settings and store them to the instrument s buttons Gaga TY ad ZONE SWITCH CONTROL 1 ONE een ZONE SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION cor Re Low MD High LOWER 1 UPPER 1 NTROL ene ote PE one REVERB CHORUS DELAY ff MULTIEFFECTS o Room ON OFF 2 3 lt 9 t s m TONE SELECT clays EPIANO MALLET ORGAN STRINGS T y T T T O HALL DEPTH O CATHEDRAL gts Press ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO Note Pressing ONE TOUCH FIAHO A PIANO or E PIANO restores all of the settings is superior except for the Piano Edit p 73 k iaa ss or Electric Piano Edit p 76 TT Grand p settings to their status at the time the power was turned on Pressing ONE TOUCH PIANO sets the entire keyboard to play with the piano If you want to p
305. ng other controllers p 155 F1 TONE INFO This allows you to change the tone settings p 70 You can also use this to assign functions in some screens F2 ZONE INFO This allows you to change the zone settings p 68 You can also use this to assign functions in some screens ENTER This is used to finalize a value or execute an operation 7 CONTRAST knob Adjusts the display s contrast p 26 8 CURSOR S LA LIP LE Press these to switch pages and to move the cursor DEC INC This is used to modify values If you keep on holding down one button while pressing the other the value change accelerates 10 ONE TOUCH PIANO Selects the optimum settings for piano performances p 32 E PIANO Selects the optimum settings for E piano performances p 32 ONE TOUCH ZONE SELECT O LOWER 1 UPPER 1 O O PIANO E m Es O LOWER2 UPPER2 O TONE SELECT GUITAR BRASS VOICE RHY MALLET ORGAN STRINGS PAI BASS WINDS SYNTH GM2 SETUP Calls up the stored settings Setup p 56 11 ZONE SELECT buttons Selects the zone for which the tone is to be selected p 40 12 EXPANSION A B This selects a sound from a wave expansion board sold separately p 35 13 FUNCTION EDIT Press this button when you wish to adjust various settings p 78 WRITE Stores the current settings to Setup p 58 NUM LOCK You can input numerical values with the TONE SELECT buttons when
306. nge HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range BYPASS sound fed back to the effect is filtered Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct out If you do not want to filter out any D0 100W sound D and the effect sound W high frequencies set this parameter to Level 0 127 Output level BYPASS Delay1 Level 0 127 Volume of each delay Delay2 Level 50 REVERSE DLY REVERSE DELAY Delay3 Level This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and delayed sound to the Delay4 Level input sound A tap delay is connected immediately after the reverse Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range delay High Gain 15 4 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct Assignable Parameters D0 100W sound D and the delay sound W MFX Control Balance Rev Dly Rev Dly Pan Level 9127 Output level Parameter Value Description Threshold 0 127 Volume at which the reverse delay will begin to be applied Rev Dly Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Rev Dly ms 1 1300 ms Delay time from when sound is input into the reverse delay until the delay sound is heard Hz b note 1 Delay time from when sound is input Rev Dly into the reverse delay until the delay sound is heard note Rev Dly Fbk 98 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of
307. nnel will be turned off OG Reset All Controllers Controller number 121 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 79H 00H n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 When this message is received the following controllers will be set to their reset values Controller Reset value Pitch Bend Change 0 center Channel Pressure 0 off Modulation 0 off Breath Type 0 min Expression 127 max Hold 1 0 off Sostenuto 0 off Soft 0 off Hold 2 0 off RPN unset previously set data will not change NRPN unset previously set data will not change AII Notes Off Controller number 123 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7BH 00H n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 When AII Notes Off is received all notes on the corresponding channel will be turned off However if Hold 1 or Sostenuto is ON the sound will be continued until these are turned off OMNI OFF Controller number 124 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7CH 00H n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 Thesame processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received OMNI ON Controller number 125 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7DH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received OMNI ON will not be turned on MONO Controller number 126 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7EH mmH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm mono number 0
308. nol 87 6 4 65 TW Organ 3 112 0 3 116 Silky Way 87 69 2 25 60 sE Piano2 87 6 5 66 TW Organ 4 112 0 4 117 Lunar Strngs 87 69 3 26 Phaser EP 87 65 6 67 TW Organ5 112 0 5 118 Nu Epic Pad 87 69 4 27 StageCabinet 87 65 7 68 TW Organ 6 112 0 6 119 Strings Pad 87 69 5 28 NY E Piano 87 65 8 69 TW Organ 7 112 0 7 120 Mashy Scene 87 69 6 29 SX E Piano 2 87 65 9 70 TW Organ 8 112 0 8 121 Side Band X 87 69 7 30 FME Piano 87 65 10 71 TW Organ 9 112 0 9 122 R amp B SoftPad 87 69 8 31 60 sE Piano3 87 65 11 72 TW Organ 10 112 0 10 123 Glass Organ 87 69 9 32 70 s EPiano 87 65 12 73 XPercOrgan 87 6 1 124 Evolution X 87 69 10 33 Psycho EP 87 65 13 74 Rock Organ 87 6 2 125 Whisper Pad 87 69 11 34 EP Belle 87 65 14 75 Zepix Organ 87 67 3 126 Combination 87 69 12 35 D 50 E Piano 87 65 15 76 Gospel Spin 87 67 4 127 HumanKindnes 87 69 13 36 Pro Stage 87 65 16 77 Mellow Bars 87 67 5 128 StellarTreck 87 69 14 37 Vintage EP 1 87 65 17 78 Perc Organ 1 87 67 6 129 Jupiter X 87 69 15 38 Vintage EP 2 87 65 18 79 FullDraw Org 87 67 7 130 Mash Pad 87 69 16 39 S A E P 87 65 19 80 FullStops 87 67 8 131 InfinitePhsr 87 69 17 40 Hard 60 s EP 87 65 20 81 British B 87 67 9 132 Flange Dream 87 69 18 41 E Grand 87 65 A 82 PercOrgan2 8 67 10 133 Morph Filter 87 69 19 83 Perc B 87 67 11 134 Jupiter 2005 87 69 20 84 60 s Organ 87 67 12 85 Surf s Up 87 67 13 86 R amp B Organ 87 67 14 87 Rocker Spin 87 67 15 88 Purple Spin 87 67 16 89 Massive Pipe 87 67 17 90 Mid Pipe Org
309. nstalling SRX Series Boards Before installing any Wave Expansion Board turn off the power on the RD 700SX and all devices connected to it Refer to the following illustration of the RD 700SX s rear panel and remove the screws indicated Then remove the cover RCA e H EXPANSION D E BOARD e PS PUSH You can remove the cover easily by pressing on the lower part of the cover above the pusH mark push Insert the Wave Expansion Board connector into a connector for an SRX Series slot SRX A or SRX B while simultaneously inserting the board holders into the holes in the Wave Expansion Board Wave Expansion Board SRX series won If the same type of Wave Expansion Board is installed in the SRX A slot and the SRX B slot it will only be possible to select data from the Wave Expansion Board that was installed in the SRX A slot Board holder e Position them as shown before you install the board Connector 16 Getting Ready Use the Installation Tool supplied with the Wave Expansion Board to turn the holders in the LOCK direction so the board will be fastened in place Lo s Use the screws that you removed in step 2 to fasten the cover back in place Checking the Installed Wave Expansion Boards After installation of the Wave Expansion Boards has been completed check to confirm that the installed boards are being recognized correctly EQUALIZER EFFEC
310. nt LCA i Vis enlever e d H EXPANSION H BOARD e PS PUSH Il est facile d enlever le couvercle il suffit d appuyer sur la partie inf rieure du couvercle au dessus du symbole pusH push 3 Inserer le connecteur de la carte dans un des creneaux pour la serie SRX SRX A SRX B tout en enfoncant les supports a carte dans les trous de celle ci Carte d extension Wave serie SRX Support carte e Avant l installation orienter les supports carte tel qu indiqu sur le sch ma Connecteur 19 French language for Canadian Safety Standard Getting Ready Pour tourner les supports en position LOCK verrouille utilisez l outil d installation de la carte d extension fournie a cet effet De cette facon la carte sera bien fixee a sa place e SE e L ee E D Outil instat 77 o Reposez le couvercle en remettant les vis enlevees comme specifie a l etape 2 5 Verification des cartes d extension audio apres installation Lorsque l installation des cartes d extension audio est terminee proceder a une verification pour s assurer que l ordinateur les identifie correctement EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL of lt S g Ss s m T Si la meme sorte de carte d extension Wave est installee dans les creneaux SRX A et SRX B il ne sera possible de selectionner que les donnees dela cart
311. nt parameter Tone Info Reverb Amount will change OEffect 3 Chorus Send Level Controller number 93 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5DH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Chorus Send Level 00H 7FH 0 127 The Chorus Amount parameter Tone Info Chorus Amount will change ORPN MSB LSB Controller number 100 101 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 65H mmH BnH 64H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm upper byte MSB of parameter number specified by RPN 11 lower byte LSB of parameter number specified by RPN lt lt lt RPN gt gt gt Control Changes include RPN Registered Parameter Numbers which are extended When using RPNs first RPN Controller numbers 100 and 101 they can be sent in any order should be sent in order to select the parameter then Data Entry Controller numbers 6 and 38 should be sent to set the value Once RPN messages are received Data Entry messages that is received at the same MIDI channel after that are recognized as changing toward the value of the RPN messages In order not to make any mistakes transmitting RPN Null is recommended after setting parameters you need This device receives the following RPNs RPN Data entry MSB LSB MSB LSB 00H 00H mmH IIH Notes Pitch Bend Sensitivity mm 00H 18H 0 24 semitones Il ignored processed as 00H Up to 2 octave can be specified in semitone steps The Bend Range parameter Tone Info Ben
312. nt to cut the high frequencies of the delay Assignable Parameters feedback set this parameter to BYPASS MFX Control Flngr Bal Delay Bal Fingr Rate Delay Bal D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the 1454 D y D0 100W fla zer sound thal issant through the The parameters are the same as for LE FLANGER gt DELAY delay and the flanger sound that is not However the Delay Bal parameter adjusts the volume balance sent through the delay With a setting of between the direct sound and the delay sound D100 0W only the flanger sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound that is sent 1 25 C HO FLNGR C HORUS FLANGE R through the delay will be output This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in parallel The parameters Level OE Adjust the output level are the same as for 122 CHORUS FLANGER However the Flg 122 CHO FLANGR CHORUS gt FLANGER This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in series Assignable Parameters MFX Control Chorus Bal Fingr Bal Chorus Rate FIngr Rate Parameter Value Description Chorus PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the modulation speed of the Hz chorus effect Chorus Depth 0 127 Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect Chorus Bal D100 0W D0 100W Adjust the volume balance betw
313. o Rhythm Set List p 149 If multiple tones are playing do not press the ONE TOUCH PIANO button but instead select the zone containing the tone to be changed using the ZONE SELECT buttons Refer to Changing the Tone for a Zone p 40 EM Tones selected with RHY GM2 are registered in the following order Rhythm Sets GM2 Rhythm Sets and GM2 Tones Refer to the Rhythm Set List p 149 Performing with the Keyboard Selecting Wave Expansion Board Tones Up to two optional wave expansion boards SRX series can be installed into the RD 700SX Use the following procedure when selecting tones stored on an wave expansion board ZONE SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION LOWER 1 UPPER 1 Nu EDT wame LOCK CT CI minm Press ONE TOUCH PIANO or E PIANO This selects a single tone to be played over the entire keyboard For instructions on installing the Expansion Board refer to Installing the Wave Expansion Board p 15 Press EXPANSION A or B to make its indicator light 42120 TOHE dF ADAL PremierGrand MEMD For more on the wave If you hold down EXPANSION A or B for seve
314. o the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About N WARNING and N CAUTION Notices Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe WARNING injury should the unit be used improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly N CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets Before using this unit make sure to read the instructions below and the Owner s Manual Connect mains plug of this model to a mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection tions on the unit The only exception would be where this manual provides specific instructions which should be followed in order to put in place user installable options see p 15 Do not open or perform any internal modifica within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Do not attempt to
315. oan ne aan S E SES Ee H H H H 00 00 00 40 Total Size 4 04H 36 24H 68 44H 100 64H EE A DE DU EE 5 05H 37 25H 69 45H 101 65H 6 06H 38 26H 70 46H 102 66H SETUP Part 7 07H 39 27H 71 47H 103 67H p Part Number 0 F Partl p 0 Part2 p 1 Parti g Se 2 288 H SE e Ge 2 H H H H 10 OAH 42 2AH 74 4AH 106 6AH 11 OBH 43 2BH 75 4BH 107 6BH 10 00 2p 00 0000 aaaa Receive Channel 0 15 Me SE A zen us dcr e s 1 16 10 00 2p 01 0000 000a Mute Switch 0 1 Se Se i S EH d SC See ae OFF ON FH FH FH FH eee afe er pe the ou ee ee EE toe eee 16 10H 48 30H 80 50H 112 70H 10 00 2p 02 0aaa aaaa Tone Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 17 11H 49 31H 81 5iH 113 71H 10 00 2p 03 0aaa aaaa Tone Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 18 12H 50 32H 82 52H 114 72H 10 00 2p 04 0aaa aaaa Tone Program Changes 0 127 n TE SS ae Sa SE TA i 10 00 2p 05 Oaaa aaaa Part Level CC 7 0 127 21 15H 53 35H 85 55H 117 75H 10 00 2p 06 0aaa aaaa Part Pan CC 10 0 127 22 16H 54 36H 86 56H 118 76H 23 17H 55 37H 87 57H 119 77H 24 18H 56 38H 88 58H 120 78H 10 00 2p 07 0aaa aaaa Coarse Tune 16 112 25 19H 57 39H 89 59H 121 79H 48 48 26 1AH 58 3AH 90 5AH 122 7AH 10 00 2p 08 Qaaa aaaa Fine Tune 14 114 27 1BH 59 3BH 91 5BH 123 7BH 50 50 28 1CH 60 3CH 92 5CH 124 7CH 10 00 2p 09 0000 00aa Mono Poly 0 2 29 1DH 61 3DH 93 5DH 125 7DH MONO POLY MONO LEGATO 30 1EH 62 3EH 94 5EH 126 7EH 10 00 2p 0A 000a aaaa Pitch Bend Range 0
316. of accents and the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the arpeggio A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel Parameter Value Arp Accent 0 100 Changing the Octave Range in Arpeggio Style Arpeggio Octave Range Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take place If you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you actually play set this parameter to 0 To have the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave higher set this parameter to 1 A setting of 1 will make the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave lower Parameter Value Arp Octave Range 3 3 Continuing Arpeggios Even After the Keys Are Released Arpeggio Hold When the hold setting is switched on you can have arpeggios continue to play even after you release the keys Parameter Value Description Arp Hold ON Arpeggios continue to play even after the keys are released OFF Arpeggios stop playing when the keys are released The ARPEGGIO indicator flashes when the Arpeggio Hold is set to ON Switching Hold On and Off with the Buttons Even when not in the Edit screen you can use the buttons to turn the Hold function on and off e Hold down ARPEGGIO and press CONTROL ZONE LEVEL Hold is turned on or off each time the button is pressed About V LINK V LINK HAAS is a fun
317. of the tremolo effect Post Gain 0 6 12 Adjust the output gain Balance D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the 18 dB D0 100W direct sound and the tremolo chorus Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the low frequency gain sound With a setting of D100 0W only Positive settings will emphasize the direct sound will be output and boost the low frequency range with a setting of D0 100W only the High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the high frequency gain tremolo chorus sound will be output Positive settings will emphasize Level 0 127 Adjust the output level boost the high frequency range Level 0 127 Adjust the output level stereo It gives no impression of modulation but produces a transparent chorus effect Assignable Parameters MFX Control Rate Balance Parameter Value Description Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the rate of modulation Hz Depth 0 127 Adjust the depth of modulation Phase 0 180 degree Adjust the spatial spread of the sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Adjust the volume
318. offers the perfect look and presence on stage The panel s refined design enhances operability while rear cable connections are a cinch In addition the cover to the wave expansion board is designed so it won t easily fall off even if the screws are removed SMF Play Function The RD 700SX is compatible with both General MIDI and General MIDI 2 standards Additionally you can transmit SMF music files to the RD 700SX from the USB port and play back the data This allows you to perform while playing back SMF music files without the use of an external sequencer Convention Used in This Manual Words enclosed in square brackets indicate panel buttons Example SPLIT indicates the SPLIT button p indicates a reference page The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display Note however that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g includes newer sounds so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual Contents USING THE UNIT SAFELY oninia inten Abed in Adelie varie AE di 3 IMPORTANT NOTES nette alas 5 Main Features aa alo Panel Descriptions 12 Bront Panel see cati ISA EE 12 Rear PATS zoe se A E SPEA E en E ATAT INCL LM tor OEE Ir Ata 14 Getting Ready ul tn
319. onic piano organ string synth pad and other Tones that allow you to use the instrument as a stage piano Once you try it onstage you ll come to fully understand its capabilities Exclusive Piano Functions The Piano Edit function allows you to program subtle changes for the piano and electric piano tones p 73 A Full 128 Voices The RD 700SX features 128 voice polyphony with all sounds available in every performance mode Enjoy natural performances even when layering multiple sounds Simple Push Button Operation You can access Split Effects and carry out other main operations simply by pressing a single button p 12 Furthermore pressing the ONE TOUCH PIANO button lets you immediately switch to the settings most suited for piano performances regardless of the mode or settings currently in effect p 32 High Quality Effects In addition to two multi effects systems you can also use the reverb and chorus individually The instrument also realistically reproduces the tonal changes of an acoustic grand piano including the change in resonance created by pressing the damper pedal p 75 and the degree of openness of the grand piano s lid p 74 Moreover the Sound Control function p 44 and digital equalizer p 45 enable a wide range of tonal adjustments spp s With Organ Tone Wheel Sound Generator For organ Tones the RD 700SX comes equipped with an organ Tone wheel sound generator used in the Roland Combo O
320. onnect the USB cable before starting Service Center Note however that Roland assumes no liability including compensation for consequences arising from any loss of data EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL ONE TOUCH Erem Wem FUNCTION co 7 m1 UPPER T O iol Lower O LOWER UPPER O maurum CO E y 3 5 6 7 2 4 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENL GET MEMO 1 Key Touch Z Control Instead of selecting with the X Effectz a Sound Control CURSOR you can press TONE k SELECT 9 to display the Utility Edit screen directly 2 Press CURSOR w to select 9 Utility Press ENTER to display the Utility screen EDIT Utilits A Rec Setting i Bulk Dume Temrorara Z Bulk Dume SETUP Z Factora Reset Curnt Factor Reset AT Press CURSOR w to select Factory Reset All Getting Ready Press ENTER A screen like the one shown below appears Factory Reset All Erases entire menor content and restores factors Presets UK To cancel the Factory Reset press EXIT Press ENTER The confirmation message appears Factors Reset All Are vou Sure LEASITI LEHTEER1 To cancel the Fa
321. onnected MIDI sequencer set to MIDI Thru whereby data received from MIDI IN is then output from the MIDI OUT with no changes made to the data Recording Sequencer MIDI Thru On MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN Sound Generator Ok D Local Switch Off Section Keyboard Controller Section In this case the data sent over two paths i e the data sent directly from the keyboard controller section and the data sent from the keyboard controller section via the external sequencer ends up being sent to the sound generator section simultaneously Thus for example even when you play a C key only once the note C cannot be sounded correctly as the sound is played by the sound generator section twice Connecting External MIDI Devices Playing the RD 700SX s Internal Sound Generator from an External MIDI Device Try Playing the RD 700SX from an external MIDI Device Making Connections NOTE To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections MIDIIN TTSS 25 ees eure 4d PUSIOH aen AD 7005x Es O BES Se ss SER oo OOOO RD 700SX 1 Before starting the connection procedure make sure that the power to all devices has been turned off 2 After reading Connecting the RD 700SX to External Equi
322. or example if you want to layer a piano sound with strings together press both PIANO and STRINGS The UPPER1 and UPPER indicator automatically light up and when you begin playing the keyboard the piano and strings sounds are layered together When this is done the tone for the button that is pressed down first is assigned to UPPERI and the other tone is assigned to UPPER2 The UP1 and UP2 Part names are both highlighted in the screen with both Parts being selected Once you have selected two TONE SELECT buttons pressing either TONE SELECT button then selects that tone as the UPPER 1 tone The UPPER 2 indicator goes out and that tone stops playing The above procedure is enabled only when the UPPER 1 or UPPER 2 ZONE SELECT button is selected Playing Different Tones in Two Different Sections of the Keyboard SPLIT Such a division of the keyboard into right and left hand sections is called a Split and the key where the division takes place is called the Split Point While in Split Play a sound played in the right side is called an Upper Tone and the sound played in the left side is called a Lower Tone The split point key is included in the LOWER section The Split Point has been set at the factory to B3 MEMO EM Split Mode You can change the split point Split Point Please refer to Changing the Keyboard s Split Point p 39 EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL ONE TOUCH ZONE SE
323. ot sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output Level 75 CHO DELAY CHORUS gt DELAY This effect connects a chorus and a delay in series Assignable Parameters MFX Control Delay Bal Chorus Bal Chorus Depth Cho Rate Parameter Value Description Chorus PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Cho Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz Hz Cho Rate note 1 Frequency of modulation note cas Chorus Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Chorus Bal D100 0W Volume balance between the direct D0 100W sound D and the chorus sound W Delay Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Delay ms 1 2600 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Hz b note 1 Adjusts the delay time from the direct Delay sound until the delay sound is heard note Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Delay HF 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which Damp BYPASS sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Effect Parameter
324. ote J Quarter note de Half note triplet J Dotted quarter note J Half note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation o3 Whole note triplet Dotted half note Whole note Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Whole note triplet Dotted half note Whole note Feedback 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the chorus sound o3 Double note triplet Dotted whole note ei Double note that is fed back into the effect 2 DELAY Parameter Value Description Delay L Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Delay L ms 0 1000 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is heard Hz Delav L note Adjusts the time until the delay sound is SY T D heard note Delay R Mode ms note Settings of the Delay R Delay R ms 0 1000 ms The parameters are the same as for the Delay L DelayR PO SCH Delay C Mode ms note Settings of the Delay C Delay C ms 0 1000 ms The parameters are the same as for the Delay L DelyC te 9 e ay Center Feedbak 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000 Adjusts the frequency above which sound Hz fed back to the effect will be cut If you do BYPASS not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Left Level 0 127 Volume of ea
325. otes comprising rhythms and arpeggios and adjusts the amount of swing None Weak Strong NOTE This setting is shared by the Arpeggiator settings Parameter Value Description Rhy Arp 1 4 Quarter note Grid one grid section one beat 1 8 Eighth note two grid sections one beat 1 8L Eighth note shuffle Light two grid sections one beat with a light shuffle Parameter Value Description Rhy Arp 1 8H Eighth note shuffle Heavy Grid two grid sections one beat with a heavy shuffle 1 12 Eighth note triplet three grid sections one beat 1 16 Sixteenth note four grid sections one beat 1 16L Sixteenth note shuffle Light four grid sections one beat with a light shuffle 1 16H Sixteenth note shuffle Heavy four grid sections one beat with a heavy shuffle 1 24 Sixteenth note triplet six grid sections one beat Making the Sound More Staccato or Legato Rhythm Arpeggio Duration This sets the duration of the sound You can make it more staccato short and clipped or legato so notes are played longer Kaa This setting is shared by the Arpeggiator settings Parameter Value Description Rhy Arp 30 40 50 60 For example when set to 30 the Duration 70 80 90 length of the note in a grid or 100 120 when a series of grids is connected with ties the final grid is 30 of the full length of the note
326. ound is heard MFX Control Delay Balance Pre Delay B 0 0 500 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the E direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift Parameter Value Description Asound is heard Delay 200 1000 ms Adj st Da Une delay from e direct Pan A L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the Pitch Sound until when sach delay soundis Shift A sound L64 is far left 0 is center heard and 63R is far right Feedback FPE Adjiist the proportion of the delay Pan B L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the Pitch RAR i fedibackinto tieeffect Shift B sound L64 is far left 0 is center Negative settings will invert the and 63R is far right prose Level Bal A100 0B Adjust the volume balance between the Acceleration 0 15 This parameter adjusts the time over A0 100B Pitch Shift A and Pitch Shift B sounds which the Delay Tinewill change fromi When set to A100 0B only the sound of the current setting to a newly specified Pitch Shift A is output whemnseti setung The rate ot change for th Delay A0 100B only the sound of Pitch Shift B Time directly affects the rate of pitch is output change Balance D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the HF Damp 200 9000 apt frequency above which D0 100W direct sound and the pitch shift sound BYPASS sound fed back to the effect will be cut With a setting of D100 0W only the H you do ORNE cut fhe high direct sound will be output and with a frequencies of the feedback get this
327. ound will be output and with a Delay Right 0 1 500 0 ms Adjust the time from the direct sound setting of D0 100W only the flanger until when the right delay sound is sound will be output heard Level 0 127 Adjust the output level Phase Left NORMAL Select the phase of the left delay sound INVERT NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted Phase Right NORMAL Select the phase of the right delay INVERT sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted Feedback 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase 137 Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjust the frequency above which Level 0 127 Adjust the output level BYPASS sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this 104 TRIPLE DLY TRIPLE TAP DELAY parameter to BYPASS The Triple Tap Delay produces three delay sounds center left and Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency right range Positive settings will emphasize Assignable Parameters boost the low frequency range MFX Control Balance i i 15 j in of the h
328. pe Balance shifted sound that is fed back into the Parameter Value Description effect Negative settings will invert Type ROOM Type of reverb the phase ROOM2 ROOM1 dense reverb with short Pch1 Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the Pitch Shift 1 STAGEI decay sound STAGE2 ROOM2 sparse reverb with short Pch1 Level 0 127 Volume of the Pitch Shift1 sound HALLI decay Pch2 Coarse 24 12 semi Settings of the Pitch Shift 2 sound HALL2 STAGE1 reverb with greater late Pch2 Fine 100 100 cent The parameters are the same as for the reverberation Pch2 Delay ms note Pitch Shift 1 sound STAGE2 reverb with strong early Mode reflections Pch2 Div ms 1 1300 ms HALL1 reverb with clear Pch2 Delay note 1 reverberance D HALL2 reverb with rich reverberance Pch Feedback _ 98 98 Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct Pch2 Pan L64 63R sound until the reverb sound is heard Pch2 Level 0 127 Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which the High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range BYPASS reverberant sound will be cut Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct As the frequency is set lower more of D0 100W sound D and the pitch shifted sound the high frequencies will be cut W resulting in a softer and more muted Level 0 127 Output Level reverberance If you do not want to cut the high frequencies se
329. persons CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK intended to alert the user to the presence of important NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL literature accompanying the product The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electric products basic precautions should always be followed including the following 1 Read these instructions 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched 2 Keep these instructions particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the 3 Heed all warnings point where they exit from the apparatus 4 Follow all instructions 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the 5 Donotuse this apparatus near water manufacturer 6 Clean only with a dry cloth 12 Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket 7 Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in or table specified by the manufacturer or accordance with the manufacturers instructions sold with the apparatus When a cart is used 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators use caution when moving the cart apparatus heat registers stoves or other apparatus including combination to avoid injury
330. plies less chorus when the CHORUS knob is turned p 71 Changing the Sound s Pitch in Real Time Bender Modulation Lever While playing the keyboard move the lever to the left to lower the pitch or to the right to raise the pitch This is known as Pitch Bend NOTE You can also apply vibrato by manipulating the lever away from you This is known The effect obtained when you as Modulation move the lever may differ according to the tone being used Additionally the effect applied by moving the lever is If you move the lever away from you and at the same time move it to the right or left you can apply both effects simultaneously predetermined for each tone and cannot be changed NEM When the Tone Wheel screen is displayed the Pitch Bend Pitch Bend Modulation Lever is set so that tilting the lever from left to right switches BENDER BENDER L the Rotary effect from fast to slow For details refer to Simulating the Creation of Organ Tones Tone Wheel Mode p 53 Adding Liveliness to the Sound SOUND CONTROL Switching on the Sound Control function suppresses differences in volume for a more consistent sound This is set to OFF when the power is turned on EQUALIZER EFFECTS SOUND HIGH CONTROL ON OFF 8 xx OO ES FREQ LEVEL NOTE Sounds may become distorted with certain tones Press the SOUND CONTROL button getting its indicator to light D 2 M
331. pment p 21 connect an audio device system or headphones 3 Connect the external MIDI device with the MIDI cable as shown in the figure above 4 As described in Turning On the Power p 23 turn on the power of each device Setting the Channels Set the RD 700SX s receive channel to match the external MIDI device s transmit channel For instructions on setting the RD 700SX s Receive channel refer to Setting the Receive Channel Receive Channel p 92 When both channels are matched playing the external MIDI device produces sounds from the RD 700SX s sound generator For instructions on how to set the transmit channel of the external MIDI device refer to the owner s manual for your external MIDI device Selecting RD 700SX Sounds from an External MIDI Device Transmitting Bank Select Controller Number 0 32 and Program Change messages from the external MIDI device to the RD 700SX allows you to switch Setups and Tones Switching Setups The MIDI messages transmitted by the external MIDI device will be received by the RD 700SX to select Setups as shown in the following table Number Bank Select Program Change MSB LSB Number 1 100 085 0 1 100 When switching setups you must match the MIDI channel of the transmitting device with the RD 700SX s Control channel p 81 When switching the tones in each part match the MIDI channel of the transmitting device with the RD 700
332. pses before D0 100W sound D and the effect sound W the Delay A sounds Level 0 127 Output Level When set to 100 the delay times are the same Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time over which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to its specified new setting Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which BYPASS sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS 125 Effect Parameter List 53 T CTRL DLY TIME CTRL DELAY A stereo delay in which the delay time can be varied smoothly Assignable Parameters MEX Control Balance Delay Parameter Value Description Delay Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Delay ms 1 1300 ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Hz note 1 Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay A note Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time over which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to a specified new setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase HF Damp 200
333. pth Cho Rate Fln LE Damp Fregi BXPASO Frequeney at which the low frequency Rate Finer Feedback 16 15000 Hz content of the resonant sound will be cut si shade naar BYPASS no cut Parameter Value Description Level 0 127 Output Level Chorus PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct P Sft Amount 0 10 Amount of resonance sound until the chorus sound is heard P Sft Level 0 10 Volume level of the resonant Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is component synchronized with the tempo P Sft LPF 16 15000 Hz Basic frequency at which the filter cuts Cho Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Modulation frequency of the chorus BYPASS the high frequency portion of the Hz effect Hz resonant component BYPASS no cut Cho Rate note 1 Modulation frequency of the chorus P Sft HPF BYPASS Basic frequency at which the filter cuts b effect note 16 15000 Hz the low frequency portion of the resonant component BYPASS no cut 131 Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description P Sft to Rev 0 127 Volume of additional resonance added Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Modulation rate Hz to resonant component Hz Damper offset 0 64 As the value is increased more of a b note 1 Modulation rate note slight resonance is added to the sound Rate even when the damper pedal is not Depth 0127 Modulation Depth pressed Phase 0 180 deg Amoun
334. ption EQQ 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Adjusts the Q bandwidth of equalization The higher the value the narrower the range of frequencies that are affected ET Depending on the piano Tone selected this setting may not be available Changing Sound Characteristics Tone Modify You can make changes in tones by adjusting the settings of the elements Decay Time Offset The time it is to take following the attack for the volume to decrease Cutoff Offset Adjusts how much the filter is opened Resonance Offset Emphasizes the overtones in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound Excessively high settings can produce oscillation causing the sound to distort Release Time Offset The time it takes after the key is released for a sound to become inaudible NOTE Making abrupt changes in the settings values may cause the sound to become distorted or overly loud Carefully monitor volume levels while making the settings Parameter Value Description Decay Time 64 63 The time it takes for the volume to fall Offset increases as the value is raised lowering the value decreases the decay time Cutoff 64 63 Higher values brighten the sound Offset lower values make the sound seem darker Resonance 64 63 Higher value makes the special quality Offset of the sound stronger lower value reduce these characteristics Re
335. r DUCK GATE The gate will close when the BUILT IN 3 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser volume of the original sound BUILT IN 4 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser decreases cutting the original sound BUILT IN 5 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser DUCK Ducking The gate will close BG STACK1 sealed enclosure 12x2 condenser when the volume of the original BGSTACK2 large sealed enclosure 12x2 condenser sound increases cutting the original MSSTACK 1 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser sound MSSTACK2 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser Attack 0 127 Adjusts the time it takes for the gate to METAL large double stack 12x4 condenser fully open after being triggered STACK Hold 0 127 Adjusts the time it takes for the gate to 2 STACK large double stack 12x4 condenser start closing after the source sound falls 3 STACK large triple stack 12x4 condenser beneath the Reno Release 0 127 Adjusts the time it takes the gate to fully close after the hold time 40 COMPRESSOR Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels smoothing out D0 100W sound D and the effect sound W fluctuations in volume Level 0127 Output level Assignable Parameters MFX Control Threshold Attack Level Parameter Value Description Attack 0 127 Sets the speed at which compression starts Threshold 0 127 Adjusts the volume at which compression begins Post Gain 0 18 dB Adj
336. r Tones Setting the Transposition for Each Individual Zone Transpose You can perform with each Zone transposed to a different pitch When multiple tones are playing you can create a richer sound by setting the two Tones to different octaves Also if the Keyboard Mode is set to Split and you are playing a bass Tone in the lower Zone you can use the Transpose function to play the bass at a lower pitch Parameter Value TRA Transpose 48 0 48 You can also set the same degree of transposition for all parts with TRANSPOSE For details refer to Transposing the Key of the Keyboard TRANSPOSE p 42 Setting the Key Range for Each Zone Key Range When SPLIT is pressed in normal performance conditions the key range is divided at the Split Point and you can play with two different tones on one keyboard Using Key Range allows you to make even more detailed key range settings This sets the lower and upper limit of the key range in each part After moving the cursor to the parameter to be set you can make the setting by pressing the designated key and ENTER Parameter Value LWR Key Range Lower A0 C8 UPR Key Range Upper NOTE This is effective only when SPLIT is on p 38 in the key range settings FUL is displayed when SPLIT is set to OFF In this case SPLIT is automatically switched on when the value is changed to something other than FUL
337. r source as well as connected to the RD 700SX Power Not Coming On Is the power for connected amps and speakers turned on Is the volume turned all the way down No Sound for Specific Part Is the Part s volume level turned down Check following settings ZONE LEVEL sliders p 41 p 64 Part Parameter Volume settings in Edit mode p 92 Are the Part s MIDI Receive channel and the MIDI Transmit channel for the connected MIDI device matched Check the MIDI Receive channel settings with Part Parameter Receive Channel in Edit mode p 92 Is the VOLUME slider turned all the way down Are all connections properly made e When using the RD 700SX as a stand alone instrument be sure to connect with audio cables or use headphones p 21 Are sounds audible with headphones connected If sounds are audible through headphones it may indicate that there is a short in an audio cable or some sort of amp or mixer problem Check the cables and equipment once again No Sound From the Connected MIDI Device Is the device enabled to transmit MIDI messages Set EXTERNAL INTERNAL and ZONE SWITCH to ON p 64 MIDI messages cannot be transmitted if ZONE SWITCH is set to OFF Is the RD 700SX s keyboard controller section MIDI Transmit channel matched to the connected MIDI device s MIDI Receive channel Make the Ch MIDI Transmit Channel settings in the External screen p 62
338. rALJ 7CJC s Owner s Manual Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland Digital Piano RD 700SX Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS p 2 USING THE UNIT SAFELY p 3 and IMPORTANT NOTES p 5 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit owner s manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Roland RD 700Sx Copyright 2004 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture CAUTION The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK S EAE DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR constitute a risk of electric shock to
339. ral seconds the name of the installed wave expansion board appears in the display p 17 expansion board tone lists refer to Patch List for RD 700 and Rhythm Set List for RD 700 in the SRX Series Owner s Manuals However Press NUM LOCK to turn on the button indicator some of the tone names may be displayed differently on the RD 700SX Refer to Wave Expansion Board Tone Name Correspondence Table p 36 Press INC DEC or press the TONE SELECT buttons to select the Tone When using the TONE SELECT buttons to input Tone numbers press ENTER afterwards to set the number Play the keyboard and you will hear the selected tone Performing with the Keyboard Selecting Tones Without Pressing NUM LOCK You can select tones stored on expansion boards with NUM LOCK off Press EXPANSION A or B to make its indicator light Use the TONE SELECT buttons and DEC INC to select the tone Wave expansion board tones are assigned to the TONE SELECT buttons as shown below TONE SELECT GUITAR BRASS VOICE RHY BASS WINDS SYNTH GM2 CLAV PIANO EPIANO MALLET ORGAN STRINGS PAD U U U U JEJE U o 1 2 3 4 5 7 s 001 011 021 031 041 051 061 071 081 Rhythm Tone Set Number 010 020 030 040 050 060 070 080 090 091 100 101 3 Play the keyboard and you will hear the selected tone Wave Expansion Board Rhythm Set Tone Numbers W
340. re not applied to Tones for which the Tone Info Specifying the Zone on Which to Use the Multi effects MEX settings are set to 00 THRU p 71 With the RD 700SX you can use two different multi effects simultaneously Thus D the RD 700SX features settings parameters called MEX Source for selecting the multi effects settings to be used and MEX Dest for selecting the zone to which the multi effects are applied Therefore when multiple zones are being played please note that according to the MFX Source and MFX Dest settings there may be certain zones to which no multi effects are applied For more detailed information refer to MFX Source p 86 and MFX Dest p 87 You can change a variety of Multi effects settings beyond just the Multi effects type by holding down SHIFT and pressing MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF For details refer to Making Multi Effects Settings p 86 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Simulating the Creation of Organ Tones Tone Wheel Mode When any of the TW Organ 1 10 Tones is selected for any of the INTERNAL Zone UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWER1 LOWER you can perform in Tone Wheel mode in which the creation of organ sounds is simulated An organ features nine harmonic bars that can be drawn in and out and by using the bars in different combinations of positions a variety of different tones can be created Different Feet are assigned to each bar with
341. re the same as for the High Gain 15 15 dB Amount of boost cut for the high Delay R b note 1 Delay L frequency range Feedback Mode NORMAL Selects the way in which delay sound is Balance D100 0W Volume balance of the original sound CROSS fed back into the effect See the figures D0 100W D and delay sound W above Level 0 127 Output volume Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative 45 SERIAL DLY SERIAL DELAY set invert the phase AT HF Dam 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above whic This delay connects two delay units in series Feedback can be applied P BYPASS 8b E d fed uius S ffect is filtered independently to each delay unit allowing you to produce complex out If you don t want to filter out any delay sounds high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Assignable Parameters Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is MEX Control Balance Delay1 Delay2 Pan synchronized with the tempo Parameter Value Description Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz Delay1 Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is Be f modulati synchronized with the tempo Rate b note 1 Frequency of modulation note Delay1 ms 1 1300 ms Delay time from when sound is input to Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation delay 1 until the delay sound is heard Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Hz Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain
342. repair the unit or replace parts S Never use or store the unit in places that are e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct ex sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of heat generating equipment or gt are Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are Humid or are Exposed to rain or are Dusty or are e Subject to high levels of vibration This unit should be used only with a rack or stand that is recommended by Roland AN About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The 6 symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING When using the unit with a rack or stand recom mended by Roland the rack or stand must be carefully p
343. reserve these tone settings record them to a setup p 56 Pressing ONE TOUCH E PIANO sets the entire keyboard to play with the electric piano tone You can now press F1 to switch the type Pressing F1 toggles you between Types A and B MEMD You can use CURSOR A W in the ONE TOUCH X die PIANO screen to adjust the Ultimate amount the grand piano lid is opened PIANO E With the RD 700SX you can also make more detailed settings to make the sound even better match your favorite piano performances You can store a total of four settings configurations two each to PLANO and E PIANO Please refer to each as needed Fine Adjustment of Piano Tones Piano Edit p 73 Fine Adjustment of E Piano Tones E Piano Edit p 76 e Fine Adjustment of the Piano Touch Sense p 74 Performing with the Keyboard Performing with a Variety of Tones The RD 700SX provides 488 types of Tones Each one of these individual sounds is called a tone IS T List p 146 Tones are assigned to the TONE SELECT buttons according to the tone category ccc a selected Try selecting and performing with a number of different tones EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL SEXES EA ME FUNCTION 1 m lt 9 B s s m CT H mum 2
344. rgan This sound generator lets you recreate organ sounds changing the level of each footage p 54 Rhythm and Arpeggiator Functions You can play back Rhythm patterns and perform arpeggios with the press of a single button Enjoy a variety of performance techniques with backing using realistic drum sounds for a real session feel arpeggios and cutting you get just by playing the chords and more p 46 p 48 Fast MIDI Control You can also control various functions such as adjusting volume levels and selecting Tones simply and easily from an external MIDI device This provides fast and intuitive control when using the keyboard on stage p 60 Interface for Full Connectivity The RD 700SX comes equipped with a USB port for connecting to computers You can use this to perform with MIDI data received from the computer and to save the RD 700SX s setup files Additionally two separate MIDI OUT ports allow you to control two different MIDI sound modules simultaneously On top of all this the RD 700SX XLR connectors provide balanced output to connected audio gear enabling you to supply stable audio output Expandability You can install up to two Wave Expansion Boards a favorite for use with Roland s SRX Series Starting with the SRX 02 Concert Grand Tone you can enjoy performing with the most up to date Tones available as they are continually released p 15 Sophisticated Design With its black body the RD 700SX
345. ription 59 TE LE PHONE Disc Noise 0 127 Volume of the record noise Level Assignable Parameters Hum Noise 50 Hz 60 Hz Frequency of the hum noise MEX Control Balance Voice Quality Type Parameter Value Description s Noise SUA Hz pau odd bi us ns Pippi ene Voice Quality 0 15 Audio quality of the telephone voice bi Treble 15 15 dB Bandwidth of the telephone voice Balance D100 0 Volume balance between the direct Hum Noise 0 127 Volume of the hum noise D0 100W sound D and the effect sound W Level Level 0 127 Output level Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct 60 PHONOGRAPH D0 100W sound D and the effect sound W Simulates a sound recorded on an analog record and played back on a Level 0 127 Output level 57 LOFI COMPRS LOFI COMPRESS record player This effect also simulates the various types of noise that are typical of a record and even the rotational irregularities of an old turntable This is an effect that intentionally degrades the sound quality for creative purposes Assignable Parameters MFX Control Total Noise Lev Total W F Frequency Range Balance Assignable Parameters Parameter Value Description MEX Contfol Balante Lori Type Signal Dist 0 127 Depth of distortion Parameter Value Description Frequen
346. ristics of halls or auditoriums Six different types are offered so you can select and use the type that suits your purpose You can set the amount of reverb applied separately for each individual tone p 71 Reverb Type Select the reverb type When you change the Reverb Type the Reverb parameters will be automatically adjusted to the optimal values Rather than setting the reverb parameters one by one you can make the settings more easily by first setting the Reverb Type and then changing only the necessary parameters The way the REVERB indicators light changes with the selected type Parameter Value Reverb Type OFF Description No reverb is used The indicator does not light REVERB Normal Reverb The HALL indicator flashes ROOM Simulates the reverberation of room interiors It produces a well defined and spacious reverberation The ROOM indicator remains lit HALL Simulates the reverberation exhibited by hall It provides a deeper reverberation than the Room reverbs The HALL indicator remains lit PLATE Simulates a plate reverb unit a type of artificial reverb that utilized a metal plate The ROOM indicator flashes GM2 REVERB This is a GM2 reverb The CATHEDRAL indicator flashes CATHEDRAL This reproduces the reverb found in a church cathedral The CATHEDRAL indicator remains lit Other Reverb Settings You can make
347. rus for each Tone T Tone Info Chorus Amount p 71 Changing the chorus type E EDIT 3 Effects Chorus Type p 88 Changing the Multi Effects type Sege udo abu eos EDIT 3 Effects MFX Type p 87 Changing the Multi Effects type for each Tone vo e siet tete ies A ede ttes TT Tone Info MFX Type p 71 Selecting the Part that the Multi Effects applied to Wc ed EDIT 3 Effects MFX Source Dest p 86 Setting the Multi Effects ON OFF for Individual Parts putet ere EDIT 6 Part Parameter MFX Switch p 92 Control Disabling the Pedal or Bender for Individual Parts Zone Info Switch p 70 Changing the function of the MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL knob EDIT 2 Control Control Knob Assign p 85 Changing the function of the pedals hosce EDIT 2 Control FC1 FC2 Pedal Assign p 85 Changing the function of the sliders EE EDIT 2 Control slider Assign p 85 Key Range Setting the Key Range for each INTERNAL Zone PEE Zone Info Key Range p 69 For the USA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement Model Name RD 700SX Type of Equipment Digital Piano Responsible Party Roland Corporation U S Address 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 Telephone 323 890 3700 For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89 336 EEC and LVD 73 23 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMM
348. ry Speed SLOW FAST Low and high frequency rotation speeds Rate SLOW Slow Rate FAST Fast Rate 84 VR PHASER R WfSlow Sp 0 05 10 00 Rate with low frequency rotor set to This phaser is a descendant of the Roland VR Series effects This Hz SLOW rate creates a swirling effect by adding sounds that are out of phase with REWE Past Sp cure E EE the original sound R Wf Accel 0 15 Speed at which the low frequency n rotor s rotation rate changes when the Assignable Parameters i rotation speed is switched MEX Control Rate Resonance Depth R Wf Level 0 127 Low frequency rotor volume Parameter Value Description R Tw Slow Sp 0 05 10 00 High frequency rotor setting Rate Mode Hz Note When this is set to note the effect is Hz This parameter is the same as that for synchronized with the tempo R Tw FastSp 0 05 10 00 the low frequency rotor Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Phaser Frequency Hz Hz Hz R Tw Accel 0 15 D note 1 Phaser Frequency note R Tw Level 0 127 Rate Rotary Separat 0 127 Amount of breadth in the sound Depth 0 127 Depth Rotary Level 0 127 Output volume Resonance 0 127 Feedback Level Step Sw OFF ON Setting this to ON creates a step phaser Step Rate Mode Hz Note When this is set to note the effect is 86 STEREO EQ STE REO EQUALIZE R synchronized with the tempo This is a four band stereo equalizer low mid x 2 high StepRate Hz 0 10 20 00 Rate of stepped changes in phaser effect Hz Hz Assignable Parameters
349. s Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct heard note D0 100W sound D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 127 Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the pitch Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is shifted sound that is fed back into the synchronized with the tempo effect Negative settings will invert Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate at which the 16 step sequence will the phase Hz cycle Hz Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range b note 1 Rate at which the 16 step sequence will High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Rate cycle note Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct Attack 0 127 Speed at which the amount of pitch shift D0 100W sound D and the pitch shifted sound changes between steps W Gate Time 0 127 Duration of the pitch shifted sound at Level 0 127 Output Level each step Fine 100 100 Pitch shift adjustment for all steps 2 cent cent units 62 2V P SHIFTR 2VOICE PITCH Delay Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is SHIFTE R synchronized with the tempo Shifts the pitch of the original sound This 2 voice pit
350. s an effect opposite of what you expect set this parameter to Reverse If you are using a Roland pedal that has no polarity switch set this parameter to STANDARD Parameter Value Damper STND STANDARD FC1 REV REVERSE FC2 81 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Selecting the Display Appearance Display Mode This switches the appearance of the display When INVERT is selected the blue and white portions of the display are the reverse of what they are when NORMAL is selected Parameter Value Display Mode NORMAL INVERT Selecting the Number of Parts Part Mode This selects the number of parts for the RD 700SX When set to 16PART PERF the performance on the keyboard is not affected by MIDI messages from the MIDI IN connector or song data played by the RD 700SX This is useful when you want to perform on the keyboard while playing song data with the RD 700SX Parameter Value Description Temperament JUST MIN Just Minor The scales of the major and minor just intonations are different You can get the same effect with the minor scale as with the major scale PYTHAGOR EAN This scale devised by the philosopher Pythagoras eliminates dissonance in fourths and fifths Dissonance is produced by third interval chords but melodies are euphonious KIRNBERGE R This scale is a modification of the meantone
351. s note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Delay ms 1 2600 ms Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the delay sound is heard Hz Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description 46 MOD DELAY MODULATION DELAY Delay b note 1 Delay time from when the original Adds modulation to the delayed sound sound isheard to when the delay sound is heard note Assignable Parameters Phase NORMAL Phase of the delay NORMAL non MEX Control Balance Depth Delay L Delay R INVERSE inverted INVERT inverted Feedback 98 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to Parameter Value Description be returned to the input negative Delay L Mode ms note When this is set to note the effect is values invert the phase synchronized with the tempo HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Frequency at which the high frequency Delay L ms 1 1300 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is BYPASS content of the delayed sound will be cut heard Hz BYPASS no cut Delay L b note 1 a the time until the delay sound is Pan L64 63R Panning of the delay sound eard note Low Gain 15 15 dB Amount of boost cut for the high Delay R Mode ms note Settings of the Delay R frequency range Delay R ms 1 1300 ms The parameters a
352. s Set to SYSTEM When this is set to SYSTEM Pedal Setting appears in the lower right of the screen Pressing F2 at this point calls up the screen for the function assigned to the pedal Parameter Value Master Volume 0 127 Preventing Equalizer Settings from Being Switched EQ Mode You can store different equalizer settings p 45 for each individual Setup p 56 This setting determines whether or not the Setup equalizer settings values are to be changed when Setups are switched Parameter Value Description EQ Mode SETUP Equalizer settings change when Setups are switched SYSTEM Equalizer settings do not change when Setups are switched When this is set to SYSTEM a HH is displayed in the upper right of each screen Preventing Pedal Settings from Being Switched Pedal Mode You can store separate pedal settings p 85 for each Setup p 56 This setting determines whether or not the pedal settings are switched to the values stored in the setup you are switching to Parameter Value Description Pedal Mode SETUP Pedal settings change when Setups are switched SYSTEM Pedal settings do not change when Setups are switched When this is set to SYSTEM a siu is displayed in the upper right of each screen Parameter Value Function Parameter Setting Changed FCI OF
353. s are applied p 52 MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF Switches the multi effects on off p 52 5 ZONE SWITCH CONTROL ZONE SWITCH Turns each part s sound on and off p 41 ZONE LEVEL slider Adjusts the volume level for each part p 41 When EXTERNAL INTERNAL is on this controls each part for the external MIDI sound generator p 64 In addition when CONTROL ZONE LEVEL is on the tone is changed in real time in response to the assigned parameter and function EXTERNAL INTERNAL Puts the RD 700SX in control of the external MIDI sound generator p 60 RHYTHM SONG Switches RHTYHM and SONG on off p 48 p 50 CONTROL ZONE LEVEL This determines the function of the ZONE LEVEL sliders p 85 ARPEGGIO Switches Arpeggiator on off p 46 SPLIT Puts the keyboard in Split mode wherein you can use more than one tone by having different tones play in different parts of the keyboard p 38 Panel Descriptions CONTRAST CURSOR PIANO ER TONE INFO ZONE INFO ENTER TRANSPOSE Sets the range of the keyboard to transposed p 42 6 DISPLAY This shows the Tone names and the values of various settings etc SHIFT EXIT Pressed to return to a previous screen or to cancel a procedure that is in progress Additionally you can easily call up Edit screens for related parameters for the following functions by holding down this button while pressing buttons turning knobs or operati
354. s set to ALL PART The Reverb Chorus Amount setting for the part selected for MFX Source applies to all parts However when the MFX Source is set to FIXED the Reverb Chorus Amount setting for UPPER 1 applies to all parts When MFX1 Dest is set to SAME MFX The Reverb Chorus Amount setting for the part selected for MFX Source applies to parts assigned the same MFX Type as the part selected for MFX Source Changing the Effect Applied to the Tone MFX Type This sets the multi effect applied to the tone NOTE The MEX selected here may not be applied with certain MFX Source and MEX Dest settings For details refer to MFX Source p 86 MFX Dest p 87 Parameter Value MFX TYPE Refer to Effect Parameter List p 112 Playing Sound Monophonically Mono Poly Specifies whether the tone will play polyphonically POLY or monophonically MONO The MONO setting is effective when playing a solo instrument tone such as sax or flute Additionally when this is set to MONO LEGATO you can have monophonic performances played legato Legato is a playing style in which the spaces between notes are smoothed creating a flowing feel with no borders between the notes This creates a smooth transition between notes which is effective when you wish to simulate the hammering on and pulling off techniques used by a guitarist Parameter Value Description Mono
355. s setting determines whether or not MIDI messages including the information for Note On in the EXTERNAL zone are to be transmitted from MIDI OUT when the EXTERNAL INTERNAL indicator is lit When the ZONE SWITCH indicator for a part is lit on MIDI messages are d the Volume bevelior transmitted from MIDI OUT when the keys for that part are played Individual Zones ZONE When the ZONE SWITCH indicator for a part is not lighted off MIDI messages are SWITCH ZONE LEVEL not transmitted from MIDI OUT even when the keys for that part are played Slider p 41 ZONE SWITCH will turn on or off each time you press it ZONE LEVEL Slider When the EXTERNAL INTERNAL indicator is on ZONE LEVEL sliders adjust the volume level of each of the EXTERNAL Zone Using the RD 700SX As a Master Keyboard Detailed Settings for How to Make Settings Transm itted Par rts 1 Press EXTERNAL INTERNAL getting the indicator to light EXTE RN AL The RD 700SX is set to control the external MIDI devices NOTE When Rec Mode is set to ON in the Utility Rec Setting in Edit mode the EXTERNAL screen as shown to the left is not displayed Set Rec Mode to OFF when setting the MIDI Transmit channel p 101 After pressing EXTERNAL INTERNAL you can then set the following parameters affecting EXTERNAL Zone Ariana OUT Ch MSE LSE PC s 257 064 001 2 Press CURSOR 4 H A YI b H Y to move the cursor QUT Port to the parameter to
356. s the change in the density of the reverb over time The higher the value the more the density increases with time The effect of this setting is most pronounced with long reverb times LF Damp 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency below which the Freq low frequency content of the reverb sound will be reduced or damped LF Damp 36 0 dB Adjusts the amount of damping applied to Gain the frequency range selected with LF Damp With a setting of 0 there will be no reduction of the reverb s low frequency content HF 4000 Hz 12 5 Adjusts the frequency above which the DampFreq kHz high frequency content of the reverb sound will be reduced or damped bounded by hard walls Parameter Value Description Pre LPF 0 7 Cuts the high frequency range of the sound coming into the reverb Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies Level 0 127 Output level of reverberation Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation 145 Tone List MSB Bank Select MSB Control Number 0 LSB Bank Select LSB Control Number 32 PC Program Change PIANO CLAV MALLET STRINGS No Tone Name MSB LSB PC No Tone Name MSB LSB PC No Tone Name MSB LSB PC 1 Superior Grd 87 6 1 42 Funky D 87 66 1 93 SX Strings 1 87 68 1 2 X Ultimate 87 64 2 43 SXClavi 87 66 2 94 Studio Sect 87 68 2 3 Grand RD 87 64 3 44 Clav1 87 66 3 95 Staccato VS 87 68 3 4 Dark Ballad 87 6 4 45 Clav2 8 66 4 96 FullStrings
357. s value continues into the positive or negative direction the Key Touch s five step value is switched automatically in accordance with that value Setting a Constant Volume Level in Response to the Playing Force Velocity This sets the sound to play at a fixed volume regardless of the strength used to play the keyboard the velocity Parameter Value Description Velocity REAL Volume levels and the way sounds are played change in response to the velocity 1 127 Values for the volume and the way sounds are played remain constant Changing the Timing of Sounds in Response to the Velocity Velocity Delay Sens This sets the interval from the time the key is played to when the sound is produced As the value is decreased the timing of the sound is delayed more when more force is used to play the keys As the value is increased the timing of the sound is delayed more when less force is used to play the keys Parameter Value Velo Delay Sens 63 63 Changing the Touch Sensitivity According to the Key Range Velocity Keyfollow Sens This setting changes the touch sensitivity according to the key range being used As the value is increased the touch becomes heavier in the upper registers and lighter in the lower keys Finely Adjusting the Tuning Micro Tune This procedure allows micro tuning of each individual key Parameter Value Type PRST PRESET USER 1 14
358. se pid rim dem et tte rito PLATE GM2 REVERB CATHEDRAL 10 00 1z 20 0000 000a Transmit Fine Tune Switch 0 1 10 00 08 01 0aaa aaaa Reverb Level 0 127 OFF ON 10 00 08 02 0000 00aa reserved 10 00 1z 21 0aaa aaaa Transmit Fine Tune 14 114 A aaa 50 50 10 00 08 03 Hate EEGENEN e ge occ MW uide Prec bi rM ix O I ee ren S Reverb Parameter 1 20 12768 52768 10 00 1z 22 0000 000a Transmit Mono Poly Switch 0 1 10 00 08 52 0000 aaaa 20000 20000 OFF ON EE Kerger 10 00 1z 23 0000 00aa Transmit Mono Poly D I EI 00 00 00 53 Total Size MONO POLY s 4 4 10 00 1z 24 0000 000a Transmit Portamento Switch D I 1 SETUP Internal Zone OFF ON UPPER1 z 0 10 00 1z 25 0000 000a Transmit Portamento Switch Value 0 1 UPPER2 z 1 OFF ON AER ZRII rimel ia A O SO EE LOWER2 z 3 10 00 1z 26 0000 000a Transmit Portamento Time Switch 0 1 OFF ON Address Description 10 00 1z 27 0aaa aaaa Transmit Portamento Time 0 127 A SE SE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 e225 5 5 10 00 1z 00 0aaa aaaa Keyboard Range Lower 0 87 10 00 1z 28 0000 000a Transmit Cutoff Switch 0 1 A0 UPPER OFF ON 10 00 1z 01 0aaa aaaa Keyboard Range Upper 0 87 10 00 1z 29 Oaaa aaaa Transmit Cutoff 0 127 64 63 UD MER LS eat aaa e O IEIS AO PA ARIAS d 10 00 1z 02 0aaa aaaa Velocity Range Lower 1 127 10 00 1z 2A 0000 0
359. ssed setting the RD 700SX to the optimal status for piano performances this screen is displayed PIANO A A Superior 88 Overview of the RD 700SX The Tone Screen Basic Screen The names of the Tones currently selected for the INTERNAL Zone are displayed This is the screen that is ordinarily displayed You can change the INTERNAL Zone UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWERI and LOWER2 Tones and tempo 4 120 ooi Superior Grd The Tone Wheel Screen In the Tone screen when any ORGAN Tone Tone Wheel 1 10 is selected for any of the INTERNAL Zone this screen is displayed when CURSOR d is pressed The mode when this screen is displayed is called Tone Wheel mode and while in this mode you can simulate the creation of sounds using an organ s harmonic bars p 53 Pressing CURSOR b when this screen is displayed returns you to the Tone screen 4 120 4b 867 TH Orsan 5 Ehe Slow The Setup Screen The currently selected Setup is displayed p 56 Pressing CURSOR 4 when the Tone screen or Tone Wheel Screen is displayed switches the RD 700SX to this screen You can also have this screen displayed by pressing SETUP You can change the Setups p 46 p 48 p 50 Pressing CURSOR b when this screen is displayed returns you to the Tone screen or Tone Wheel Screen 4 120 SETUP b RD SETUP EANK A BANK CHANGE The Rhythm Song Arpeggio Screen Pressing CURSOR gt when the Tone s
360. ssed through the flanger With a Flngr Depth 0 127 Adjust the modulation depth of the setting of D100 0W only the chorus flanger effect sound will be output With a setting of Flngr Fbk 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the flanger D0 100W only the chorus sound that sound that is fed back into the effect passes through the flanger will be Negative settings will invert the output phase Level 0 127 Adjust the output level Flngr Bal D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the D0 100W direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the 123 CHORUS DLY CHORUS DELAY direct sound will be output With a This effect connects a chorus and a delay in parallel setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound will be output Assignable Parameters Delay Time 0 1 500 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the MFX Control Chorus Bal Delay Bal Chorus Rate pon EM until the delay The parameters are the same as for 120 CHORUS DELAY Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the delay However the parameter adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is fed back into the delay direct sound and the delay sound input Negative settings will invert the phase Delay HF 200 8000 Hz Adjust the frequency above which 1 24 FLANGR DLY FLANGER DELAY Damp BYPASS delayed sound fed back to the delay This effect connects a flanger and a delay in parallel input will be cut If you do not wa
361. stics Tone Modify You can make changes in tones by adjusting the settings of the elements Decay Time Offset The time it is to take following the attack for the volume to decrease Cutoff Offset Adjusts how much the filter is opened Release Time Offset The time it takes after the key is released for a sound to become inaudible Parameter Value Description Decay Time 64 63 The time it takes for the volume to Offset fall increases as the value is raised lowering the value decreases the decay Cutoff Higher values brighten the sound Offset lower values make the sound seem darker Release Higher values produce longer decay Time set lower values for a clear cut Offset sound NOTE With certain tones the effect may be difficult to distinguish Restore the settings to initial conditions Initialize This restores the One Touch E Piano settings to their initial conditions 1 In Step 3 of the Piano Edit settings instructions p 73 select 5 Initialize and press ENTER To cancel the Initialize press EXIT 2 Press ENTER The confirmation message appears 3 Press ENTER once again The ONE TOUCH PIANO tones are initialized Making Detailed Settings for the E Piano Tones E Piano Edit You can make more detailed settings to fashion just the Tones you want using the E piano Tone selected by pressing ONE TOUCH E PIANO p 3
362. t sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjust the output level 109 REVERB The Reverb effect adds reverberation to the sound simulating an acoustic space Assignable Parameters MEX Control Time Type Balance Parameter Value Description Type ROOMI Select the type of Reverb effect ROOM2 ROOM1 dense reverb with short STAGE1 decay STAGE2 ROOM2 sparse reverb with short HALLI decay HALL2 STAGE1 reverb with greater late reverberation STAGE2 reverb with strong early reflections HALL 1 reverb with clear reverberance HALL2 reverb with rich reverberance Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the reverb sound is heard Time 0 127 Adjust the time length of reverberation 140 0 127 Adjust the output level 110 GATE REV GATED REVERB Gate Reverb is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant sound is cut off before its natural length Assignable Parameters MFX Control Balance Parameter Value Description Type NORMAL Select the type of reverb REVERSE NORMAL conventional gate reverb SWEEP1 REVERSE backwards reverb SWEEP2 SWEEP1 the reverberant sound moves from right to left SWEEP2 the reverberant sound moves from left to right Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the reverb soun
363. t a numerical reading for the value of the setting Pressing F2 toggles you between NUMERIC and GRAPHIC as the format for what you see indicated in the screen GRAPHIC NUMERIC te ES 400 1900 vete 5 Sounds may be distorted with certain knob settings If this The way settings are made differs depending on the format used as follows EES When the Graphic format is used Slightly adjust the knob for the range in which you want to change the value to on the upper of the NUMERIC screen move the cursor Press CURSOR 4 VI gt to adjust the frequency Press CURSOR amp W to adjust the Q When the Numeric format is used e Press CURSOR W 4 YI D to move the cursor Press INC DEC to change the value 3 To turn the equalizer off press EQUALIZER ON OFF extinguishing its indicator 45 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Playing Arpeggios ARPEGGIO The RD 700SX s Arpeggio function lets you produce arpeggios automatically simply hold down some keys and a corresponding arpeggio will be played automatically EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL ZONE SELECT WR FUNCTION CONTRAST High LOWER1 UPPER 1 Nut CHI CHI 1 MEMO Press ARPEGG
364. t as a note value of frequencies of the feedback set this f fy the value of the d d note parameter to BYPASS a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the speed of the modulation l 105 QUAD DELAY QUADRUPLE TAP Depth 0 127 Adjust the depth of the modulation DELAY Phase 0 180 degree Adjust the spatial spread of the sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the low frequency The Quadruple Tap Delay has four delays range The stereo location of each delay sound is as follows Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Assignable Parameters High Gain 15 15 dB Adjust the gain of the high frequency MFX Control Balance range Positive settings will emphasize Parameter Value Description boost the high frequency range Dly1 Time 200 1000 ms Adjust the time delay from the direct Balance D100 0W Adjust the volume balance between the nore oe until when delay 1 sound is D0 100W direct sound and the modulation delay ale sound With a setting of D100 0W only Dly2 Time 200 1000 ms Adjust the time delay from the direct the direct sound will be output and note sound until when delay 2 sound is with a setting of D0 100W only the heard modulation delay sound will be output 138 Effect Parameter List
365. t change when Setups are switched while this mark is indicated With Pedal Mode p 80 set to SYSTEM this mark appears on the upper right of the screen PD Pedal settings do not change when Setups are switched while this mark is indicated About the Function Buttons FUNCTION NUM EDIT WRITE LOCK EESTI L DEMO 3 29 Overview of the RD 700SX EDIT By pressing EDIT to make the indicator light you can enter Edit mode In Edit mode you can make detailed settings for various functions You can exit Edit mode by pressing EDIT extinguishing its indicator WRITE Stores the current settings to Setup p 58 NUM LOCK When NUM LOCK is pressed the button s indicator lights up enabling input of numerical values using the TONE SELECT buttons The button indicators automatically light according to the values set About the CURSOR Buttons S The CURSOR buttons are used for switching screens and for moving to an item whose setting you want to change by moving the cursor Moving Between Display Pages When arrow symbols 4 and k appear at the upper right of the display screen it indicates that there are additional pages in the directions shown by the arrows You can switch screens with CURSOR 4 Jand b SCH Superior Grd amp UPZ 093 3 Strings 1 4 120 TONE LHi 145 SX DC Pass Navigating Among Items To Be Set CURSOR Whe
366. t is fed back into the effect Piessed controls th resoriant sound Negati ms i Pre LPF 16 15000Hz Frequency of the filter that cuts the egative settings will invert the phase BYPASS high frequency content of the input sound BYPASS no cut Delay HF 200 Hz Adjusts the f b hich 00 6000 Hz EE Pre HPF BYPASS 16 Frequency of the filter that cuts the low Damp BYPASS sound fed back to the effect will be cut 15000 Hz frequency content of the input sound If you do not want to cut the high f BYPASS no cut requencies set this parameter to BYPASS Peaking Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency of the filter that boosts cuts Delay Bal D100 0W Adjusts the volumebalancebetween the ASP frequency region ot the aut D0 100W sound that is sent through the delay W so and the sound that is not sent through Peaking Gain 15 15dB Amount of boost cut produced by the the delay D filter at the specified frequency region of Level 0 127 Output Level the input sound Peaking Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 Width of the frequency region boosted 4 0 8 0 cut by the Peaking Gain parameter 77 CHO FLANGER larger values make the region HORUS gt FLANGER narrower c 9 t US h G d J HF Damp 16 15000 Hz Frequency at which the high frequency TS Cere CON ECS A CROEUS ANCA ABET TIU SELLES BYPASS content of the resonant sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Assignable Parameters MFX Control Chorus Bal Fingr Bal Chorus De
367. t of breadth in the chorus sound Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the original D0 100W dry sound D and the chorus sound W 79 PIANO EFX PIANO EFFECTS Led E our This effect enhances the realism of piano tones used with One Touch Piano Assignable Parameters MFX Control Lid Piano Ambience Mic Type Mic Distance Parameter Value Description Lid 1 6 This reproduces the change in sound that occurs when a grand piano s lid is raised or lowered Mic Distance 0 10 This sets the apparent distance of the microphone used in recording the piano s sound Mic Type OFF This sets the kind of the microphone CONDENSE used in recording the piano s sound R DYNAMIC EQ Switch OFF ON Equalizer switch EQ Mid Freq 100 4000Hz Equalizer s basic frequency EQ Mid Gain 12 0 12 0 Amount of boost or cut from the dB equalizer EQ Mid Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 Equalizer bandwidth bandwidth 4 0 8 0 narrows as value is increased Piano 0 5 Piano reverberation Ambience Level 0 127 Output volume 80 E PIANO EFX E PINO EFFECTS This effect enhances the realism of elctric piano tones used with One Touch E Piano Assignable Parameters MEX Control Tone Control Amp Type Parameter Value Description Tone Control 0 127 With 64 as the reference value increasing the value boosts the high 82 VR TREMOLO This tremolo
368. t this parameter 63 S P SHIFTER STEP PITCH SHIFTER Low Gal d rg ow Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range A pitch shifter in which the amount of pitch shift is varied by a 16 step High Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the high range sequence Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct D0 100W sound D and the reverb sound W Assignable Parameters Level 0 127 Output Level MFX Control Rate Attack Gate Time Balance Parameter Value Description Step 01 16 24 12 semi Amount of pitch shift at each step semitone units 128 Effect Parameter List 65 GATED REV GATED REVERB This is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant sound is cut off before its natural length Assignable Parameters MFX Control Balance Parameter Value Description Type NORMAL Type of reverb REVERSE NORMAL conventional gated reverb SWEEPI REVERSE backwards reverb SWEEP2 SWEEP1 the reverberant sound moves from right to left SWEEP2 the reverberant sound moves from left to right Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Gate Time 5 500 ms Adjusts the time from when the reverb is heard until it disappears Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct D0 100W sound D and th
369. tc Keyboard Controller Section This section includes the keyboard the Pitch Bend Modulation Lever the panel knobs the sliders and any pedal connected to the rear panel Actions such as pressing and releasing of keys on the keyboard depressing a pedal and so forth are converted to MIDI messages and sent to the sound generator section or to an external MIDI device Sound Generator Section The sound generator section produces the sound Here MIDI messages received from the keyboard controller section or external MIDI device are converted to musical signals which are then output as analog signals from the OUTPUT and PHONES jacks Units of Sound When using the RD 700SX you will notice that a variety of different categories come into play when working with sounds What follows is a simple explanation of each sound category Tone The individual sounds used when playing the RD 700SX are referred to as Tones The RD 700SX provides 488 types of Tones Tones are assigned to each part The Tones also include various groups of percussion instrument assembled into Rhythm Sets Each key note number of a Rhythm Set will produce a different percussion instrument Part A sound generator of this type which can control multiple sounds using one device is referred to as a multitimbral sound generator The RD 700SX contains a multitimbral sound generator capable of playing sixteen To
370. te images in sync with the playback of the RD 700SX Press V LINK again V LINK will go out and the V Link setting will be off V Link Settings Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU S File Utility USB 6 Part Parameter 7 Rhythm Arressio 8 V Link 9 Utility Press CURSOR 44 Y to select 8 V Link Press ENTER to display the Edit screen EDIT V Link 19 A T WRITE LOCAL OFF Lowest No Press CURSOR 44 W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set Press INC DEC to set the value When you have finished making the settings press EXIT You are returned to the previous screen If you want to save this settings press F1 WRITE Settings saved in the RD 700SX are not deleted even when the power is turned off ET The RD 700SX does not support the Edirol DV 7PR s Dual Stream mode 97 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Detailed Settings of V Link V Link Mode This selects the type of MIDI message output Parameter Value Description V Link BANK PC PC Clip output with the white keys Mode Bank Select Pallet output with the black keys NOTE Note output V Link Tx Channel This selects the MIDI channel used in outputting messages Parameter Value V Link Tx Channel 1 16 V Link OUT Port This selects the port used for outputting messages
371. te terrere es 22 Pedal Assign ioter tenete 85 PEDAL Jacks dieit hes 14 Pedal MOE er RR 80 Pedal s Polarity sss 81 PHONES Jack ette eredi 14 PIANO catarata 13 32 73 Piano Edit nee ctas eredi needed 73 Pitch Bet eto Ro oup 44 Pitch Bend Modulation Lever 13 PO LE eo nm ea i analis 92 POR ae nre een ch enon ena DEO 67 Portamento External Zone gege ege eieiei eet 67 Tone Info eoa ode ete 71 Portamento SW sis 71 Portamento Switch External Zem 67 Tone Info inertie a ln poatea deed 71 Portamento Time External Zone eese 67 Tone Infor odit n eec cde dea 71 POWER iia e dr 23 POWER ON u tte o te e 23 POWER ON Switch 14 Program Change shine edes 63 R Ree Modes aia 101 ReciSetting omar deeg 101 Receive Channel eene 92 Recording one etie Het ico a Sevan set 102 REL selasa a ia dain tahitian 66 Release Time E Piano Edit cuina nlai at has yas 77 External Zone a s u Sa Cum So 66 Piano FdE u t unn ebd 76 Tone Infos inm oe ce pd as 72 RES 4 aant neta m ed det iin ra arre 66 Resonance E Prano Edit ai it 77 External Zeus 66 Tone Info a s naqa ananpi detente nt 72 Resonance Depth ss 75 Resonance Level aa 75 Resonance Pitch uri taedia 75 RE Von ata anam aa haywanki q iens 65 REVERB icc a8 aceon ees 12 43 eu erbei dis iaa 43 Et sus det e no ede ds 87
372. tem Settings System Functions that affect the RD 700SX s overall operating environment are called System functions How to Make Settings 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU 1 Kes Touch Z Control 3 Effects 4 5ound Control w 2 Press CURSOR 44 to select 0 System 3 Press ENTER to display the Edit screen EDIT System b Master Tune Master Volume EG Mode Pedal Mode Tone Remain WRITE EDIT System Clock Source Clock Out SETUP Ctrl Ch Device ID 17 USB Driver ORIGINAL EDIT System 4 Damper Polarity FCL Polarity 5 WRITE 4 Press CURSOR 4 VI b to switch screens and press CURSOR 44 W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC DEC to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator If you want to save this settings press F1 WRITE Settings saved in the RD 700SX are not deleted even when the power is turned off However following settings are not memorized Device ID p 81 79 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT For more on the following system function parameters refer to the corresponding pages Master Tune p 27 USB Driver p 106 Adjusting the Volume Master Volume Adjusts the volume of the entire RD 700SX Assigning the Pedal Function When Pedal Mode i
373. ter the Cutoff Freq Hz The parameters are the same as for the 1 f HPF Cuts the frequency range below Tw Fast Rate Se 0 00 woofer the Cutoff Freq TWT U 0 x Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter ee Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from when the Tw Trans 0 127 a direct sound begins until the flanger Down sound is heard E AR Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is Spread 0 10 c x ird E pun ao synchronized with the tempo The 18 er the venue set the wider the Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Frequency of modulation Hz sound is spread out Hz Low Gain RE Cun brie low ps note 1 Frequency of modulation note High Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the high range Rate A Level 0 127 Output Level Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct D0 100W sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 117 Effect Parameter List 25 STEP FLANGR STEP FLANGER This is a flanger in which the flanger pitch changes in steps The speed at which the pitch changes can also be specified in terms of a note value of a specified tempo Assignable Parameters
374. tera ere in 98 Transferring the RD 700SX s Settings to an External MIDI Device Bulk Dump 98 Restoring the settings to the factory condition Factory Reset 100 Connecting External MIDI Devices 101 Recording RD 700SX Performances to an External MIDI Sequencer sse 101 Connecting to an External Sequencer sse 101 Settings for Recording Rec Setting ss 101 Recording th Performances oue tee dutem e ote tetendit edes 102 Exiting Rec Mode eere A a Givi ient 102 About the Local Switch eed iie tie re ce ore tee terea i tei erba 102 Playing the RD 700SX s Internal Sound Generator from an External MIDI Device 103 Making Connections sine erbe o 103 Setting the Campe 103 Selecting RD 700SX Sounds from an External MIDI Device 103 Switching Setups acepten tree mpi atit A bed ere pa tei Q ras 103 Switching Tones aaa ka apa a uuu An e hg eid e beu 103 10 Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode 104 About USB Penne miii e heben EENS 104 Switching Between Storage Mode and MIDI Mode 104 Exchanging Files with Computers Storage Mode 105 CONNECHIONE 105 Cautions Regarding Folders and Files ss 105 Exchanging Files eterne ertet dt 105 Exiting Storage Mode etre ete ent eerte iint erit trn per eve ie dicas 105 Exchanging MIDI Messages with Your Computer MIDI Mo
375. tested 178 Panel Descriptions V LINK O VOLUM O ROOM O HALL Lo O CATHEDRAL C a 1 V LINK Switching this on lets you control external V LINK compatible video equipment connected to the RD 700SX p 97 2 VOLUME Slider Adjusts the overall volume that is output from the rear panel OUTPUT jacks and PHONES jack p 24 3 EQUALIZER EFFECTS SOUND CONTROL Switching this on reduces inconsistencies in the volume and produces a more stable coherent sound p 44 LOW knob Adjusts the sound s low frequency range p 45 MID FREQ knob Adjusts the midrange frequencies p 45 MID LEVEL knob Adjusts the sound s midrange frequency range p 45 HIGH knob Adjusts the sound s high frequency range p 45 ON OFF Turns the equalizer on off p 45 4 REVERB CHORUS DELAY MULTI EFFECTS REVERB DEPTH knob Adjusts the amount of reverb p 43 REVERB Changes the reverb type p 43 CHORUS DELAY DEPTH knob Adjusts the amount of chorus p 43 12 EQUALIZER EFFECTS REO REVERB CHORUS DELAY MULTI EFFECTS CHORUS O DELAY sl ON OFF D DEPTH DEPTH ZONE SWITCH CONTROL EXTERNAL RHYTHM Q Q Q Q INTERNAL SONG 2 LOWER 1 2 UPPER 1 T T E CONTROL 0 ZONE LEVEL ARPEGGIO 7 T SPLIT TRANSPOSE 23 CONTROL 1 E CHORUS DELAY Changes the chorus type p 43 MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL knob Adjusts the way that effect
376. the High Gain 15 15 dB Amount of boost cut for the high sound is modulated frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance of the original sound Assignable Parameters D0 100W D and effect sound W MEX Control Speed Resonance Mix Pan Level 0 127 Output volume Parameter Value Description Mode 1 2 3 4 Higher values will produce a deeper 1 7 TREMOLO phaser effect Cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound Speed 100 100 Speed at which to raise or lower the frequency at which the sound is Assignable Parameters modulated MFX Control Rate Depth Mod Wave upward downward Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Parameter Value Description Mix 0 127 Volume of the phase shifted sound Mod Wave TRI SOR Modulation Wave Pan L64 63R Panning of the output sound SIN SAWI TRI Triangle wave Low Gain 15 15 dB Amount of boost cut for the low SAW2 SQR Square wave frequency range SIN Sine wave High Gain 15 15 dB Amount of boost cut for the high SAWI 2 paca wave frequency range SAW1 SAW2 Level 0 127 Output volume 115 Effect Parameter List Parameter Value Description 20 SLICER Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect
377. the TONE SELECT buttons This function allows you to select Setups more quickly You can register a total of 40 setups ten tones in each of the four banks to the Favorite Setups MEMO Settings registered in the RD 700SX are not deleted even when the power is turned off Press SETUP to call up the Setup you want to register Make sure NUM LOCK is off at this time Press F2 to select the bank to which you want to register the Setup Hold down F1 and press the TONE SELECT button for the registration destination The Setup is registered to the button that is pressed 57 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Storing Settings to Setups WRITE lt d s z D If you want to use the changed content as a new Setup use the following procedure to save the settings to a Setup You can also change the name of a Setup You can store 100 Setups on the RD 700SX EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL i ONE TOUCH OWERT Ul O Low O LOWERZ ur PPER 1 PER 2 O CH CT muunm 3 Press WRITE getting the indicator to light The Setup screen appears Un SETUP 4 New Setup Name ALSRHTIREE Gru i Destination Ha CF Chanae nest DELETE INSERT Press CURSOR 4 VI b to move the cursor to
378. the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 164 For the checksum refer to 168 page 160 MIDI Implementation OData set 1 DT1 This is the message that actually performs data transmission and is used when you wish to transmit the data Status Data byte Status FOH 41H dev 00H 00H 03H 12H aaH bbH F7H ccH ddH eeH ffH sum Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev Device ID dev 10H 1FH 7FH Initial value is 10H 00H Model ID 1 RD 700SX 00H Model ID 2 RD 700SX 03H Model ID 3 RD 700SX 12H Command ID DT1 aaH Address MSB upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent bbH Address upper middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ccH Address lower middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ddH Address LSB lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent eeH Data the actual data to be sent Multiple bytes of data are transmitted in order starting from the address ffH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Theamount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data and data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size Refer to the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 164 Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less and each packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms Reg
379. the positions where the characters are to be input Press INC DEC to enter the characters The following characters are available space amp 0 9 lt gt 7 A Z M a z l When F2 is pressed a single character blank space is inserted pressing F1 deletes one character Repeat steps 2 3 to input the name Press CURSOR w to move the cursor to the destination Setup name Select the save destination Setup either by pressing INC DEC When using the TONE SELECT buttons to input Setup numbers press ENTER afterwards to set the number CRD SETUP 1 GER Gd bp Gey 1 Cal Chase Hanne HEITE MEMD You can use the TONE SELECT buttons to directly specify and enter characters MED The file that the file name starts from dot cannot be written MED Pressing CURSOR W even while inputting the name moves the cursor to the save destination Setup number Using the Convenient Functions in Performances When you have finished determining the save destination and the name for the new Setup press ENTER or F1 The ENTER indicator is flashing and the confirmation message appears CRD SETUP 1 GER RHVIRE amp B Gru 1 Are uou Sure note Never switch off the power while Writing appears in the display Doing so may damage the internal memory making it impossible to use this instrument If you do not want to save the Setup press EXIT
380. the slow speed SLOW of the Hz high frequency rotor Lo Slow Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the slow speed SLOW of the Hz low frequency rotor Hi Fast Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the fast speed FAST of the high Hz frequency rotor Lo Fast Rate 0 05 10 00 Adjust the fast speed FAST of the low Hz frequency rotor 95 LIMITER The Limiter compresses signals that exceed a specified volume level preventing distortion from occurring Assignable Parameters MEX Control Threshold Release Parameter Value Description Threshold 0 127 Adjust the volume at which compression will begin Release 0 127 Adjust the time from when the volume falls below the Threshold Level until compression is no longer applied Ratio 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 Adjust the compression ratio 100 1 135 Effect Parameter List 96 HEXA CHO HEXA CHORUS Hexa chorus uses a six phase chorus six layers of chorused sound to give richness and spatial spread to the sound Assignable Parameters MFX Control Rate Balance Parameter Value Description Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjust the rate of modulation Depth 0 127 Adjust the depth of modulation Pre Delay Deviat 0 20 Pre Delay determines
381. ting of D100 0W only the overdrive sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the 11 2 OVD RV FLN BRE sound that is ind through the OVERDRIVE FLANGER delay will be output This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in series Level 0 127 Adjust the output level Assignable Parameters MFX Control Flngr Bal FIngr Rate OD Drive Parameter Value Description OD Drive 0 127 Adjust the degree of overdrive distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion OD Pan L64 0 63R Adjust the stereo location of the overdrive sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Flngr PreDly 0 0 100 0 ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flngr Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect Flngr Depth 0 127 Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect Flngr Fbk 98 98 Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Fingr Bal D100 0W D0 100W Adjust the volume balance between the overdrive sound that is sent through the flanger and the overdrive sound that is not sent through the flanger With a setting of D100 0W only the overdrive sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the overdrive sound that
382. tion Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action MIDI Buffer Full Due to an inordinate volume of MIDI messages received the RD 700SX has failed to process them properly Reduce the amount of MIDI messages to be transmitted MIDI Communication Error A problem has occurred with the MIDI cable connections Check that MIDI cables are not broken or pulled out BULK DUMP Receive Data Error A MIDI message was received incorrectly If the same error message is displayed repeatedly there is a problem with the MIDI messages that are being transmitted to the RD 700SX File Error A file can t be read Or a file may be broken Be sure you re using Standard MIDI Files MID is used as the extension and Setup Files RDS is used as the extension System Error There may be a problem with the system Turn on the power once again then repeat the procedure Other Messages Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action Now writing Bulk Dump Data Keep on POWER Indicated when Bulk Dump data is being received Once received the data is written to the RD 700SX s internal memory be absolutely sure not to tur
383. tion The higher the value Parameter Value Description Mic Type OFF No microphone is used CONDENSER This is a simulation of a small condenser mic used for musical instruments The mic features a very bright high end DYNAMIC This simulates the type of dynamic mic used widely for vocals and instruments Distance 0 10 The distance to the microphone decreases as the value is raised and the distance increases as the value is lowered Adjusting the Resonant Sounds When the Keys are Pressed String Resonance When the keys are pressed on an acoustic piano the strings for keys that are already pressed also vibrate sympathetically The function used to reproduce is called String Resonance Parameter Value Description String Resonance OFF 1 5 Increasing the value will increase the amount of effect Making the Midrange Equalizer Settings EQ SW EQ Gain EQ Frequency EQ Q This sets the midrange equalization Parameter Value Description EQ SW ON OFF This determines whether the following EQ Gain EQ Frequency and EQ Q settings are enabled ON or not OFF the narrower the range of frequencies that are affected Changing the Key Touch Key Touch You can make advanced settings for the touch used for the keys Parameter Value Description Key Touch SUPER LIGHT An even
384. tions 1 Turn off the power to the RD 700SX 2 Start up the computer 3 Connect the RD 700SX and the computer with the USB cable 4 Turn on the power to the RD 700SX 5 Press EDIT 6 Press CURSOR amp W to select 5 File Utility USB then press ENTER 7 Press CURSOR W to select USB Storage then press ENTER A following screen appears EDIT USE Storase Please connect the USB Cable then Press CF21 CONNECT button CONNECT When Storage mode is not selected in the USB settings the warning USB is in MIDI Mode is displayed when ENTER is pressed in Step 7 EDIT USB Storase USE is in MIDI Mode Press F2 to Storase Mode acu E If you want to switch to USB Storage mode press F2 Set to Storage the instrument switches to USB mode and the USB Storage screen opens To cancel the procedure press F1 EXIT 8 Press F2 CONNECT Connecting appears in the display and the process of connecting begins EDIT USB Storase Connectins EXIT When the connection is acknowledged Connected appears permitting confirmation of the files on the computer A USB storage screen appears NOTE Some time may be required after the message Connected is displayed before files can be recognized with the computer Cautions Regarding Folders and Files Please observe the following points when you have the RD 700SX connect
385. trol Speed Brake Tw Fast Rate Wf Fast Rate Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Parameter Value Description High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range I Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct Speed SLOW FAST Rotational speed of the rotating speaker I D0 100W sound D and the chorus sound W Brake OFF ON Switches the rotation of the rotary Level 0 127 Output Level speaker When this is turned on the rotation will gradually stop When itis turned off the 24 FLANGER r tation welll gradually resume This is a stereo flanger The LFO has the same phase for left and Wf Slow Rate 0 05 10 00 Low speed rotation speed of the woofer 2 a Hz right It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet Wf Fast Rate 0 05 10 00 High speed rotation speed of the airplane taking off or landing A filter is provided so that you can Hz woofer adjust the timbre of the flanged sound Wf Trans Up 0 127 Adjusts the rate at which the woofer rotation speeds up when the rotation is Assignable Parameters switched from Slow to Fast MFX Control Depth Rate Feedback Balance Wf Trans Down 0 127 Adjusts the rate at which the woofer mE 3 CE Parameter Value Description rotation speeds up when the rotation is z switched from Fast to Slow Filter Type OFT Type filter LPF OFF No filter is used Wf Level 0 127 Volume of the woofer HPF LPF Cuts the frequency range above Tw Slow Rate 0 05 10 00 Settings of the twee
386. ttings santa adios aaa asnaq shukku iiie ed lacado 68 Selectine the Ti EE eur 68 Setting the Volume and Pan Volume Pan s ss 68 Setting the Zone to Which Multi effects Are Applied MFX1 MFXQ2 Source 68 Setting the Transposition for Each Individual Zone Transpose e 69 Setting the Key Range for Each Zone Key Range 69 Setting the Change in Volume According to the Force Used to Play the Keyboard Velocity Range eng Mast aa ne eere et edis ve le enge Ee 69 Assigning Internal Parts to INTERNAL Zone Part Assen 69 Turning the Controllers in Each Zone On and Off 70 Making Tone Settings Tone Info 70 How to Make Settings uusha mt nette er rrr tiet crt anaq 70 Selecting the Part and the Tone to Be Set Part Tome 71 Setting the Reverb Chorus Depth Reverb Chorus Amount ss 71 Changing the Effect Applied to the Tone MEX Type 71 Playing Sound Monophonically Mono Poly ss 71 Changing the Pitch Coarse Tune Fine Tune 71 Creating Smooth Pitch Changes Portamento Switch Time 71 Changing Tone Elements Attack Time Release Time Cutoff Resonance Decay Time 72 Changing the Bend Range Bend Range 72 Making Detailed Settings for the ONE TOUCH Tones 73 Making Detailed Settings for the Piano Tones Piano Edit 73 Making the Settings ue eniin ether level rop ha era dentaire 73 Selecting the Piano Sound etre reete eb REPRE REPRE Ser kb En P
387. ture of the high frequencies adding Modulation TRI SOR How the cutoff frequency will be sparkle and tightness to the sound Wave SIN SAW1 modulated SAW2 TRI Triangle wave Assignable Parameters SQR Square wave MEX Control Sens Mix SIN Sine wave SAW1 Sawtooth wave upward Parameter Value Description SAW2 Sawtooth wave downward Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Mix 0 127 Level of the overtones generated by the SAW1 SAW2 enhancer Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level Rate Mode Hz note When this is set to note the effect is synchronized with the tempo Rate Hz 0 05 10 00 Rate of modulation Hz 08 AUTO WAH Hz Cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre note 1 Rate of modulation note Rate Assignable Parameters Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation MFX Control Manual Sens Rate Depth Phase Attack 0 127 Speed at which the cutoff frequency will um change Parameter Value Description This is effective if Modulation Wave is Filter Type LPF BPF Type of filter SQR SAW1 or SAW2 LPF The d effect will be applied over a wide frequency range Level a es BPF The wah effect will be applied over a narrow frequency range 06 STEP FILTER Manual 0 127 Adjusts the center frequency at which This is a filter whose cutoff frequency can be modulated in steps You the effect is applied Peak 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the wah ef
388. u Su OFF WRITE 4 Press CURSOR dh I W to select USB Mode 104 6 To switch the USB mode press ENTER If you decide not to switch press EXIT MIDI mode will be selected 7 Press CURSOR 44 W to select USB MIDI Thru Sw 8 Use INC DEC to select USB MIDI Thru switch This setting determines whether the MIDI signals arriving at the MIDI IN connector are transmitted without change from the USB port ON or are not transmitted OFF 9 If you want to save settings press F1 Write For details on operations in MIDI mode refer to Exchanging MIDI Messages with Your Computer MIDI Mode p 106 Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode Exchanging Files with Computers Storage Mode You can connect the RD 700SX to your computer with a USB cable and save back up the files contained in the RD 700SX s User memory to the computer s hard disk or other media You can also use SMF data created on computers with the RD 700SX In this manner you can use USB Storage mode to transfer Setups SMF data and other files back and forth between the RD 700SX and the computer NOTE Connect and disconnect the USB cable only while the RD 700SX is turned off Also be absolutely sure never to disconnect the USB cable or turn off the power to the equipment while the RD 700SX is in USB mode or when data is being transferred NOTE Use a USB Cable no longer than 3 meters Connec
389. und 1s Feedback be returned to the input of delay 2 heard note negative values invert the phase Delay RMode ms note Settings of the Delay R Dly2 HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Frequency at which the high frequency Delay R ms 1 2600 ms The parameters are the same as for the BYPASS content of the delayed sound of delay 2 Delay R P note 1 Delay L will be cut BYPASS no cut Delay C Mode ms note Settings of the Delay C Pan Loco Panning of the delay sound Delay C ms 1 2600 ms The parameters are the same as for the Low Gain 15 15 dB Amount of boost cut for the low ote Delay L frequency range Delay C A High Gain 15 15 dB Amount of boost cut for the high Center 98 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound frequency range Feedback that s fed back into the effect Negative Balance D100 0W Volume balance of the original sound settings invert the phase D0 100W D and delay sound W HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which Level 0 127 Output volume BYPASS sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you do not want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Left Level 0 127 Volume of each delay 123 Effect Parameter List
390. und to reach full volume DCY Decay Time Offset The time it is to take following the attack for the volume to decrease REL Release Time Offset The time it takes after the key is released for a sound to become inaudible COF Cutoff Offset Adjusts how much the filter is opened RES Resonance Offset This boosts the portions in the region around the cutoff frequency lending a particular quality to the sound Excessively high settings can produce oscillation causing the sound to distort Parameter TX CC Value Description ATK CC73 OFF Higher values produce a 64 63 milder attack lower values produce a sharper attack The time it takes for the vol ume to fall increases as the value is raised lowering the value decreases the decay time DCY CC75 REL CC73 Higher values produce longer decay set lower val ues for a clear cut sound COF CC74 Higher values brighten the sound lower values make the sound seem darker RES CC71 Higher value makes the special quality of the sound stronger lower value re duce these characteristics 66 Using the RD 700SX As a Master Keyboard Smoothly Changing the Pitch Portamento Portamento is a function that causes the pitch to change smoothly from one note to the next note played The Portamento Time setting determines the time for the change in pitch when the portamento effect is applied to
391. up Using the Utility Bulk Dump Temporary in Edit mode transmit the contents of the selected Setup to the external sequencer For instructions on carrying out this operation refer to Transferring the RD 700SX s Settings to an External MIDI Device Bulk Dump p 98 6 Perform on the RD 700SX 7 When the performance is finished stop recording with the external sequencer Recording is now complete You can then listen to the recorded performance by playing it back on the external sequencer Exiting Rec Mode When Rec Mode is set to ON you cannot change the EXTERNAL settings When you have finished recording the performance use the procedure described in the previous section Settings for Recording to set Rec Mode to OFF NOTE The settings made in Rec Setting cannot be saved Rec Setting automatically switch to Rec Mode OFF Local Switch ON when the power is turned on 102 About the Local Switch The switch that connects and disconnects the MIDI connection between the keyboard controller section and the sound generator section p 28 is called the Local switch Since essential information describing what is being played on the keyboard won t reach the sound generator if the Local switch is set to OFF the Local switch should normally be left ON However if while performing you want to send that performance data to an external sequencer as MIDI messages to be recorded you then perform with the externally c
392. us sound without the reverb applied to it is mixed with the reverb sound REVERB The chorus sound is output with reverb applied to it MAIN The chorus sound without the REVERB reverb applied to it is mixed with the chorus sound to which reverb has been applied Other Chorus Settings You can make even more detailed chorus delay settings When you select a Chorus Type a number of parameters unique to that type are displayed Refer to p 144 for the values that can be set Making the Sound Control Settings Sound Control This is a stereo compressor limiter that is applied to the final output With separate settings for the high frequency range midrange and low frequency range this reduces inconsistencies in volume levels by compressing the sound when the volume exceeds a preset volume level How to Make Settings di Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears zzz EDIT MENU zzz 1 Kes Touch Z Control 3 Effects 4 Sound Control vr 2 Press CURSOR 44 J W to select 4 Sound Control 3 Press ENTER to display the Edit screen EDITCMulti Effects gt MFX Struct MFX1 Source UPPER1 MFX1 Dest SAME MFA Tyre 75 SYM RESNANCE C1 Depth EDITCMulti Effects gt MFX Struct CIN MFXZ Source UPPERZ 1 EQUALIZER Low Gain MEX 4 Press CURSOR amp to select Type 5 Press INC DEC to set the type of
393. usts the output gain Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 4 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Level 0 127 Output level 41 LIMITER Compresses signals that exceed a specified volume level preventing distortion from occurring Assignable Parameters MEX Control Threshold Release Level Parameter Value Description Release 0 127 Adjusts the time after the signal volume falls below the Threshold Level until compression is no longer applied Threshold 0 127 Adjusts the volume at which compression begins Ratio 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 Compression ratio 100 1 Post Gain 0 18 dB Adjusts the output gain Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 4 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Level 0 127 Output level 42 GATE Cuts the reverb s delay according to the volume of the sound sent into the effect Use this when you want to create an artificial sounding decrease in the reverb s decay Assignable Parameters MFX Control Threshold Hold Release Attack Balance Parameter Value Description Threshold 0 127 Volume level at which the gate begins to close 122 43 DELAY This is a stereo delay Assignable Parameters MEX Control Balance Delay L Delay R Parameter Valu
394. utlet or this unit plug from the outlet and pull out all cords from Before moving the unit disconnect the power e external devices Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet p 23 e in your area pull the plug on the power cord out Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning e of the outlet Install only the specified circuit board s SRX Series Remove only the specified screws p 15 board slot cover keep them in a safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally Should you remove the screws fastening the O IMPORTANT NOTES In addition to the items listed under IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS and USING THE UNIT SAFELY on pages 3 and 4 please read and observe the following Power Supply Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter such as a refrigerator washing machine microwave oven or air conditioner or that contains a motor Depending on the way in which the electrical appliance is used power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help
395. wicth is set in EXTERNAL Zone OSostenuto Controller number 66 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 42H vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON n MIDI channel number vv Control value OSoft Controller number 67 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 43H vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON OResonance Controller number 71 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 47H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Resonance value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 These messages are transmitted when Resonance value is set in EXTERNAL Zone ORelease Time Controller number 72 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 48H vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Release Time value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 These messages are transmitted when Release Time is set in EXTERNAL Zone OAttack Time Controller number 73 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 49H vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Attack time value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 These messages are transmitted when Attack Time is set in EXTERNAL Zone OCutoff Controller number 74 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4AH vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 64 0 63 n MIDI channel number vv Cutoff value relative change These messages are transmitted when Cutoff value is set
396. wing values are set e UPPER 1 UPPER 2 Split Point 1 C8 e LOWER 1 LOWER 2 A0 Split Point MED You can change the split point adjusting it in semitone increments by holding down SPLIT and pressing INC of DEC vu When the split point is changed the Key Range p 69 value also changes MED You can freely set whatever key ranges registers you like to each zone DA For details refer to Setting the Key Range for Each Zone Key Range p 69 39 Performing with the Keyboard Changing the Tone for a Zone When changing the tone assigned to a zone use the ZONE SELECT button to specify the zone with the tone you want to change EQUALIZER EFFECTS ZONE SWITCH CONTROL iD HIGH Son minim 2 CII Press the ZONE SELECT button for the part whose tone you want to change causing the zone s indicator to light up The indicator for the currently selected TONE SELECT button lights up in the same color as the indicator for the selected zone Select the tone category with a TONE SELECT button then press INC DEC to select the tone When NUM LOCK is on you can specify tone numbers with the TONE SELECT buttons p 34
397. y ranges When turned on the counter channel of stereo sound is inverted and added to 00 THRU the signal APhase Low 0 127 Adjusts the level settings for the Low 0 1 EQUALIZER Lev frequency ranges ix Adjusting this level for certain This is a four band stereo equalizer low mid x 2 high fre ies all es lend quencies allows you to len Assignabie Parmi ea MEX Control Low Gain Migh Gai Level APhase Mid Sw OFF ON Settings of the Anti Phase function for Parameter Value Description APhase Mid 0 127 the Middle frequency ranges Low Freq 200 400 Hz Frequency of the low range Lev The parameters are the same as for the Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Low frequency ranges Mid1 Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency of the middle range 1 Low Boost Sw OFF ON Turns Low Booster on off Mid1 Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range 1 This emphasizes the bottom to create a Midi Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 Width of the middle range 1 heavy bass sound 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the Low Boost 0 127 Increasing this value gives you a heavier range to be affected Level low end Mid2 Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency of the middle range 2 Depending on the Isolator and filter Mid2 Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the middle range 2 settings this effect may be hard to Mid2 Q 05 1 0 2 0 Width of the middle range 2 distinguish 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the Level 0 127 Output Level range to be affected High Freq 2000 4000
398. yauya n crat li 84 Control Channel eese eere 81 CONTROL knob tee te 85 Control Knob Assign esee 85 CONTROL ZONE LEVEL 12 Ctrl Knob uana aia pin dida 85 Cutoff E Prano Editen dn ti 77 External Zone emma eite oerte 66 Piano Edit sede canone t dud 76 Ten enfo supa eR e tero eo Waaa ts 72 D D mp r unite tada teo nU els 81 DEV dcos tse eR et NOTED 66 Decay Time EPiano Edit sisi oed 77 External Zone viii ias 66 Piano Edit fs sse Gm deren enm 76 Tone Into u p t L st unu u Susu 72 EE 43 DEMO PLAY caca di awu a ayuy 31 Device ID asura A Sau e reb ees 81 Display Mode ss 82 IR 74 Dp Damper Pedal Switch External Zone ss 67 ZONE INC 5 sn d UG eS 70 E EPIANO 20d ee e 13 32 76 E Piano EIE en ge d in met nt tem 76 REI S ta RIA 13 30 Effect Depth iere eee tere 77 Effect Rate alto en dee Testis 77 Effect Type euet eben ee eti ies 77 ECOS s iiio n e NS Eo HT Nee Diis 86 ENTER Stove mm o a E NER T 13 EQ Frequency E Piatio Edit oeu Tarehe niei ettet ttis 77 Piano Edit ne LS Ima 74 EQ Gain Pia o Edit sii s an dele Rr hasqa a E Sas aka 77 Pia o EGIT eie e eite Au ahua eens 74 EO Mode n oe Nr etta 80 EQ Q Piano Edit sn ins iio 77 C E Piano Editada 74 EQ SW E Prano Edit rise die rie ds 77 Piano Edit iue tei shit ni 74 EE 45 80 EB Prano Edit y ee te asa tik Itum 77 Piano Edit uzun n nayana uyu yta 74 EX is aaah n thanks
399. ype SHIFT REVERB Edit Effects Reverb Type p 87 Setting the Reverb Amount 1 SHIFT REVERB Knob Tone Info Reverb Amount p 71 Changing the CONTROL knob parame SHIFT Edit Effects MFX Control 67 ter MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL Knob P Changing the MFX Type SHIFT MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF Edit Effects MFX Type p 87 Changing the Rhythm Patterns Edit Rhythm Arpeggio SHIFT RHYTHM SONG Rhythm Pattern p 93 Changing the Arpeggio Style SHIFT ARPEGGIO Edit Rhythm Arpeggio p 95 Arpeggio Style Selecting the Tone for each Zone 1 SHIFT ZONE SWITCH Zone Info Tone p 68 Adjusting the Volume for each Zone 1 SHIFT ZONE LEVEL Slider Zone Info Volume p 68 Assigning Functions to Sliders SHIFT CONTROL ZONE LEVEL Edit Control Slider Assign p 85 Loading SETUP Files Edit File Utility USB SHIFT SETUP Load SETUP File pu Sr the Transposition for each Tone SHIFT TRANSPOSE Tone Info Coarse Tune p 71 Setting the Key Range for each Zone 1 SHIFT SPLIT Zone Info Key Range p 69 Turning the Controllers are used to con SHIFT Bender Zone Info Bender 5w trol the Zone On and Off 1 p 70 SHIFT Modulation Zone Info Modulation Sw 1 The INTERNAL zone settings are made while EXTERNAL INTERNAL is set to OFF the EXTERNAL zone settings are made while EXTERNAL INTERNAL is set to ON 155 MIDI Implementation Model RD 7008X Digital Piano Date
400. ze 4 Press INC DEC to set the value 5 If you want to save the setting press F1 WRITE The confirmation message appears Press F1 WRITE to save the settings If you want to cancel press EXIT 6 When you finish making settings press EXIT You are returned to the ONE TOUCH PIANO screen Detailed Settings for the ONE Tones NOTE Depending on the piano Tone selected this setting may not be available Selecting the Piano Sound This chooses the piano Tone to be selected when ONE TOUCH PIANO is pressed There are 20 Tones to choose from Changing the Width of the Sound Stereo Width Adjusts the spaciousness of the sound Parameter Value Stereo Width CENTER L01 01R L63 63R Description The higher the value set the wider the sound is spread out Changing the Sound s Nuance Nuance This changes the Tone s subtle nuances by altering the phase of the left and right sounds Parameter Value Nuance TYPE1 2 3 LNOTE This effect is difficult to hear when headphones are used Changing the Sense of Space Surrounding the Sound Ambience Changing the sound s ambience allows you give your performances a sound resembling that obtained in a wide open space Parameter Value OFF 1 5 Description The effect becomes deeper as the value is increased Ambience Changing the Amount of Reverb Effect Reverb
401. zz Kick 2 R amp B Kick House Kick 2 EA Reg Stick Rock Side Stick Jazz Snare Swing R amp B Side Stick 1 R amp B Side Stick 1 38 Reg Snare Rock Snare 1 Jazz Snare 1 R amp B Snare 1 House Snare 1 E Reg Snare Ghost Snare Ghost Pop Snare Swing R amp B Snare 2 House Snare 2 40 Titan Snare Rock Snare 2 Jazz Snare 2 R amp B Snare 3 House Snare 3 m Reg Low Tom Flm Rock Low Tom Flm Jazz Low Tom Flm Sharp Low Tom 6 House Low Tom 1 EN Pop CHH 1 EXC1 Rock CHH 1 EXC1 Pop CHH 1 EXC1 R amp B CHH 1 EXC1 House CHH EXC1 43 Reg Low Tom Rock Low Tom Jazz Low Tom Sharp Low Tom 5 House Low Tom 2 LEO Pop CHH 2 EXC1 Rock CHH 2 EXC1 Pop CHH 2 EXC1 R amp B CHH 1 EXC1 House PHH EXC1 45 Reg Mid Tom Flm Rock Mid Tom Flm Jazz Mid Tom Flm Sharp Low Tom 4 House Mid Tom 1 KE Pop OHH EXC1 Rock OHH EXC1 Pop OHH EXC1 R amp B OHH EXC1 House OHH EXC1 Reg Mid Tom Rock Mid Tom Jazz Mid Tom Sharp High Tom 3 House Mid Tom 2 48 Reg High Tom Flm Rock High Tom Fim Jazz High Tom Flm Sharp High Tom 2 House High Tom 1 ER Pop Crash Cymbal 1 Rock Crash Cymbal Jazz Crash Cymbal R amp B Crash Cymbal House Crash Cymbal 50 Reg High Tom Rock HighTom Jazz HighTom Sharp High Tom 1 House High Tom 2 HEM Pop RideCymbal 1 Pop Ride Cymbal 2 Jazz Ride Cymbal 1 Pop Ride Cymbal 1 House Ride Cymbal 52 Pop Chinese Cymbal Rock Chinese Cymbal Jazz Chinese Cymbal R amp B Chinese Cym Reverse Cymbal 53 Pop Ride Bell Rock Ride Bell Jazz Ride Cymbal 2 R amp B Ride Bell House Ride Bell EZ Ta

Roland RD-700SX User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents